Training Guide

AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)

Foundations
TM-1801

.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This page is intentionally left blank.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 2 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Revision Log
DATE REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION AUTHOR REVIEWED APPROVED

05/03/2013 1.0 Issued for Training AVEVA E3D™(1.1) NG KB PJH

21/01/2014 2.0 Issued for Training AVEVA E3D™(1.1) CT KB KB

19/11/2015 3.0 Issued for Training AVEVA E3D™ (2.1) JD MB KB

Issued for Review AVEVA™ E3D

23/03/2021 3.1 AH
Design 2.1.0.27

15/04/2021 3.2 Reviewed AH SK

Approved for Training AVEVA™ E3D

22/04/2021 4.0 AH SK ST
Design 2.1.0.27
Template version: V5

Updates
Change highlighting will be employed for all revisions. Where new or changed, information is presented
section headings will be highlighted in Yellow.

Suggestion / Problems
If you have a suggestion about this manual or the system to which it refers please report it to AVEVA Training
& Product Support at [email protected]

This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access or which may not
be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your licence
conditions.

Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free
from viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar
losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data
or information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or
expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from
the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such
losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with
the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year
in which the user's claim is brought.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 3 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software
licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take
precedence.

Copyright Notice

All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this Training Guide and the associated
documentation belongs to or is licensed to AVEVA Solutions Limited or its affiliates.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliates companies. The information contained in
this Training Guide and associated documentation is commercially sensitive, and shall not be adapted, copied,
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or medium by any means (including
photocopying or electronic means) without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where
such permission is granted, AVEVA Solutions Limited expressly requires that the Disclaimer included in this
Training Guide and this Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.

Licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency or any other reproduction rights organisation do not apply.
If any unauthorised acts are carried out in relation to this copyright work, a civil claim for damages may be
made and or criminal prosecution may result.

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliate companies shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third
party's intellectual property rights arising from the use of this Training Guide and associated documentation.

Incorporates Qt Commercial, © 2011 Nokia Corporation or its subsidiaries.

@AVEVA Solutions Limited 2015

Trademark Notice

AVEVA™, AVEVA Bocad™, [AVEVA Tags], Tribon and all AVEVA product and service names are trademarks of
AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries.

Use of these trademarks, product and service names belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is strictly
forbidden, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Group plc or AVEVA Solutions Limited. Any
unauthorised use may result in a legal claim being made against you.

All other trademarks belong to their respective owners and cannot be used without the permission of the
owner.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 4 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Table of Contents
1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Aim ................................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.2 Objectives ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
1.3 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 9
1.4 Course Structure............................................................................................................................................ 9
1.5 Using this guide ............................................................................................................................................10
2 Getting Started ............................................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Enter/Login to AVEVA™ E3D Design .............................................................................................................11
2.1.1 Entering AVEVA™ E3D Design – (Worked Example) ................................................................................... 11
2.2 The Model Environment ...............................................................................................................................16
2.3 AVEVA™ E3D Design Disciplines ...................................................................................................................18
2.3.1 Selecting a Modelling Discipline – (Worked Example) ................................................................................ 18
2.4 AVEVA™ E3D Design Forms ..........................................................................................................................19
2.4.1 Docking the Forms ...................................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.2 Hiding the Forms ......................................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.3 Docking and Hiding Forms – (Worked Example) ......................................................................................... 20
2.4.4 Splitting the Sliding Forms Set .................................................................................................................... 21
2.4.5 Arranging Forms in Sliding Forms Sets ........................................................................................................ 21
2.4.6 Using Sliding Form Sets – (Worked Example) ............................................................................................. 22
2.4.7 Undocking the Sliding Forms Sets ............................................................................................................... 23
2.5 PowerWheel Overview .................................................................................................................................23
2.6 PowerCompass Overview .............................................................................................................................25
2.7 In-canvas Commands Overview ....................................................................................................................25
2.8 In-canvas Editor Overview ............................................................................................................................26
2.9 Accessing Help Pages ....................................................................................................................................27
2.10 Closing AVEVA™ E3D Design .........................................................................................................................28
2.11 Set up the Training Course – (Worked Example) ...........................................................................................29
Exercise 1 Using Sliding Forms ............................................................................................................ 30
3 Exploring the Database.................................................................................................................... 31
3.1 The Model Explorer ......................................................................................................................................31
3.2 The Current Element ....................................................................................................................................32
3.3 Element identification ..................................................................................................................................32
3.3.1 Element Types ............................................................................................................................................. 32
3.3.2 Element Names ........................................................................................................................................... 32
3.4 Design Common elements ............................................................................................................................33
3.5 Using the Model Explorer – (Worked Example) ............................................................................................33
Exercise 2 Navigating the Hierarchy .................................................................................................... 35
4 Viewing the 3D Model ..................................................................................................................... 37
4.1 Selecting the Elements to Display in the 3D View .........................................................................................37
4.1.1 Adding Elements to the 3D View ............................................................................................................... 37
4.1.2 Adding other elements to the 3D View ...................................................................................................... 41
4.1.3 Removing Elements from the 3D View ....................................................................................................... 43
4.1.4 The Drawlist Form ....................................................................................................................................... 47
4.1.5 Colours of the Model Elements .................................................................................................................. 47
Exercise 3 Displaying Model Elements ................................................................................................ 48
4.2 Controlling the 3D View................................................................................................................................49
4.2.1 View Limits .................................................................................................................................................. 49
4.2.2 Zooming ...................................................................................................................................................... 51
4.2.3 Rotating the 3D View .................................................................................................................................. 52
4.2.4 View Direction – A Worked Example .......................................................................................................... 53
4.2.5 Panning ....................................................................................................................................................... 56

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 5 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.2.6 Centre View................................................................................................................................................. 56

4.2.7 Stepping back to previous views ................................................................................................................. 56
Exercise 4 Controlling the 3D View ..................................................................................................... 57
4.3 Clipping the 3D View ....................................................................................................................................58
4.3.1 Creating a clipping box – (Worked Example) .............................................................................................. 59
Exercise 5 Clipping the View ............................................................................................................... 65
4.4 Hiding elements ...........................................................................................................................................66
4.5 Element Tooltips ..........................................................................................................................................68
4.6 Settings ........................................................................................................................................................68
5 Working with the Database ............................................................................................................. 70
5.1 Access Rights ................................................................................................................................................70
5.2 Creating elements ........................................................................................................................................70
5.2.1 Selecting a Valid Owner – (Worked Example)............................................................................................. 71
5.2.2 Naming the new element ........................................................................................................................... 72
5.3 Renaming Elements – (Worked Example) .....................................................................................................73
5.4 Copying & Pasting an Element – (Worked Example) .....................................................................................75
5.5 Delete an Element – (Worked Example) .......................................................................................................76
5.6 Modifying the Hierarchy ...............................................................................................................................78
5.6.1 Changing the Owner of an Element – (Worked Example) .......................................................................... 78
5.6.2 Reordering the Hierarchy – (Worked Example) .......................................................................................... 81
5.7 Save Work ....................................................................................................................................................82
5.8 Get Work ......................................................................................................................................................83
5.9 Undo/Redo...................................................................................................................................................83
5.10 The Claim List ...............................................................................................................................................84
5.10.1 View the Claim List ...................................................................................................................................... 84
5.10.2 Claiming Elements ....................................................................................................................................... 85
5.10.3 Unclaiming Elements .................................................................................................................................. 85
Exercise 6 Working with the Database ................................................................................................ 86
6 Modifying Model Elements .............................................................................................................. 88
6.1 Selecting Elements .......................................................................................................................................88
6.1.1 Selecting Elements Individually................................................................................................................... 88
6.1.2 Using a Selection Fence .............................................................................................................................. 89
6.2 Modifying Attributes ....................................................................................................................................90
6.2.1 Using the Attributes form – (Worked Example) ......................................................................................... 90
6.2.2 Using the Properties form – (Worked Example) ......................................................................................... 91
Exercise 7 Modifying Elements Attributes ........................................................................................... 94
6.3 Positioning Elements ....................................................................................................................................96
6.3.1 Setting the Local Coordinate System .......................................................................................................... 96
6.3.2 Specifying a Position ................................................................................................................................. 101
6.3.3 Using the Editor ........................................................................................................................................ 107
6.3.4 Using the Move Command ....................................................................................................................... 113
6.3.5 Other Positioning Aids .............................................................................................................................. 115
Exercise 8 Positioning Elements ........................................................................................................ 116
6.4 Rotating Elements ......................................................................................................................................119
6.4.1 Using the Editor to Rotate ........................................................................................................................ 119
6.4.2 Using the Rotate Command ...................................................................................................................... 120
Exercise 9 Rotating Elements ............................................................................................................ 121
6.5 The Positioning Control Form .....................................................................................................................122
6.5.1 Pick Type ................................................................................................................................................... 122
6.5.2 Pick Method .............................................................................................................................................. 123
6.5.3 Positioning Control – (Worked Example) .................................................................................................. 123

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 6 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

7 Creating Additional Views ............................................................................................................. 126

7.1 Creating an Empty View .............................................................................................................................126
7.2 Copying a 3D View ......................................................................................................................................126
7.3 Grid Plane View ..........................................................................................................................................127
7.4 Displaying Multiple Views ..........................................................................................................................127
7.5 Displaying Multiple Views – (Worked Example) .........................................................................................128
Exercise 10 Creating Additional Views ............................................................................................. 129
8 General Utilities ............................................................................................................................ 130
8.1 Search Utility ..............................................................................................................................................130
8.1.1 More Search Tools .................................................................................................................................... 132
Exercise 11 Search Utility ................................................................................................................ 135
8.2 Collections ..................................................................................................................................................136
8.2.1 System Collections .................................................................................................................................... 137
8.2.2 Create a Shared Collection ........................................................................................................................ 138
8.2.3 My Collections........................................................................................................................................... 142
Exercise 12 Using Collections .......................................................................................................... 143
8.3 Working with Grids ....................................................................................................................................144
8.3.1 Modifying Values ...................................................................................................................................... 144
8.3.2 Sorting a Column ....................................................................................................................................... 146
8.3.3 Freezing a Column..................................................................................................................................... 146
8.3.4 Filtering a column ..................................................................................................................................... 146
8.3.5 Adding columns ........................................................................................................................................ 147
8.3.6 Arranging Columns .................................................................................................................................... 148
8.3.7 Column Units............................................................................................................................................. 149
8.3.8 Grouping ................................................................................................................................................... 150
8.3.9 Column Summaries ................................................................................................................................... 151
8.3.10 Quick Report ............................................................................................................................................. 152
8.3.11 Exporting to Excel ..................................................................................................................................... 153
Exercise 13 Working with Grids ....................................................................................................... 154
8.4 Measuring Functions ..................................................................................................................................155
8.4.1 Measure Distance ..................................................................................................................................... 155
8.4.2 Measure Angle .......................................................................................................................................... 157
8.5 Walk Mode & Fly Mode ..............................................................................................................................159
8.5.1 Walk Mode Controls ................................................................................................................................. 160
8.5.2 Fly Mode Controls ..................................................................................................................................... 161
Exercise 14........................................................................................................................................... 162
8.6 Save & Restore Views .................................................................................................................................163
8.6.1 Saving Views ............................................................................................................................................. 163
8.6.2 Restoring Saved Views .............................................................................................................................. 164
8.6.3 Deleting Saved Views ................................................................................................................................ 164
8.7 Copy Image.................................................................................................................................................164
9 Settings......................................................................................................................................... 166
9.1 PROJECT Tab Options .................................................................................................................................166
9.1.1 Configuration Options ............................................................................................................................... 166
9.1.2 View Options ............................................................................................................................................. 173
9.1.3 Discipline Options ..................................................................................................................................... 173
9.2 View Settings..............................................................................................................................................174
9.3 Drawlist Settings ........................................................................................................................................177
9.3.1 Tabs ........................................................................................................................................................... 177
9.3.2 Display Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 178
9.3.3 Options...................................................................................................................................................... 179
9.4 Graphics Settings ........................................................................................................................................180

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 7 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.4.1 Colour Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 180

9.4.2 Representation Tab ................................................................................................................................... 181
9.4.3 Steelwork Tab ........................................................................................................................................... 185
9.4.4 Cabling Tab ................................................................................................................................................ 185
9.4.5 Plines and Ppoints Tab .............................................................................................................................. 186
9.5 Attributes Form Settings ............................................................................................................................187
- AVEVA™ E3D DESIGN Modules .................................................................................... 188
Model ....................................................................................................................................................................188
Draw ......................................................................................................................................................................189
Isodraft ..................................................................................................................................................................190
Spool .....................................................................................................................................................................190
- AVEVA™ E3D Design Database Elements ..................................................................... 192
World (WORL)........................................................................................................................................................192
Site (SITE) ...............................................................................................................................................................192
Zone (ZONE)...........................................................................................................................................................192
Equipment (EQUI) ..................................................................................................................................................192
Sub-Equipment (SUBE)...........................................................................................................................................192
Primitives...............................................................................................................................................................192
Volume Model (VOLM) ..........................................................................................................................................193
Sub-Volume Model (SVOLM) .................................................................................................................................193
Structure (STRU) ....................................................................................................................................................193
Framework (FRMW) ..............................................................................................................................................193
Sub-Framework (SBFR) ..........................................................................................................................................193
Structural Components ..........................................................................................................................................193
Pipe (PIPE) .............................................................................................................................................................193
Branch (BRAN) .......................................................................................................................................................193
Piping Components ................................................................................................................................................193
- Hot Keys and In-canvas Commands ............................................................................. 194

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 8 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 1

1 Introduction
AVEVA™ E3D Design, enables the user to design a 3D computer model of a project. AVEVA™ E3D Design
allows the viewing of a full colour-shaded representation of the model as the design progresses, adding an
extremely impressive level of realism to traditional drawing office techniques.

In the model the user can store huge amounts of data referring to position, size, part numbers and geometric
relationships for the various parts of the project. The model becomes a single source of engineering data for
all the sections and disciplines involved in a design project.

All this information is stored in databases. There are many different output channels from the databases
through which information can be passed on. These range from reports on data stored in the databases, fully
annotated and dimensioned engineering drawings, to full colour-shaded 3D walk-through capabilities which
allow the user to visualise the complete design model.

1.1 Aim
The aim of this training guide is to provide the basic knowledge of the common features that provide the
‘foundations’ for the AVEVA™ E3D Design Model module.

1.2 Objectives
• Familiarise trainees with the basics of the User Interface.

• Explore the data structure of AVEVA™ E3D Design.

• Explain how to display and manipulate the 3D model.

• Explain basic techniques for creating and modifying 3D models.

• Familiarise the user with general functionality.

1.3 Prerequisites
• Familiarity with Microsoft Windows.

• Knowledge of engineering design.

1.4 Course Structure

Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations and set exercises. Each workstation will
have a training project, populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees to practice their
methods and complete the set exercises.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 9 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

1.5 Using this guide

Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document, here is a summary: -

• Menu pull-downs and button click actions are indicated by bold blue text

• Information that needs to be entered into the software will be in bold red text

• System prompts, example files or inputs will be bold italic black text

• Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font, colours and styles used as before.

• Products, Applications, Modules, Toolbars, Explorers and other significant software elements will
be in bold black text

• Other areas in this Training Guide will be presented with italic blue text and an accompanying icon
to classify the type of additional information.

Additional Information

Refer to other documentation

The following icons will be used to identify industry or discipline specific content

Plant - Content specific to the Plant industry Marine - Content specific to the Marine industry

Electrical – Content specific to Electrical Engineering – Content specific to Engineering

Instrumentation – Content specific to

Instrumentation

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 10 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 2

2 Getting Started
This chapter will show how to enter an AVEVA™ E3D Design session and run through some of the user
interface basics to familiarise the user with the Model module environment.

2.1 Enter/Login to AVEVA™ E3D Design

AVEVA™ E3D Design may be started by using the Windows taskbar or the desktop shortcut, providing both
options were selected when the product was installed.

From the Windows taskbar select Start > AVEVA > AVEVA
Everything3D 2.10.

Alternatively, an AVEVA™ E3D Design session can be started by double clicking the AVEVA
Everything3D 2.10 shortcut on the desktop.

2.1.1 Entering AVEVA™ E3D Design – (Worked Example)

Double click the AVEVA Everything3D 2.10 shortcut on the desktop to start an
AVEVA™ E3D Design session

The AVEVA™ E3D Design initialisation image will be displayed:

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 11 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

When initialisation is complete, the AVEVA™ E3D Design Login form will be displayed:

The upper section of the form contains the project selection

tiles. This allows the selection a project to work on. These
tiles scroll horizontally if there are more projects available
than fit on the form.

The middle section of the form contains a search option.

This allows the search for a project and to also display
masked projects by checking the Show Masked Project
checkbox.

When a project is selected the middle section of the form is

updated to allow specific user input/selection to allow login
to the selected project.

The lower section of the form contains the module selection

tiles Clicking one of these starts the selected module with
the selected project and credentials.

AVEVA™ E3D Design is divided into modules to perform the various functions to produce a 3D Plant design
model. The modules and their functions are:-

• Model for 3D modelling.

• Draw for 2D drawing production.

• Isodraft for Isometric drawing production.

• Spool for pipe spooling.

For more information about AVEVA™ E3D Design modules, refer to Appendix A.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 12 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Click the TRA tile from the upper section of the form to select the Training
project

The upper section of the form will display information relating to Training project, and the search functionality
will be replaced by the project credentials as shown below:

To navigate back to the project selection tiles, click on the Right Arrow button located at
the right hand side of the project Information section of the form.

Three mandatory pieces of information must be supplied before starting the project with a module:

• User - the username

• Password the password for the selected user

• MDB - this stands for Multiple Database. This determines the databases that will be available
when the module is started.

Alternatively, it is possible to open the project as it was at a certain date by selecting a Stamp.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 13 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Select A.EQUIPMAN from the User options list.

Enter A in the Password textbox.

The password is hidden with each character being

represented by a dot.

If necessary, the password can be changed by clicking the

Key button next to the Password textbox.

The access rights will be applied on the databases loaded by the MDB depending on the User selected on the
login form.

Each database of the project is owned by a Team defined by the administrator. The selected User will have
the right to create / modify / delete elements in a loaded database only if they are a member of the Team
owning the database. Otherwise, the database will be opened as read only.

For example, in the Training project, the administrator has assigned the User of A.EQUIPMAN to the EQUIP
Team and therefore the User A.EQUIPMAN will have the right to create / modify / delete elements in all the
databases owned by the EQUIP Team.

Select A-EQUIPMENT from the MDB options list.

An AVEVA™ E3D Design project contains several databases of different types to store the data. In Model, the
design data is generally split into different databases of type DESI, to separate the different disciplines, or
different areas in the project. This allows more granularity in the project organisation, and the control of access
rights.

The MDBs are created by the administrator with a selection of databases that are required for different tasks
and scope of work.

For example, in the Training project, selecting the A-EQUIPMENT MDB will load a selection of all the design
and catalogue databases required for designing the Equipment in the project.

Click the Model tile to start a Model session for the specified project.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 14 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The AVEVA™ E3D Design initialisation animated image will be displayed for a few seconds while the module
is loaded along with the databases from the selected MDB.

The main discipline interface will then be displayed. Note that the project data will not be visible until invoked
as described in the chapters that follow.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 15 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.2 The Model Environment

The AVEVA™ E3D Design user interface is based on the Microsoft® Office Fluent™ Based User Interface.
Starting Model for the first time will use the default screen layout as shown below:

This default layout may be modified to suit individual preferences, e.g. additional forms may be displayed in
the layout, forms may be moved, ‘docked’ and pinned/unpinned as required. Some of these features are
described later in this chapter.

After exiting AVEVA™ E3D Design or changing to a different module, a subsequent return to the Model module
will restore the screen layout as it was left in the previous session.

Quick Access Toolbar: provides shortcuts to most common

commands for a quick access.

Tabs: regroup the application buttons by category. Displayed

tabs depend on the selected discipline.

Groups: each tab is divided into groups to organise the

buttons by task.

Prompt Area: provides instructions while performing an

action.

3D view: the workspace where the Model elements can be

viewed and worked on. The 3D View can contain one or
several 3DViews.

Sliding Forms: forms are docked and tabbed on both sides of

the 3D View and can be temporarily hidden to clear the 3D
View.

PowerWheel™: provides quick access to most common

commands directly in the 3D View via a right click.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 16 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

PowerCompass™: provides intuitive tools to orientate the

3D View and select different Coordinate Systems.

Status Bar: provides quick access to common modelling

options.

Messages Area: displays the last information, warning, or

error messages.

Notification Area: displays information about the status of

a global project.

View Tab Group: provides access to the different opened

3D Views from multiple tabs.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 17 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.3 AVEVA™ E3D Design Disciplines

Discipline interfaces are accessed from the Discipline

options list on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Selecting a discipline from the options list displays the

selected disciplines interface.

2.3.1 Selecting a Modelling Discipline – (Worked Example)

Select EQUIPMENT from the Discipline options list on

the Quick Access Toolbar.

Depending on the discipline, new tabs will be displayed in the Microsoft® Office Fluent™ Based User Interface
to provide the tools specific to that discipline. For example, selecting the EQUIPMENT discipline will display
the EQUIPMENT tab:

The EQUIPMENT tab will be displayed for most of the modelling disciplines.

The organisation of the discipline tabs offers user friendly access by presenting the same groups in the same
order for common tasks like Create, Modify and Delete:

Group Create Group Modify Group Delete

This training guide covers some general basic functionality. However, the majority of functionality is
described in the discipline specific training guides.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 18 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.4 AVEVA™ E3D Design Forms

Much of the AVEVA™ E3D Design user interface is driven by forms which are invoked from the buttons on the
discipline interface or from other forms. Forms are used to display information or to enter or modify data.

Forms come in a variety of sizes and contain different input and modification devices, e.g. textboxes,
checkboxes, options lists, buttons, link labels, etc.

The forms are translucent by default, allowing the model elements in the background to be seen. When a form
is clicked and being used, it becomes opaque. The translucency of the forms can be configured on the PROJECT
tab which is covered in a later chapter.

Most of the AVEVA™ E3D Design forms are dockable, i.e. can be arranged in a fixed position, in two areas
located on the left and the right hand side of the 3D View. These two areas allow the creation of Sliding Forms
Sets, which offer different functionality to display and arrange the opened forms.

A Sliding Forms Set

• Allows multiple forms to be opened in multiple

tabs.
Tabs
• May be split in two parts, the Top and Bottom
Segment, allowing two forms to be visible
Splitting Bar simultaneously.
Top Segment
• May be collapsed on one side to enlarge the
Bottom Segment
working area.

• May be hidden to clear the 3D View.

• May be docked on one side of the 3D View, or

made Floating, i.e. positioned freely.

For clarity, when docked on one side of the 3D View the

Sliding Forms Set will be referred as to the Left or Right
Panel

2.4.1 Docking the Forms

The Left and Right Panels can contain one or several forms which will appear as different tabs. Generally, when
dockable forms are initially displayed they will dock at their default position in one of the Panels, on either
side of the 3D View.

If not contained in a Panel, a Form is said to be Floating, and may be reattached by dragging the Title bar of
the form inside the Panel. Or, it can be detached from the Panel by dragging the tab to any location in the 3D
View.

2.4.2 Hiding the Forms

To enlarge the working space, the forms may be hidden in different ways:

• Modifying the size of the Panels.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 19 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• Collapsing one Panel on one side of the 3D View by clicking on the active tab.

• Hiding all the forms on the 3D View by clicking the Clear Canvas button located at the top right hand
corner of the application window.

2.4.3 Docking and Hiding Forms – (Worked Example)

On the tab TOOLS, in the Display group, clicking the Messages button displays the
Messages form in a floating state.

Buttons opening forms will remain highlighted in blue while the form is
displayed.

Hold the left mouse button on the Title bar of the

Messages form and drag the form inside the Left Panel.

A small grey square will appear at the bottom of the Panel

to indicate that the form will be docked above the splitting
bar. Release the button to dock the form.

When a form is docked in the Panel amongst others, a new tab will be added in the
tab bar of the Sliding Form Set. The forms may then be made visible by clicking on
the relevant tab which will be highlighted in blue to indicate that it is active.

Drag the mouse when on the border of the panel to increase or decrease its size.

Double clicking on the border will restore the Panel to the default size.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 20 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Clicking the active tab will collapse the Panel

Clicking the active tab again will restore the Panel to the
previous state.

Click the Clear Canvas button to hide all docked and floating
forms located on the 3D View.

Click again to restore the previous state.

2.4.4 Splitting the Sliding Forms Set

The Panels consists of two areas, the top and the bottom segment, to allow the visibility of two forms
simultaneously.

The size of the bottom segment, which is collapsed by default, may be adjusted by dragging the splitting bar
upward or downward.

When a Panel is split, the two segments can be populated with multiple forms. The two segments will then
contain their own group of tabs, and two forms can now be visible, one in each segment.

2.4.5 Arranging Forms in Sliding Forms Sets

With multiple forms opened and docked, it is possible to change the order of the forms in one segment, or to
move a form from one segment to another, or to move a form from one Panel to another.

In the same manner, the tab may be dragged to the other side of the 3D View and dropped in the top or
bottom segment of the other Panel.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 21 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.4.6 Using Sliding Form Sets – (Worked Example)

In the Left Panel, hover the cursor over the splitting bar
located at the bottom of the Panel. The appearance of the
cursor will change to a dimensioning icon.

Hold the left mouse button down, move the cursor up to

increase the size of the bottom segment.

Release the mouse when the sliding bar is near the middle.
The bottom segment is now ready to be populated with
forms.

Click on the arrow at the middle of the splitting bar to

collapse the bottom segment.

Click on the arrow again to restore the splitting bar to its

previous position.

In the left Panel, hold the left mouse button down on the
Messages tab.

Drag the Messages tab towards the upper part of the Model
Explorer tab. Red arrows are displayed indicating the new
position for the tab being dragged.

Release the button when the red arrows are on the top of
the Model Explorer tab.

The Messages tab is now repositioned above the Model

Explorer tab.

In the left Panel, hold the left mouse button down on the
Messages tab.

Drag the tab towards the bottom segment of the Panel. The
grey square is displayed indicating that the tab will be
positioned below the splitting bar.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 22 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Release the button to position the tab in the bottom

segment.

The Messages form and Model Explorer can be viewed

simultaneously.

2.4.7 Undocking the Sliding Forms Sets

The two Panels are by default docked on the left and right hand side of the 3D View. It is however possible to
undock them in order to position them freely on the main screen, or a secondary screen.

To undock a Panel, right click on one of its tabs and select Float.

The Sliding Form Set can then be moved like any other form by holding the left
button on the title bar.

To dock the Panel back to its original position, right click on one of its tabs and
uncheck the Float option.

2.5 PowerWheel Overview

Several Model operations may be initiated and controlled using the PowerWheel.
This is invoked by right-clicking within the 3D View.

A function is selected from the PowerWheel by a left-click on the required tile. This may result in a change of
appearance for the PowerWheel for refined selection. For instance, selecting the View Direction tile from the
PowerWheel will update the PowerWheel to allow the direction of the 3D View to be specified.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 23 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Alternatively, by clicking and holding the right mouse button, the required
tile can be indicated by moving the cursor in the appropriate direction and
selection confirmed on release of the mouse button. The direction of
selection is aided by an indicating line.

On selection of the required option on the PowerWheel, the action may

be repeated for the selection when the Power Wheel changes
appearance. This operation is often referred to as a gesture.

Holding down the Ctrl key and then right clicking will result in an
alternative layout appearance of the PowerWheel which includes general
functions as shown.

The PowerWheel may also be used in context during a modelling action.

On performing an action which requires a position to be specified in the

3D View, the Shift key can be used in conjunction with the right click to
display the PowerWheel with an alternate layout that includes Object
Snaps.

This allows the filtering of a specific Object Snap temporarily for the
current action.

Object Snaps will be described in a later chapter.

The PowerWheel functions will be described in more detail in specific training courses.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 24 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.6 PowerCompass Overview

The PowerCompass is an intuitive tool allowing control of the view direction and selection of the different
Coordinate Systems.

The view direction features of the PowerCompass will be described section 4.2.

The Coordinate Systems will be described in section 6.3.1.

It is possible to move the position of the PowerCompass by dragging the blue grip located below the compass.

2.7 In-canvas Commands Overview

In addition to forms and buttons for input, it is possible to invoke specific commands by entering them directly
in the 3D View. These commands are referred to as in-canvas commands.

A list of the in-canvas commands is presented in Appendix C

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 25 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.8 In-canvas Editor Overview

Many commands in AVEVA™ E3D Design will require user input and most of the time it may be done by
entering value or selecting options directly in the 3D View.

For example, when the MOVE command is used, it is necessary to specify positions, and a prompt called the
In-canvas Editor will be displayed beside the cursor in the 3D View:

When the command is invoked, the default option for this command will be the current option. However, it is
possible to select alternative options by pressing the Down arrow cursor key, then clicking on the appropriate
tile or pressing the corresponding key indicated on the tile by the underscore. For example, on the above in-
command options the D or C key could be pressed to select Displacement or Copy within the Move command.

The focus of the textboxes is changed by pressing the Tab key. Entering a co-ordinate or angular value in the
textbox and pressing the Tab key will lock the value in the textbox and move the focus to the adjacent textbox.

When coordinates are to be entered, it may be possible to switch the Absolute mode to Relative mode by
pressing the Shift and @ keys together. Also, it is possible to switch between Cartesian, cylindrical or polar
coordinates by pressing the Backtick (`) key.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 26 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.9 Accessing Help Pages

The AVEVA™ E3D Design Help Viewer can be accessed in three different ways:

• On the PROJECT tab, from the Help option, click the AVEVA
E3D Design Help button.

• Clicking the Help button at the top right corner of the module window

• Pressing the F1 key will open the Help Viewer displaying the page related to
the Current Element.

The concept of the Current Element is covered in section 3.2 of this training
guide.

The Help Viewer enables the referencing of the AVEVA™ E3D Design documentation using the following
methods:

• Contents tab – shows the logically grouped items

• Index tab – shows an alphabetical index

• Search tab – allows the searching for key words.

The page of the displayed documentation can be printed by clicking the Print button in the top right corner of
the Help Viewer form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 27 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.10 Closing AVEVA™ E3D Design

AVEVA™ E3D Design may be closed using the following methods:

• Click the Close button at the top right hand corner of the module window.

• On the PROJECT tab, click the Exit button.

• Select Close from the AVEVA™ E3D Design menu at the top left hand
corner of the module window.

• Press the Alt and F4 keys simultaneously.

When closing AVEVA™ E3D Design, if changes have been made but not saved, a Question form is displayed
as shown:

Refer to section 5.7 for more information about saving the changes in the database.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 28 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

2.11 Set up the Training Course – (Worked Example)

Click the TOOLS > Training > Setup button to display the Training Setup form.

Select the Foundations tab and check the Add TRA Site checkbox.

Click the Apply button followed by the Close button.

This will create a new element, SITE TRA.SITE in the Model Explorer.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 29 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 1 Using Sliding Forms

Perform the following tasks:

• Expand the bottom segment of the right Panel. Drag the splitting bar to the middle of the Panel.

• On the TOOLS tab, in the Display group, click the Commands button to open the Command Window.

• Dock the Command Window in the bottom segment of the right Panel.

• Drag the Messages form to the bottom segment of the right Panel.

• Collapse the bottom segment of the right Panel.

• Collapse the right Panel.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 30 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 3

3 Exploring the Database

This chapter will describe how the model data can be browsed and how the different elements can be
identified.

3.1 The Model Explorer

The Model Explorer is a form containing a representation of the content of the loaded design databases. This
is in the form of an explorer tree with expandable branches called nodes. In the default Model environment,
the Model Explorer is docked in the Panel at the left hand side of the 3D View.

To open the Model Explorer if it has been closed, on the TOOLS tab, in
the Explorers group, click the Model button.

The AVEVA™ E3D Design database, called Dabacon, is a hierarchical database where elements contain other
elements.

To view or hide the content of one element, expand or collapse the node by clicking on the arrow next to the
element.

Click the arrow next to the element SITE TRA.SITE to view

its content. This will expand the node of the Model
Explorer.

When an element contains other elements, it is referred as the Owner of the contained elements, and the
contained elements are referred to as its Members. The topmost element which contains all the other
elements is called the World and will sometimes be referred to on forms as /*.

For more information about the Model Explorer settings, refer to section Error! Reference source not f
ound..1.2.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 31 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

3.2 The Current Element

A fundamental concept of the Dabacon database is that any action of creation, deletion or modification of an
element in the database is performed on one element which has been previously selected. This selected
element is referred as to the Current Element or CE. The action of selecting the Current Element is called
navigating to.

In the Model Explorer, clicking on an element will navigate to this element,

making it the Current Element. This will be notified by a blue highlight of the
element in the tree.

It is also possible to navigate to an element knowing its name by using the

Navigation List located at the top of the Model Explorer.

This is typically used when the position of the desired element in the hierarchy is
not known.

Element names in AVEVA™ E3D Design are case sensitive and this applies while searching for elements in
the Navigation List.

3.3 Element identification

In the Model Explorer, the elements are

identified by an icon, an element type, and its
name as shown.

3.3.1 Element Types

Each element in the database is assigned an element Type which defines its characteristics and behaviour. In
the Model Explorer, the type of element is indicated by the first four letters next to the element’s icon.

Depending on its Type, an element may only exist in a valid position in the hierarchy. For example, an element
of type SITE can only be owned by an element of type WORL, an element of type ZONE can only be owned by
an element of type SITE etc...

For more information about database types, refer to Appendix B.

3.3.2 Element Names

Next to the element Type is the element Name. The element name is optional and can be specified when the
element is created or can be changed afterwards.

The element names must comply with a set of rules that will be described in chapter 5.

When an element is not named, it will appear in the hierarchy with a number next to its type. This number
indicates the order of the element in the hierarchy, from top to bottom, for a given element type.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 32 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

For example, the first element of type CYLI in TANK1 is not named and therefore
will be identified by CYLI 1 in the hierarchy.

In the forms, unnamed element will be referenced by a system name containing the Type, the order in the
hierarchy, and the name of the owner. For example, the second PYRA in TANK1 will have a constructed name
PYRAMID 2 OF EQUIPMENT /TANK1

The actual name of an element in the database is always prefixed with a forward slash. Most of the forms
will automatically add it if omitted.

Internally AVEVA™ E3D Design does not use names to identify elements, instead a unique database reference
number is used so that an element may be re-named at any time.

These reference numbers are never re-used if an element is deleted and therefore, remain unique throughout
the life of the project. On some forms the reference number is used in place of the system name and will look
like =23584/2152.

3.4 Design Common elements

In the design database, most of the design elements will be stored in a common tree structure composed of
SITE elements and ZONE elements. These two element types are common to all disciplines and often referred
as to administrative elements as their main purpose is to organize the project.

A typical organisation of a project is reproduced in the TRA (Training) and APS projects, where the purpose of
SITE elements is to group the data by Area and Discipline. The ZONE elements can be used as sub-groups
owned by a SITE. All the other element types stored below a ZONE are discipline dependent. For example, the
type EQUI will be used for the EQUIPMENT discipline, the type PIPE for the PIPING discipline etc.

3.5 Using the Model Explorer – (Worked Example)

Navigate to element ZONE EQUIP.ZONE in the Model Explorer

to make it the CE.

Enter TA in the Navigation List textbox on the Model Explorer.

When typing, a list will appear showing all the element with
names starting with the entered text.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 33 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Select TANK1 in the list.

This will navigate to TANK1 in the Model Explorer.

Observe the different element types and their position in the hierarchy, SITE, ZONE, EQUI etc. Note that the
standard element types are associated with a specific icon for a quick identification.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 34 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 2 Navigating the Hierarchy

Perform the following tasks:

• In the Model Explorer, collapse the node for the Model WORL * element.

• Expand the Model WORL * element.

• Expand SITE TRA.SITE element to display the ZONE elements owned by the SITE.

• Expand the different element types in the ZONE and note what type of elements they own.

• Enter p in the Navigation List textbox at the top of Model Explorer and note that only element names
with a lower case “p” are displayed.

• Select one of the names and note that Model Explorer navigates to one of the elements in ZONE PIPE
ZONE belonging to SITE TRA.SITE.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 35 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 36 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 4

4 Viewing the 3D Model

After starting the Model module, all the loaded database elements will be visible in the Model Explorer and
will be accessible by expanding the nodes of the hierarchy, as described in the previous chapter.

The 3D View allows the manipulation of the geometric database elements graphically, or in other terms, to
create and visualise in 3D, the model elements.

By default, the 3D View is empty when starting the Model module. It will be necessary to decide which
element, or group of elements are to be displayed in a 3D View to suit the scope of work.

This chapter describes how to select the model elements to be displayed; and how to use the basic controls
to manipulate the 3D View.

4.1 Selecting the Elements to Display in the 3D View

To display a model element, it must be selected from the Model Explorer and then added to the 3D View. The
content of the 3D View is a collection of database elements called a Drawlist.

When adding an element to a 3D View, all its members will also be added. For example, if a SITE is added, all
the other elements contained in this SITE, such as ZONE, EQUI or PIPE etc., are also added to the 3D View. The
Drawlist associated with the 3D View will be automatically populated. However, only the significant elements,
that is, elements containing geometric definitions, will populate the Drawlist.

Elements may be added or removed from the 3D View at any time during a Model session.

4.1.1 Adding Elements to the 3D View

When an element is made the CE, it may be added to the 3D View by either:

• Dragging and dropping the element from the Model Explorer into the 3D View.

• On the VIEW tab, in the Content group, clicking the Add CE button.

• Right clicking the element in the Model Explorer and selecting 3D View > Add.

• Right clicking the element in the Model Explorer and selecting 3D View > Add Connected – this option
adds the CE and any elements connected to it to the 3D View.

• Right clicking the element in the Model Explorer and selecting 3D View > Add Within Volume – this
option adds the CE and any elements that are partially or wholly within a volume box whose size is
derived from the extremities of the CE to the 3D View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 37 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.1.1 Dragging and Dropping – (Worked Example)

Navigate to ZONE CIVIL.ZONE in the Model

Explorer.

Drag and drop the element into the 3D

View.

Note that the limits of the 3D View are

changed to show the whole element.

If the CE is a component or primitive, e.g. a valve or a cylinder, the owning element, with all its members are
added to the 3D View. However, if the Ctrl key is pressed during the drag and drop operation, only the
component or primitive will be added to the 3D View.

Holding the Shift key while dragging an element to the 3D View will remove all other elements from the
3D View and just add the CE.

If the added elements are the first elements to be added to an empty 3D View, the limits of the 3D View will
be automatically adjusted to suit the elements being added. Subsequent additions to the 3D View will not
affect the limits of the 3D View. For instance, larger elements added later will be clipped in the 3D View. The
3D View limits will then have to be redefined.

For more information on 3D View limits refer to section 4.2.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 38 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.1.2 Adding from the Right Click Menu – (Worked Example)

Right click on TANK1, owned by ZONE

EQUIP.ZONE in the Model Explorer and
select 3D View > Add.

If the CE is a component or a primitive, selecting 3D View > Add Only will add the selected component or
primitive only, without adding its owner.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 39 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.1.3 Adding from the View Tab – (Worked Example)

Navigate to ZONE EQUIP.ZONE in the Model Explorer.

On the VIEW tab, in the Content group, click the Add CE button to add the CE to
the 3D View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 40 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.2 Adding other elements to the 3D View

Additional options are available from the right clicking menu on the CE to add elements that are close or
related to the CE.

4.1.2.1 Add Connected Elements – (Worked Example)

Right click on EQUI PUMP1 in the Model Explorer

and select 3D View > Add Connected.

This will add the suction and discharge pipes that are connected to the Pump to the 3D View.

How elements are connected varies depending on the discipline and is outside the scope of this training
guide. Refer to the specific discipline training guides for element connectivity.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 41 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.2.2 Add Within Volume – (Worked Example)

Right click on TANK2 in the Model Explorer and

select 3D View > Add Within Volume.

This will add all the elements partially or wholly within the volume encompassing the element TANK2.

The Add Support, Add Supported Elements and Add Laser Within Volume options are covered in the
discipline specific training guides.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 42 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.3 Removing Elements from the 3D View

There are 3 methods that can be used to remove elements from the 3D View:

• Selecting the element in the 3D View. Right click to display the PowerWheel and click the Remove
Selection tile.

• Right clicking the element in the Model Explorer and selecting 3D View > Remove.

• Make the element the CE and on the VIEW tab, in the Content group, clicking the Remove CE button.

4.1.3.1 Using the PowerWheel – (Worked Example)

Select PUMP1 in the 3D View by clicking on it.

Right click to display the PowerWheel and gesture to the

Remove Selection tile.

This will remove all the elements included in the current

graphical selection, i.e. elements that are outlined in green in
the 3D View. Graphical selections will be described in in this
training guide.

If the selected element is a component, e.g. a valve, the owner of the element with all its members will be
removed.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 43 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.3.2 Using the Model Explorer – (Worked Example)

Elements can also be removed by selection from

the Model Explorer.

Right click on TANK2 in the Model Explorer and

select 3D View > Remove.

If the CE is a component or a primitive, selecting

the Remove option will remove the owner of the
component or primitive with all its members.

To remove only the CE without its owner in the

case of a component or primitive, select the
Remove Only option.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 44 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.3.3 Using the VIEW tab

The final method is to select an option from the Remove button options list.

Navigate to EQUI TANK1 in the Model Explorer.

On the VIEW tab, in the Content group, select Remove CE from the
Remove button options list. This will remove TANK1 from the 3D View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 45 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

On the VIEW tab, in the Content group, select Remove All from the
Remove button options list. This will remove all elements from the 3D
View.

The Remove Selection option will have the same effect as the equivalent PowerWheel option.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 46 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.1.4 The Drawlist Form

The Drawlist form allows the visualization of the list of elements

contained in the 3D View. From this form, all the Add and Remove
options seen previously are available, along with additional options
to modify the appearance of the model elements in the 3D View,
such as colours and translucency.

For more information on using the Drawlist form, refer to section

9.3.

4.1.5 Colours of the Model Elements

Although it is possible to modify the colours of elements from the Drawlist form, this is temporary, affecting
only the display of the current user. These colours will be reset when the element is removed from the 3D
View.

Unless customized, standard Model elements do not have a colour information stored in the database. The
standard colours as they appear in the 3D View are defined by Rules, e.g. all elements of type EQUI are in
colour gold with 0% translucency. The Colour Rules may be customized by the Administrator.

On the VIEW tab, in the Settings group, clicking the Auto-Colour

button enables / disables the Colour Rules.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 47 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 3 Displaying Model Elements

Perform the following tasks:

• On the VIEW tab, in the Content group, click the Drawlist button to display the Drawlist form. Dock
the form in the bottom segment of the left Panel.

• In Model Explorer expand SITE TRA.SITE to show the ZONE elements and expand ZONE EQUIP.ZONE.
Note that the content of the Drawlist form is updated as elements are added to the 3D View.

• Navigate to EQUI TANK1 and drag and drop it into the 3D View.

• Navigate to EQUI PUMP1 and on the VIEW tab, in the Content group, click the Add CE button.

• Right click ZONE EQUIP.ZONE in the Model Explorer and select 3D View > Add to add the ZONE to the
3D View. Only EQUI TANK2 has been added to the 3D View because the other EQUI items owned by
ZONE EQUI.ZONE were already in the 3D View. Only the remaining EQUI element has been added.

• EQUI TANK2 cannot be seen in the 3D View because the limits of the 3D View are set to EQUI TANK1.
Right click in the 3D View to display the PowerWheel and gesture to the Extents tile. The limits are
now set to display all the EQUI elements in the 3D View.

• Right click on TANK1 in the Model Explorer and select 3D View > Add Connected. This will add pipe1-
b1 to the 3D View because the pipe is connected to the EQUI.

• Right click on TANK2 in the Model Explorer and select 3D View > Add Within Volume. This adds pipe2-
b1 and some of the Section (SCTN) elements that make up the EQUI TANK2 supports to the 3D View
as they are within the volume of the EQUI element.

• Navigate to ZONE PIPE.ZONE and click the Add CE to Drawlist link label on the Drawlist form to add
the remainder of the Pipe branches to the 3D View.

• Add ZONE CIVIL.ZONE to the 3D View using any method.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 48 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.2 Controlling the 3D View

Most of the controls to manipulate the 3D Views will be accessed directly from buttons and the PowerWheel,
with their equivalent on the VIEW tab.

4.2.1 View Limits

As seen previously, model elements may be present in the 3D View but may not be visible. The 3D View has
invisible limits which will clip and hide all elements outside these limits. By default, the view limits are
automatically adjusted to encompass the first elements added to the 3D View as seen in the previous chapter.

To view the elements that are outside the 3D View limits either:-

• Right click in the 3D View to display the

PowerWheel and gesture to the Extents tile.

Or,

• On the VIEW tab, in the Control group, select

the Extents option from the Limits button
options list.

These options will re-calculate the dimension of a virtual limits box that encompass the content of the 3D View
and then scale this box in order to make all the elements visible.

4.2.1.1 View Limits – (Worked Example)

Navigate to EQUI PUMP1 in the Model

Explorer. Hold down the Shift key and drag
and drop the element into the 3D View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 49 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Add SITE TRA.SITE to the 3D View. The focus of the 3D View will remain on EQUI PUMP1.

Right click to display the PowerWheel and gesture to the Extents tile.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 50 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The view limits will now be extended to include the entire content of the 3D View.

4.2.2 Zooming
The 3D View can be zoomed using the mouse wheel. Rolling the mouse wheel forward will zoom in and rolling
the mouse wheel backwards zooms out. The zoom is centered at the location of the cursor.

The following zoom options can be found on the VIEW tab, in the Control group, from the Zoom button
options list:

• Window - Allows the definition of a window to zoom

into in the 3D View

• Extents - Scales the content of the 3D View so that

it is visible. View limits are not modified with this
option.

• Object - Zooms to the current graphical selection.

• Zoom Center - Allows the specification of the centre

of the zoom followed by the magnification factor or
new height.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 51 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.2.3 Rotating the 3D View

The rotation of the 3D View is achieved by holding the middle mouse button down and moving the mouse in
any direction. By default, the rotation mode is set about the model, i.e. the observer will rotate in any direction
around a fixed position.

The centre of rotation is determined when the button is pressed. Its position is set where the crosshair touches
an element in the 3D View. The centre of rotation will be indicated by a pink pin while rotating.

4.2.3.1 Zooming and Rotating the 3D View – (Worked Example)

Ensure SITE TRA.SITE is displayed in the 3D View.

Explore the model by rotating and zooming using

the different methods described previously.

Observe the changes in the PowerCompass

and the appearance of the crosshair of the
cursor.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 52 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.2.4 View Direction – A Worked Example

The direction of the 3D View is set freely when rotating the model as seen previously.

It is also possible to set the view direction by using preset directions such as an isometric direction, an
orthogonal direction, or a plan direction.

This may be done by the following:

• On the VIEW tab, in the Control group, clicking a view direction button from the Look button gallery.

• From the PowerWheel.

• Using the PowerCompass.

4.2.4.1 Using the VIEW Tab - (Worked Example)

On the VIEW tab, in the Control group, click the Look

North East Iso button from the Look button gallery.

The view direction is changed as shown.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 53 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.2.4.2 Using the PowerWheel - (Worked Example)

Right click to display the PowerWheel, gesture to the View Direction tile and gesture to the Look West tile.

This will set the view direction to look West.

4.2.4.3 Using the PowerCompass - (Worked Example)

On the PowerCompass, click the Down button.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 54 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

On the PowerCompass click the North East Iso button.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 55 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.2.5 Panning
Panning enables the contents of the 3D View to be moved across the canvas in any direction.

With the cursor over the 3D View, holding the Ctrl key and middle mouse button down
simultaneously whist moving the cursor will pan the view. The appearance of the cursor will
changes as shown.

The 3D View may also be panned by setting the centre of interest. Positioning the cursor anywhere in the 3D
View and clicking the middle mouse button will move the selected point to the centre of the 3D View.
Therefore, the 3D View may be panned in any direction by selectively picking a point in the 3D View with the
middle mouse button.

The 3D View will pan by the distance between the picked point and the centre of the 3D View. Keeping the
cursor in the same position and repeatedly clicking the middle mouse button will keep panning the 3D View
by the same distance.

4.2.6 Centre View

On the VIEW tab, in the Control group, clicking the

Centre View button will pan the 3D View so that it is
centered on the CE.

4.2.7 Stepping back to previous views

AVEVA™ E3D Design keeps a record of all the successive view directions and positions used during the current
session. At any time, it is possible to step back to a previous view state, or step forward to a later view state.

- clicking the Previous arrow button on the

PowerCompass will step back to the previous 3D
View states.

- clicking the Next arrow button on the

PowerCompass will step forward to the next 3D
View states.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 56 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 4 Controlling the 3D View

Perform the following tasks:

• Clear the 3D View.

• Add EQUI PUMP1 to the 3D View.

• Add the SITE TRA.SITE to the 3D View and use the Extents tile on the PowerWheel to view the entire
3D View contents.

• Rotate freely the 3D View using the middle mouse button.

• Use the Ctrl key and the middle button to pan the 3D View.

• Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out freely. Repeat with different cursor positions.

• Click on the middle button to centre the 3D View at the cursor’s position.

• On the PowerCompass, click the North East Iso button. Limit the 3D View to the Extents.

• Using the PowerWheel, gesture to the View Direction tile and gesture to one of the isometric view
directions.

• On the PowerCompass, click the North button.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 57 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.3 Clipping the 3D View

Clipping the 3D View allows the isolation of a region of the model by hiding all parts of the model falling
outside the user defined clipping box.

The functions for clipping the 3D View are located on the VIEW tab,
in the Clip group.

The Create button options list contains the following options for the creation of
the clipping box:

• Current Selection

• Current Element

Clip – this is a toggle which enables or disables the clipping by hiding or showing the parts of the model
outside the clipping box.

The Add Within options list contains the following options:

• Partially – populates the 3D View with elements that are wholly or

partially within the clipping box.

• Wholly – populates the 3D View with elements that are wholly within
the clipping box.

• Advanced – selecting this option displays the Add Within form.

The Add Within form consists of three sections:

• Model Elements – this section allows the selection of

the commonly used specific element types to be
handled.

• Other Elements – this section allows the selection of

other element types to be handled.

• Content – this section controls whether the elements

that are Wholly or Wholly and Partially within are
included using the radio buttons shown. It also
contains the Add and Remove buttons.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 58 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• Modify – this is a toggle which enables or disables the preview of the clipping box, shown as a yellow
translucent box.

• Cap – this is a toggle which to enables or disables the capping, i.e. closing the sides of the elements
that are cut by the clipping box.

When using laser models, clipping does not apply on laser data.

4.3.1 Creating a clipping box – (Worked Example)

Select PUMP1 in the 3D View.

Select the VIEW > Clip > Create > Current Element option.

This will create a clipping box around the pump and hide all other
elements from the 3D View.

The Clip toggle and the Modify toggle will be automatically enabled.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 59 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Multiple elements can also be selected graphically in the 3D View to define the clipping box. In the same
way, the Current Selection option from the Create button options is used to create the clipping box.
Graphical selections will be described later in this training guide.

Once the clipping box has been created, its position and dimensions can be adjusted by double clicking on the
box and adjusting the grips. To do this the Modify toggle must be enabled which is the default setting after
creation of the clipping box.

Click the VIEW > Clip > Clip button to disable the clipping.

The 3D View content outside of the clipping box will

become visible.

Double click on the yellow box to activate the

modification grips.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 60 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Select the arrow grip at the top of the clipping

box to display the Specify absolute value
prompt. Enter 1000 in the D textbox and
press the Return key.

The clipping box will be extended upwards.

Click the arrow grip on the South side of the

clipping box.

Hold down the Shift key, right click to display the PowerWheel and gesture
to the P-Point tile.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 61 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Hover the cursor over the flange connecting to the pump

and select Ppoint P1.

The South side of the clipping box will be positioned at the

centreline of the pump.

Press the Esc key to finish the modification and remove

the grips from the 3D View.

Click the VIEW > Clip > Clip button to enable the clipping.

The elements in the 3D View outside of the clipping box will not be visible.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 62 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Click the VIEW > Clip > Modify button to disable the modification
and remove the clipping box from the 3D View.

The 3D View is shown with the capping enable. Where elements are
intersected by the clipping box, a coloured cap is shown on
elements that extend beyond the displayed region.

Click the VIEW > Clip > Cap button to disable the capping.

The capping has been removed.

The capping colour may be changed from the View Settings form.
See section 9.2.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 63 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Additional Information

Refer to other documentation

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 64 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 5 Clipping the View

Perform the following tasks:

• Navigate to EQUI TANK2 in the Model Explorer.

• Use the Create button on the VIEW tab to create a clipping box around the Current Element.

• Disable the Clip toggle.

• Double click on the clipping box and pull the grip for the bottom face of the clipping box to include the
slab in the clipping.

• Disable the Modify toggle.

• Enable the Clip toggle.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 65 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.4 Hiding elements

Elements in the 3D View may be hidden temporarily without being removed.

On the VIEW tab, in the Content group, the hide options can be selected from
the Hide button options list. The options are as follows:

• Hide Selected – hides the graphical selection.

• Show Last Hidden – shows the elements that were last hidden.

• Show All Hidden – shows all the elements that have been hidden.

• Hidden List – displays the Hidden Objects list.

The Hidden Objects form lists all the elements that are
currently hidden in the 3D View.

It allows elements to be shown in the 3D View either by

right clicking on an element in the list and selecting Show,
or by selecting elements in the list and clicking the Show
Objects button.

These options apply to the elements in the current view.

If a primitive or a component is included in the graphical

selection, the Hide Selected option will hide the owner of
the primitive or component, e.g. the whole EQUI or the
whole BRAN.

4.4.1.1 Hiding Elements – (Worked Example)

Following on from the previous exercise, it will be necessary to turn off the clipping.

Select EQUI PUMP1 in the 3D View. The pump will be

highlighted with a green outline.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 66 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Select the VIEW > Content > Hide > Hide Selected option.

EQUI PUMP1 will be removed from the 3D View.

Select the VIEW > Content > Hide > Show Last Hidden option to return the
pump to the 3D View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 67 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

4.5 Element Tooltips

The tooltips provide a quick access to essential information by displaying a table containing the data related
to an element in the 3D View or the Model Explorer.

To view the tooltips for an element in the 3D

View, hold the Shift key while the cursor is
over the element.

The same method is used to display the

tooltips from the Model Explorer.

The tooltips are configurable and the content varies depending on the element type.

Configuring tooltips is outside the scope of this training.

4.6 Settings
For more options about the display of the current view, such as background colour and lighting, refer to
section 9.2.

For more options about the representation of elements in the 3D View, such as colours and level of detail,
refer to section 9.4.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 68 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 69 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 5

5 Working with the Database

Before starting to work with the 3D model, it is important to understand how the data is managed in the
background. In this chapter, the basic database concepts will be covered through further operations in the
Model Explorer such as creating, modifying and deleting elements.

5.1 Access Rights

After starting an AVEVA™ E3D Design Model session, it is necessary to be aware of their access rights in the
different databases. There are two different types of access: Read Only and Read/Write. By default, all the
database loaded via the selected MDB are Read Only, i.e. information in the database can be read, but cannot
be created, modified or deleted. To be able to read and write in a database, the user must be a member of
the group of users owning the database, called a Team.

When the user attempts to create, modify or delete an element which is in a Read Only database an Error
form will be displayed.

In the Model Explorer, navigate to SITE SITE-PIPING-AREA01.

On the GENERAL tab, in the Create group, clicking the Zone button to create a
ZONE below the selected SITE will result in an Error form being displayed.

The element cannot be created because the database is Read Only.

Also, when multiple users are working on the same project at the same time, some elements might be locked
by some users to prevent any modifications or deletion from other users. This is knowing as claiming an
element and will be described in a later chapter.

An additional layer of access rights based on rules called DACs, can also prevent specific actions being
performed depending on the context. This is configured by an administrator.

5.2 Creating Elements

Depending on the discipline and the form used, the database elements can be created in different ways. When
they are not created automatically by the application, some basic rules need to be known before creating new
elements manually.

In most discipline tabs, such as GENERAL, PIPING or EQUIPMENT, elements can be created by using the
buttons located in the Create group.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 70 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The basic steps to create an element manually are:

• Selecting the owner of the element to be created.

• Clicking the create button.

• Naming / Renaming the new element.

5.2.1 Selecting a Valid Owner – (Worked Example)

Before creating an element, it must be decided where to store the new element in the hierarchy, or in other
words, which existing element will own the new one. This must be a valid owner. All element types in AVEVA™
E3D Design have a list of possible owners. If the selected element is not in the list, it will not be possible to
create the new element and an Error form will be displayed.

Navigate to Model WORL * in the Model Explorer.

Click the GENERAL > Create > Zone button.

An Error form is displayed because a WORL element is not a valid

owner for a ZONE element. Click the OK button.

To create an element in a specific position in the hierarchy either:

Navigate to the valid owner, in this case SITE TRA.SITE.

Click the GENERAL > Create > Zone button to display the Create Zone form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 71 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Select Name from the options list and click the OK

button.

This will create the new element as the first member of the CE.

Alternatively, navigate to a member of the valid owner, in this case ZONE

EQUIP.ZONE and repeat the process.

This will create the new element below the selected member.

The valid owners will be specified when creating elements in the discipline related training guides.

5.2.2 Naming the New Element

Any element in an AVEVA™ E3D Design database may be given an explicit name. Names enable elements to
be identified and to produce meaningful reports from the database. Which elements are named is a matter of
choice. However, in general significant elements, e.g. SITE, ZONE, EQUI, SUBE, PIPE, BRAN, STRU, FRMW, SBFR,
etc. would be named. It is not usual for primitives to be named. The WORLD is named * and cannot be
renamed.

Element names in AVEVA™ E3D Design must comply with the following rules:

• Element names begin with a forward slash, e.g. /MY_MODEL. Generally, most design elements give
the user the opportunity to name them from the element creation form as shown above. The forward
slash does not need to be entered on such forms as it is added automatically when the Enter key is
pressed.

• Element names must be unique across all databases in the MDB.

• Element names are case sensitive, e.g. P1001A, P1001a, p1001A and p1001a are all valid, unique
names.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 72 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• Element names must not contain spaces. Any character such as forward slash (/), Underscore (_),
hyphen (-), asterisk (*), etc. may be used as separators.

• Element names must be no longer than 50 characters.

5.3 Renaming Elements – (Worked Example)

Elements may be named or renamed after their creation using the

Properties from on the right of the 3D View by entering a new
value in the Name property, provided the user have write access
on the element.

Alternatively, an element may be renamed directly from the Model Explorer using the right click menu. This
method offers additional options, in particular for renaming the element’s members.

Navigate to CYLI 1 of EQUI TANK1 and from the right

click menu select Rename to display the Rename
Element form.

Enter TANK1/CYLI1 in the textbox and click the

Apply button.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 73 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

An options list is available below the textbox. By default, Only is selected which
means that only the Current Element will be renamed.

Often, the name of the members of an element contains the name of their owner to avoid duplication. For
examples, the Nozzles of an EQUI named TANK2 may be named TANK2/N1, TANK2/N2 etc. When renaming
an element which has been named in the way, it is also possible to rename all its members accordingly at the
same time.

Navigate to EQUI TANK2 in the Model Explorer and expand the node so that
the members of the EQUI are visible. Note the presence of the two Nozzles,
NOZZ TANK2/N1 and NOZZ TANK2-n2.

From the right click menu select Rename to display the

Rename Element form.

The name appearing in the textbox will be the text

that will be searched and replaced in the members
names.

Select Re-name all from the options list.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 74 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Enter VESSE1 in the textbox and click the

Apply button.

Note the new names of the EQUI and its member NOZZ elements.

Change the name of VESSE1 back to TANK2 using the Re-name all option.

5.4 Copying & Pasting an Element – (Worked Example)

The Model Explorer allows the creation of new elements by copying existing ones using the following steps:

• From the right click select Copy.

• Navigate to a valid owner.

• From the right click menu select Paste.

The Paste option will not be available if the CE is not a valid owner.

Expand ZONE ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01.

Navigate to D1201 and from the right click

menu select Copy.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 75 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Navigate to ZONE ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01, this will set

the position of the copy in the hierarchy as the first member
below the ZONE.

From the right click menu select Paste.

The newly created element and its members will be named like the original element, with the prefix of Copy-
of-. It is good practice to rename the element using the Re-name all option as described in the previous
section.

It is also important to note that the position and orientation of the model elements are always expressed with
respect to their owner’s local coordinate system. If the element is copied below the same owner as the
original, it will have the same position and orientation. If the element is copied to a different owner, having a
different local coordinate system, the position and / or orientation of the copy will be different to the original.

5.5 Delete an Element – (Worked Example)

The following delete options can be found on the HOME tab, in the Delete group, from the Delete button
options list:

• Delete Selection – Clicking this button, or pressing the Delete key,

will delete all the elements included in the current graphical
selection from the database.

• Current Element – Clicking this button will delete the CE from the
database. Or, alternatively, right click on the element in the Model
Explorer then select Delete.

• CE Members – displays the Delete Selected Members form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 76 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Delete Selected Members form allows all members of the CE to

be deleted by clicking the Delete All Members button. Alternatively,
a selection can be made from list which are then deleted by clicking
the OK button.

Elements can also be deleted from the Model

Explorer. From the right click menu select
Delete.

Depending on the settings being used, when an element is being

deleted a Confirm form is displayed. Clicking the Yes button will
delete the element.

Checking the Do not ask me again to confirm this action checkbox

will disable the appearance of this form.

The appearance of the Confirm form can also be configured on the PROJECT tab. Refer to section 9.1.1.3
for more information.

It is important to note that deleting a database element will also delete all the elements in the hierarchy owned
by the element.

For example, if a SITE is deleted, all the ZONEs owned by it will be deleted and any elements, such as EQUI,
STRU, PIPE, etc. owned by the ZONE will also be deleted.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 77 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Navigate to Copy-of-D1201 in the Model Explorer. From the

right click menu select Delete.

A Confirm form is displayed. Click the Yes button to confirm

the deletion.

5.6 Modifying the Hierarchy

As seen previously, the position of an element in the hierarchy is defined during its creation. In some
disciplines, the order of the elements is fundamental. For example, in the Piping discipline the elements are
arranged in order from top to bottom to respect the flow of the owning Branch.

If some elements are incorrectly positioned in the hierarchy, it is possible to change their order, or even change
their owner at any time.

The following options which allow the modification of the hierarchy can be found on the MANAGE tab, in the
Modify group:

• Include : Displays the Include form which allows the

changing the owner of an element.

• Reverse : Reverses the order of all the members of the

Current Element.

• Reorder : Displays the Reorder Hierarchy form which

allows the changing of the order of the members of
the Current Element.

5.6.1 Changing the Owner of an Element – (Worked Example)

In this example, the Include function will be used to move EQUI D1201 from ZONE ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01
to the ZONE EQUIP.ZONE.

Before proceeding with the change of owner, three important conditions are to be considered:

• The destination owner must be a valid owner for the elements to move.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 78 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• The original owner and the destination owner must be in the same database.

• As the element positions are defined relatively to their owner, if the original owner and the destination
owner have different positions, the absolute position of the element will change accordingly.

In this example, the ZONE ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 and the ZONE EQUIP.ZONE are in the same database
and have the same position.

Select the destination owner in the hierarchy by navigating to ZONE EQUIP.ZONE.

Click the MANAGE > Modify > Include button to display the
Include form.

Ensure the name of the destination owner appears at the top of the form.

If necessary, the destination owner may be changed by navigating to it in the Model Explorer and clicking
the CE button.

The left-hand side of the Include form contains the Members section. This allows the select of the element to
be included. The right-hand side of the form contains the Included Members section. This lists the owned
elements of the element selected in the Members section.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 79 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Select EQUI D1201 from the Members section.

Ensure TANK2 is selected in the Include Members section.

Ensure After Item is selected from the options list at

the bottom of the form.

This will result in the included element, D1201, being positioned after the element TANK2 in the Model
Explorer upon completion of the task.

Click the Include button to change the owner of EQUI

D1201.

EQUI D1201 is now owned by ZONE EQUIP.ZONE after TANK2 in the hierarchy.

In addition to the CE option used above, there are other options available for selection from the options list
at the bottom of the form.

• CE : The default shown above. This includes the

Current Element.

• CE Members : Includes all the members of the

Current Element.

• Identified : Display the Identify element to

include or Escape prompt. The elements to be
included can be selected in the 3D View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 80 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

5.6.2 Reordering the Hierarchy – (Worked Example)

The Reorder function allows the sequence of the elements that are under the same owner to be changed in
the hierarchy.

In this example, EQUI D1201 that was previously included after EQUI TANK2 will be repositioned in the
hierarchy to be before EQUI PUMP1.

Navigate to ZONE EQUIP.ZONE in the Model Explorer. This is the owner of the
elements to be re-ordered.

Click the MANAGE > Modify > Reorder button to display the
Reorder Hierarchy form.

The form contains two lists of the members of

the Current Element.

The top list is used to select the element to be

repositioned.

The bottom list is used to select the

neighbouring element.

The middle section of the form contains the

Reorder Before and Reorder After radio
buttons.

The combination of the radio buttons and the

selection from bottom list allows the resulting
position of the element selected in top list to
be determined.

Select /D1201 from the top list.

Select the Reorder Before radio button.

Select /PUMP1 from the bottom list.

Click Apply button to reposition EQUI D1201

in the hierarchy followed by the OK to close
the form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 81 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

EQUI D1201 is positioned before EQUI PUMP1 in the Model Explorer.

5.7 Save Work

When changes are made to the model during an AVEVA™ E3D Design session, the effects of the changes are
applied only to a copy of the design data until the databases are updated. There is no auto-save in AVEVA™
E3D Design. Therefore, the databases must be updated explicitly. This is known as Save Work in AVEVA™ E3D
Design. It is advisable to Save Work regularly to ensure that other users can access the most recent model
changes in a multi-user environment and also to protect the work that has been carried out by the current
user.

Updating the databases to incorporate the current design changes may be achieved by either:

• Clicking the Save Work button on the Quick

Access Toolbar.

• On the PROJECT tab, clicking the Save Work

button.

• Using the standard Windows functionality of pressing the Ctrl and S keys simultaneously.

• Pressing the Ctrl key, right clicking to display the

PowerWheel and gesturing to the Save Work tile.

In all cases a Savework form is displayed. Clicking the Yes button saves
the database changes.

The Savework form contains an Unclaim All checkbox. This will be covered in section 5.10.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 82 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

5.8 Get Work

Model changes made by the current user are immediately visible in the working copies of the databases.
However, the changes made by other users during the current AVEVA™ E3D Design session will not be shown
in the current working copies unless they are updated explicitly. This is known as Get Work in AVEVA™ E3D
Design.

Updating the working copies of the databases, to view the changes made by other users, may be achieved by
either:

• Clicking the Get Work button on the Quick Access

Toolbar.

• On the PROJECT tab, clicking the Get Work button.

• Pressing the Ctrl and G keys simultaneously.

• Pressing the Ctrl key, right clicking to display the

PowerWheel and gesturing to the Get Work tile.

A Get Work is automatically performed when doing a Save Work.

5.9 Undo/Redo

Undo and Redo buttons are available from the Quick Access
Toolbar.

The standard Windows functionality of pressing the Ctrl and Z and

Ctrl and Y keys simultaneously can be used for Undo and Redo
respectively.

It is important to understand that these buttons will only undo or redo database changes i.e. if a position or
orientation of an element is modified or an element is added or deleted, these are database changes, whereas,
changing the display colour of an element is not a database change.

There is no limit to the Undo or Redo within a Model session. However, any use of Save Work or Get Work
will clear the Undo / Redo history. For instance, it will not be possible to Undo beyond the last Save Work.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 83 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

5.10 The Claim List

Most of the databases used by AVEVA™ E3D Design are Multiwrite databases. This means that in a multi user
environment, one database can be read and modified by several users at the same time. To avoid conflicting
data when a user creates or modifies an element, it will be temporarily locked in Read Only access for the
other users. The locked element is said to be claimed by the user who is currently working on it.

The elements that are claimed by the current user will be shown in
the Model Explorer by a name in bold characters.

When an element is claimed, all its members are also claimed.

If the current user attempts to delete or modify an element claimed by

another user, an Error or Warning form with detailed information will
be displayed.

The elements are generally automatically claimed by the first user who creates or modifies them. However, at
any time, a user may claim an element to prevent other users from modifying it, provided it is not already
claimed by another user. Conversely, a user may unclaim an element they had claimed previously to make it
available to other users for modification. The elements claimed by a user are automatically unclaimed when
the module is closed.

Each claimed element is included in a list called the Claimlist. It is possible to view the Claimlist for the current
user, and for other users, using the Multiwrite Claim Lists form.

5.10.1 View the Claim List

On the MANAGE tab, in the Access group, clicking the Claimlists button displays
the Multiwrite Claim Lists form.

The Claim List options list has two options:

• Active Claimlist – displays a list of all the

significant elements claimed by the current
user.

• Others Claimlist – displays a list of all the

significant elements claimed by all other
users in the MDB, except those in the Active
Claimlist.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 84 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

5.10.2 Claiming Elements

Multiwrite databases have a claim mode that is set when the database is created:

• If the claim mode is Explicit the element must be claimed before it can be worked on.

• If the claim mode is Implicit the element is automatically claimed when modification starts. When
using this mode an element may also be claimed explicitly.

Elements can be explicitly claimed from the Claim form menu:

• Current Element - claims the CE and all the elements below it.

• Current Element Members - claims the members of the CE

and all the members below it, but not the CE.

• Current Element only - claims the CE only but none of the

members below it.

• Current Element Members only - claims each member of the

CE only but not the hierarchy below.

• Pick - enables elements to be claimed by graphically picking

them in the 3D View.

• Current Collection – claims the contents of the current

collection.

5.10.3 Unclaiming Elements

When performing a Save Work, elements can be unclaimed by

checking the Unclaim All checkbox on the Savework form and
clicking the Yes button.

Alternatively, the Unclaim form menu on the Mulitwrite Claim Lists

form can be used.

The Unclaim form menu has the same options as the Claim form
menu. The only difference is that the options unclaim the elements
instead of claim. The menu also has the following additional options:

• All - unclaims all the elements in the Active Claimlist.

• Selected - unclaims all the elements selected in the elements

list.

The Unclaim form menu is only active when there are members
in the Active Claimlist.

Exiting AVEVA™ E3D Design will unclaim all elements.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 85 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 6 Working with the Database

This exercise will create a new SITE containing Equipment elements from SITE TRA.SITE using the functionality
described in the previous chapter.

• Copy TRA.SITE in the World

• Delete each ZONE in SITE Copy-of-TRA.SITE except for ZONE Copy-of-EQUIP.ZONE.

• Rename SITE Copy-of-TRA.SITE to EQUIP.SITE.

• Rename the element Copy-of-TANK2 and all its members to TANK3.

• Unclaim all elements.

• Perform a Save Work.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 86 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 87 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 6

6 Modifying Model Elements

Every AVEVA™ E3D Design database element has a fixed set of properties, depending on its type, known as
its attributes. Some attributes are common throughout a large range of elements, some are applicable to
many elements and some are unique to one type of element. Also, it is possible for administrators to create
customized attributes known as User Defined Attributes (UDAs).

When write access is available on an element, the attributes of that element can be modified in several ways.
This chapter will describe how to modify the elements attributes by using the Properties form, the Attributes
form, or by manipulating the model elements in the 3D View.

To modify an element, the element must first be selected. This can be done by navigating to the element in
the Model Explorer as seen previously, or, by making a graphical selection in the 3D View.

6.1 Selecting Elements

Elements in the 3D View may be grouped together in as a graphical selection. This can be used in a variety of
ways in AVEVA™ E3D Design.

Elements included in a graphical selection are highlighted with a solid green line around the extremities of the
constituent parts of the item(s).

A graphical selection may be created by:

• Selecting elements individually.

• Using a selection fence.

The graphical selection will consist of significant elements, i.e. elements that contain a geometric definition.
For example, elements of type Equipment, Valve, or Flange, may be part of a graphical selection but
administrative elements like SITE or ZONE will not be included in a selection.

6.1.1 Selecting Elements Individually

Clicking on an element in the 3D View makes it the CE and creates a new graphical selection containing that
one item.

Holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and clicking on an unselected element will add it to the graphical selection.

Holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and clicking on a selected element will remove it from the graphical
selection.

The Shift and Ctrl keys will not have any effect if the multiple selection mode is enabled, see 6.2.2.

To cancel the current selection, press the Esc key.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 88 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Navigating to an element in the Model Explorer will cancel the current selection. The CE will be highlighted in
blue in the 3D View but will not be part of a selection.

It is possible to make a graphical selection from the Model Explorer by selecting 3D View > Select from the
right click menu. All the element’s members will be included in the selection if they are significant. This will
also add them to the 3D View if they are not already displayed.

6.1.1.1 Selecting Elements Individually – (Worked Example)

Add the content of SITE TRA.SITE except for EQUI D1201 to the 3D View.

Holding down the Shift key, select EQUI TANK1,

EQUI TANK2 and EQUI PUMP1 in the 3D View to
add them to the current graphical selection.

Press the Esc key to cancel the selection.

6.1.2 Using a Selection Fence

A graphical selection may be created using a selection fence by holding the left mouse button down in the 3D
View. Pressing the button will define the first corner of the fence, releasing the button will define the opposite
corner of the fence.

The fence has two selection methods:

• To select all the elements that are wholly within, i.e. entirely contained inside the rectangular
boundary of the fence, drag the mouse from left to right. The fence will be coloured blue.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 89 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• To select elements that are both wholly and partially within the rectangular boundary of the fence,
drag the mouse from right to left. The fence will be coloured in green.

Using the fence while holding the Ctrl key will add or remove elements to the current graphical selection.

To cancel the current selection, press the Esc key.

6.2 Modifying Attributes

For some element attributes, like the Name or the Position, appropriate values are set during the creation or
modification of the element when modelling, whilst others may be set from user interface, via the Attributes
or Properties form.

6.2.1 Using the Attributes form – (Worked Example)

Click the HOME > Display > Attributes button to display the Attributes form.
Alternatively, the Attributes form can be displayed from the right click menu
of the Model Explorer.

Navigate to EQUI TANK1 in the Model Explorer. From

the right click menu select Attributes to display the
Attributes form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 90 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Attributes form shows the attributes of the Current

Element.

By default, the form is floating but may be docked in a Panel.

Selecting any element in the Model Explorer or the 3D View will

automatically update the form to reflect the attributes of the
Current Element. This behaviour is controlled by the Track CE
checkbox at the top of the form. This can be unchecked to lock
the form to the selected element.

The values of the attributes may be modified if the associated

cell in the Value column is white. Grey cells in the Value column
indicate that the attribute is Read Only. This is generally the case
for attributes set by the system, or for elements in a Read Only
database.

Select the corresponding cell in the Value column for

Description. This current contains the text unset.

The attribute value has been highlighted for modification. This

is the case for any modifiable attribute.

Enter Storage Tank T1001 in the textbox and press the Return
key. The cell has been highlighted in cyan, this is to show the
modification was successful.

If the modification is unsuccessful then the cell would be

highlighted in red.

For more options and settings about the Attributes form, refer to section 0.

6.2.2 Using the Properties form – (Worked Example)

Where the Attributes form allows the modification of attributes for the Current Element only, the Properties
form operates on the graphical selection, allowing the modification of the attributes of multiple elements in
bulk.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 91 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

By default, the Properties form is docked in the right Panel.

Click the HOME > Display > Properties button to display the Properties
form.

Selecting an element in the 3D View will add it as the first element in the current graphical selection and
display its properties in the Properties form.

Similar to the Attributes form, the property values may be modified by clicking on a value cell and entering
data. The Read Only values will appear grey.

The Object Selection Mode controls the graphical selection for the Properties forms and has two settings:

• To select only one object at a time, set the Object Selection Mode
to Single. This is the default mode.

• To add new selections to the current list of selected elements, set

the Object Selection Mode to Multiple

If the Multiple selection mode is enabled, the Shift and Ctrl keys will have no effect in during the selection
process.

When the graphical selection includes multiple elements of

different types, the displayed properties will only be those
common to all the selected types. The Selection List will initially
display the number of elements of All types in brackets. It will
be then possible to refine the selection by selecting a specific
type from the Selection List.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 92 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

After selecting a type in the list, the form will be updated with all the properties for the selected type. It will
then be possible to modify the value of a property to update all the elements of the selected type
simultaneously.

Select all the elements in the 3D View using a fence or

by pressing the Ctrl and A keys.

In the Selection List of the Properties form, select

EQUI (3).

This is assuming EQUI D1201 is not included in the

3D View following a previous worked example.

Expand the General category, enter Process in the

Function textbox and press Return key.

This will update the Function attribute with the new

value for all the elements of type EQUI in the current
graphical selection.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 93 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 7 Modifying Element’s Attributes

Setting up the Exercises

On the TOOLS tab, in the Training group, click the Setup button to display the Training Setup
form.

Select the Foundations tab and check the Delete TRA Site and Add
MESS Site checkbox.

Click the Apply button followed by the Close button.

• Select the EQUIPMENT from the Discipline options list on the Quick Access Toolbar.

• On the PowerCompass click the North-East Iso button.

The SITE TRA.SITE has been deleted and the SITE TRA.SITE.MESS added to the databases and displayed in the
3D View. This SITE has been modified to introduce some design errors which may be grouped into three
categories:

• Size errors - some primitives have one of their size attributes incorrectly set. The task is to identify
which attribute is wrong and correct its value.

• Positional errors - Equipment items are incorrectly positioned or primitives are incorrectly positioned
within the Equipment. The task is to correctly position the Equipment and the primitives.

• Orientation errors - Equipment items or primitives within an Equipment are incorrectly orientated.
The task is to correctly orientate Equipment and primitives. Note: All equipment and primitives should
be orientated along an orthogonal axis.

TRA.MESS.SITE showing Design Errors

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 94 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

TANK1 - Size Error

• Use the Attributes form to set the Ylength attribute of BOX1 of EQUI TANK1 to 2850mm

TANK2 - Size Error

• Use the Properties form to set the Top Diameter property of CONE1 of EQUI TANK2 to 1500mm.

• Perform a Save work.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 95 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.3 Positioning Elements

The preferred way to modify the position of elements is to move them in the 3D View by either:

• Using the In-canvas editor mode to quickly reposition elements from their origin

• Using the Move command to specify a start and end position

Both these methods will require the specification of positions. It can be just one position for an absolute
displacement, two positions or a vector for a relative displacement. In all cases, it will be possible to specify
the positions by either:

• Entering coordinates directly in the 3D View.

• Using existing geometry of the model by snapping to graphical items.

• Using a combination of 3D View entries and snapping.

6.3.1 Setting the Local Coordinate System

It is important to understand how the coordinates are expressed in the 3D View and how the coordinate
system can be controlled to suit the requirements for positioning and rotating elements.

By default, the coordinates are expressed relatively to the World, i.e. the origin is set at (0, 0, 0), and the axis
are set to East/West (E/W), North/South (N/S) and Up/Down (U/D).

The World axes may be changed to XYZ axes. On the PROJECT tab, select Options > Configuration >
Coordinates options. In the Format section, select the XYZ radio button.

AVEVA™ E3D Design contains functionality to allow the modification of the coordinate system in which the
positions are expressed in the 3D View. This is done my manipulating the Local Coordinate System (LCS).

The LCS is defined by an origin and 3 axis, U, V and W. The LCS plane defined by the U and V axes is can be
considered to be the working plane and will be used to project the cursor’s position in 2D to facilitate the
positioning and the creation of primitives.

The status of the LCS is visible on the PowerCompass. Other visual indications in the 3D View assist the
modelling process:

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 96 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• PowerCompass: shows the orientation of the LCS axes. Three orthogonal planes are identified by
three discs of different colours:

• Blue for the EN or UV plane,

• Green for the NU or UW plane,

• Red for the EU or VW plane.

• Grid: displays grid lines on the LCS. The grid can be activated with the button in the status bar, or
by pressing the F7 key. It can be configured from the Grid Settings tab of the Object Snapping Settings
form.

• Ruler: offers a visual indication of the grid spacing and the position of the crosshair projected on the
grid.

• Crosshair: this is the appearance of the cursor when in the 3D View, showing a representation of the
3 axes direction. The appearance of the crosshair can be configured on the PROJECT tab.

• Axes: The LCS axes are represented in the 3D View by 3 coloured lines passing through the origin of
the LCS:

• Red line is the U axis,

• Green line is the V axis,

• Blue line is the W axis.

The following buttons are available on the VIEW tab, in the Local Coordinate System group, for the setting of
the LCS.

World: sets the LCS to World mode with its position at 0, 0, 0, and an orientation set to
the East, North and Up axes.

Current Element: set the LCS to Local mode with its position and orientation set to those
of the Current Element. The axes name on the PowerCompass will be set to U,V and W.

Object: displays the Select objects prompt. Sets the LCS to Local mode with its origin and
orientation set to those the selected object.

Move: displays the Specify origin of new LCS prompt. Allows the specification of a new
position for the LCS origin. Other LCS modification options will be available from the in-
canvas editor.

3 Points: displays the Specify new origin point prompt. Allows the specification of 3
positions to set the origin, the U axis and the V axis of the LCS.

Sets the orientation of the LCS to the World’s EN plane.

Sets the orientation of the LCS to the World’s NU plane.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 97 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Sets the orientation of the LCS to the World’s EU plane.

Also, some of these options are available directly in the 3D View from the PowerCompass:

Clicking the Use WCS button will switch to World mode, setting the LCS
origin and orientation according to the World and changing the axis
labels to E/W, N/S and U/D.

Clicking the Use LCS button without a suitable element as the CE displays
the Select objects prompt. Selecting an object in the 3D View will switch
to Local mode, setting the LCS origin and orientation according to the
object and changing the axis labels to U/-U, V/-V and W/-W.

Selecting one of the three discs on the PowerCompass representing the three orthogonal planes will redefine
the orientation of the LCS:

• In World mode, clicking on the discs will set the LCS to either the EN, NU or EU plane

• In Local mode, each disc is divided into four quadrants, selecting a quadrant will set the positive
U and V axes along the sides of the selected quadrant:

The Grid will follow the new orientation of

the LCS.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 98 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.3.1.1 Setting the LCS – (Worked Example)

Press the F7 key or click the Grid button on the status bar
to display the Grid in the 3D View.

Select the NU Plane on the PowerCompass.

The orientation of the Grid and the colour of

the disc on the PowerCompass has changed.

Add EQUI TANK3 to the 3D View.

Select the EQUI TANK3 in the 3D View and

click the Use LCS button on the
PowerCompass.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 99 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This will switch the coordinates to Local mode.

The PowerCompass, Grid and Axes have all changed

accordingly.

Click the quadrant between the -V and W axes.

The PowerCompass, Grid and Axes have all changed

accordingly.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 100 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Click the Use WCS button on the

PowerCompass to reset the LCS to the World.

The PowerCompass, Grid and Axes have all

changed to suit the World.

6.3.2 Specifying a Position

When moving elements, it is often necessary to specify a position. This section will introduce three different
methods to specify a position in the 3D View:

• Object snapping allows the selection of a graphical item in the 3D View.

• In-canvas editor allows the entering of coordinates and locking of axes.

• A combination of the object snapping and in-canvas editor methods.

For some functions, a specific method using the Positioning Control form may be required to specify
positions. This will be described in section 6.5.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 101 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.3.2.1 Object Snapping

To activate or deactivate the object snapping, press the F3

key or click the Object Snapping button on the Status Bar.

The object snapping filters can be configured using the Object Snapping Settings form.

Clicking the Object Snapping Settings button on the

Status Bar displays the Object Snapping Settings form.

On the Object Snap tab, the Elements tab offers

filter options to activate the snapping on database
elements like Item or P-Point etc...

The Graphics tab offers filter options to activate

the snapping on graphical items like Endpoint or
Midpoint etc…

Checking the different option checkboxes will

activate the relevant filters when the Object
Snapping is enabled.

Checking the Object Snaps checkbox will activate the object snapping.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 102 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Each snapping filter is associated with a specific snap icon as represented on the
Object Snapping Settings form. When the system prompts the user to specify a
point, hovering the mouse close to an item included in the selected snap filters
will display the associated snap icon on the item.

Left clicking when the icon is displayed will validate the position at the exact
location of the Snapping item.

6.3.2.2 Object Snapping – (Worked Example)

Click the Object Snapping Settings button on the Status Bar to display the
Object Snapping Settings form.

Select the Graphics tab and check the Endpoint checkbox.

Click the Apply button followed by the OK button.

Add SITE TRA.SITE.MESS to the 3D View.

This command is used to retrieve the absolute coordinates of the specified

point.

Hover the cursor over the top South East

endpoint of the :SLAB.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 103 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The position of the selected endpoint is displayed on the in-

canvas editor. Press the Return key.

Also, it is possible to invoke a temporary object snapping filter at any time when a specified position is
required. This can be done even when the object snapping is disabled. This is done by holding the Shift key
and right clicking in the 3D View.

Enter ID in the 3D View and press the Return key to display the Specify Point
prompt.

Hold the Shift key and right click in the 3D View.

The PowerWheel will display tiles for the main element object snaps such as
Item, P-Line End Point, P-Point, etc.

On the PowerWheel, gesture to the More tile.

The PowerWheel will display tiles for the main graphics filters such as
Endpoint, Nearest, Midpoint, etc.

On the PowerWheel, gesture to the More tile.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 104 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The PowerWheel will display additional objects snap filters. Pressing the Esc
key will display the previous PowerWheel.

Press the Esc key twice.

On the PowerWheel, gesture to the P-Point tile.

Hover the cursor over the top of the CYLI

belonging to EQUI TANK1.

The position of the selected Ppoint is displayed on the in-

canvas editor. Press the Return key.

6.3.2.3 In-canvas Editor

Coordinate value can be entered directly in the text boxes of the in-canvas editor when prompted:

When a position needs to be specified, the displacement induced by the mouse will be constrained to the
LCS, i.e. the W coordinate in Local mode, or the U coordinate in World mode will remain nil.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 105 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Depending on the command, the coordinates may be expressed in Relative or Absolute mode. In Relative
mode, the coordinates will be expressed with respect to the previously specified position. In Absolute mode,
the coordinates will be expressed with respect to the current coordinate system in use.

When permitted, it is possible to switch between Relative and Absolute mode by pressing the Shift and @
keys.

Relative Mode Absolute Mode

To validate an entry and move the focus to the next textbox, press the Tab key.

Entering a value and pressing the Return key will lock the correspondent textbox with the entered value. The
new position will be then constrained along a plane, or, along a single axis if two text boxes are locked.
Snapping to a graphical item will not modify the value in a locked text box.

Even if the displacement induced by the mouse is constrained to the LCS, the snapping may affect the
value of the U coordinate (or W in Local mode) if not locked.

For example:

In this case, the displacement is constrained

on the EN plane

In this case, the displacement is constrained

along the E axis

At any time, the current value in a textbox can be locked or unlocked by pressing the Space key while it is
highlighted.

By default, the coordinates in the in-canvas editor are Cartesian coordinates. To switch to Cylindrical or
Spherical coordinates by pressing the Backtick (`) key.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 106 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Cartesian : ENU, or XYZ, or UVW axes

Cylindrical : Distance (D), Angle (A) and Height (U)

Spherical : Distance (D), Angle (A) and Angle (A)

6.3.2.4 Combining Object Snapping and the In-canvas Editor

The use of the in-canvas editor may be combined with the object snapping. In this case, it is important to note
that any value entered in the in-canvas editor’s text boxes will lock the corresponding axis to this value.

This will then constrain the displacement along the plane, or the axis defined by the unlocked textboxes.
Snapping to any object afterwards will only modify the coordinates of the unlocked textboxes. This method is
particularly efficient for aligning elements with others along one axis or a plane.

6.3.3 Using the Editor

The Editor allows different kinds of modification on model elements like moving, rotating or modifying
dimensions. This section will describe how to activate the Editor and how to use it to modify the position of
an element.

To activate the Editor mode either:

• On the HOME tab, in the Modify group, click the Editor button.

The button will be shown highlighted while the Editor is active.

• Double click on a model element in the 3D View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 107 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Editor consists of blue modification grips that will appear

at the element’s origin and orientated according to the
element’s orientation.

Initially, the modification grips will be displayed on every

significant element - i.e. the owner of elements that have a
geometric definition - included in the current graphical
selection i.e. elements highlighted in green.

For example, an EQUI is significant because it can contain

primitives. Therefore, the Editor will be effective on the
whole EQUI for positioning and rotating.

To deactivate the Editor, press the Esc key or on the HOME tab, in the Modify group, click the Editor.

6.3.3.1 Positioning a Single Element

To modify the position of the element using the

Editor, click on the square grip representing the
origin of the Equipment.

This will temporarily change the LCS position to the

selected grip.

Moving the mouse will display a translucent preview

of the new position. The displacement is constrained
to the LCS. This can be changed at any time.

The in-canvas editor will be displayed, and dynamic

hints will indicate the displacement values along the
LCS axes when using Relative mode.

The new position may be using the object snapping, the in-canvas editor or a combination of both as seen in
section 6.3.2. By default, the coordinates in the in-canvas editor are expressed relatively to the selected grip.
The use of object snapping discards the constraint of the LCS.

To finish and apply the displacement press the Return key or click.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 108 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.3.3.2 Positioning Single Elements – (Worked Example)

Add SITE TRA.SITE.MESS to the 3D View.

In the 3D View, double click the :SLAB BASE. This will activate the
Editor on this element.

Click the square grip and move the mouse. Enter 0 in the E: textbox and press the Tab key. Hover the cursor
over the TANK1 in the 3D View and observe the feedback. The movement of the :SLAB will be restricted in
the East direction to 0mm due to the locking of the value.

Press Esc key to cancel the operation.

6.3.3.3 Positioning Multiple Elements

The Editor operates on the graphical

selection.

Consequently, it is possible to reposition

multiple elements simultaneously.
When the selection includes several
elements, a square grip will appear on
each significant element that is selected.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 109 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Holding the Ctrl key allows the

selection of the grips for the
elements to being moved. The
grips will become red.

One of the grips can be then

selected to initiate the
displacement command.

The in-canvas editor will be

positioned on the clicked grip.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 110 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.3.3.4 Editing Sub-Elements – (Worked Example)

As seen, the Editor will be initially effective on significant elements, e.g. EQUI. However, the Editor allows the
modification of sub-elements and primitives by navigating through the different selection Levels. This may be
achieved by a double click or by using the PowerWheel.

Add SITE TRA.SITE.MESS to the 3D

View.

In the 3D View, double click EQUI

TANK2.

This will activate the Editor at the

Equipment level.

The whole Equipment can then be

repositioned or rotated using the
Editor.

Double click on one of the feet of the

Equipment.

This will navigate to the Sub-

Equipment level below the EQUI.

The other elements in the 3D View

will become translucent.

The Editor can then be used to edit any element in the same selection
level, i.e. Sub-Equipment or primitives, to reposition them individually.

Multiple selections can be made on several elements in the same level.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 111 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Double click again on one of the feet

of the Equipment.

This will navigate to the level below

the Sub-Equipment. The rest of the
Equipment will become translucent.

Only the two PYRA elements in the

Sub-Equipment can then be edited
individually.

The Editor can be used to

modify the dimensions of
primitive element, but this is
out of the scope of this training
course.

Refer to the TM-1811 AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1) Equipment Modelling training guide for the creation and
modification of primitives.

To exit the Editor and navigate to the upper levels, press the Esc key in the following sequence:

• Pressing the Esc key the first time will disable the Editor.

• Pressing the Esc key a second time will cancel the current graphical selection.

• Pressing the Esc key will navigate the owner level.

The navigation between selection levels may also be achieved using the PowerWheel by right clicking on
a selected element and clicking the Navigation tile. The Navigation gallery will be displayed to allow
selection of the navigation level

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 112 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Invoke the Editor at the primitive level

below the SUBE TANK2/SUPPORTS.

Right click on one of the two primitives

to display the PowerWheel and
gesture to the Navigation tile.

Click the SUBEQUIPMENT button from the Navigation gallery.

This will navigate to the element TANK2/SUPPORTS without
exiting the Editor mode.

The name of the element will appear in a tooltip when the

cursor is over the different buttons.

6.3.4 Using the Move Command

The Move command allows the modification of the position of the elements included in the current graphical
selection by specifying a displacement vector. By default, the displacement is defined by a base point and a
destination point but other options are available from the in canvas editor. The Move command is invoked
by either:

• On the HOME tab, in the Modify group, clicking the Move button.

• Right click to display the PowerWheel, click the Context tile to display the menu and select the Move
option.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 113 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• Enter Move in the 3D View.

The in-canvas editor will appear, displaying the Specify base point prompt.

This is the first step of the default method consisting in the selection of two points to derive the displacement
vector from.

Pressing the Down arrow cursor key will display two in-command
options:

• Displacement - to enter a displacement vector relatively to the

current LCS origin,

• Copy – to create a copy.

These commands can be invoked by clicking on the appropriate tile or pressing the corresponding key
indicated on the tile by the underscore. For example, on the above in-command options the D or C key could
be pressed to select Displacement or Copy within the Move command.

When using the default Move function, specify a point by snapping to an item and/or entering values in the
in-canvas editor as described previously. Once the base point has been specified, the prompt changes to
Specify the second point and a translucent representation of the elements being moved is attached to the
cursor. Once again specify a point.

When the second point has been specified, the selected elements will be moved by the vector between the
base point and the second point.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 114 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.3.5 Other Positioning Aids

Other tools available are from the Status Bar toggles, or by pressing the relevant function keys to facilitate the
positioning of elements.

or pressing the F7 key – toggles the display of the Grid.

or pressing the F9 key- toggles the snapping to the Grid, (even if the Grid is not displayed).

or pressing the F10 key – toggles the displays of the polar coordinate feedback and snap the
displacement to radials.

or pressing the F8 key – toggles the locking of the displacement to the LCS.

or pressing the F12 key- toggles the display of the dynamic hints.

Projects the object snapping onto the LCS.

or pressing the F3 key- toggles the object snapping as mentioned previously.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 115 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 8 Positioning Elements

This exercise follows on from the previous exercise for the correction of the elements belonging to SITE
TRA.SITE.MESS.

TANK1 - Positional Error

• Correct the position of CYLI 1 of EQUI TANK1 using the Move function and snapping the base of CYLI
1 to the P3 of BOX 1 of the base.

PUMP1 - Positional Errors

• Correct the position of EQUI PUMP1 using the

Editor by referencing the Ppoints of BRAN
pipe1-b1.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 116 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• Correct the position of DISH PUMP1-DISH2 of EQUI PUMP1

using the Editor by snapping the base of the DISH to CYLI of
the motor.

TANK2 - Positional Errors

• Correct the position of CYLI 1 of EQUI

TANK2 using the Editor. Lock the U
value to 0mm and move the CYLI in
the East/North plane by snapping to
the Ppoint of CONE 1.

• Correct the position of PYRA 1 of

EQUI TANK2 using the Editor. Lock
the E and U values to 0mm and move
the PYRA along the North axis by
snapping to the Ppoint of CYLI 1.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 117 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• Correct the position of PYRA 2 of EQUI TANK2 using the Move function. Set the object snapping to
Endpoint using the PowerWheel. Lock the E and U values to 0mm and move the PYRA along the Up
axis by snapping to the Endpoint of PYRA 1.

• Perform a Save Work.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 118 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.4 Rotating Elements

Many AVEVA™ E3D Design elements have an Orientation attribute, e.g. SITE, ZONE, EQUI, SUBE, STRU, PANE,
Primitives, etc.

Orientation in AVEVA™ E3D Design is expressed in terms of axes direction, e.g. Y is N and Z is U, meaning that
the element’s Y axis is pointing North and the Z axis is pointing Up. Only two axes need to be stated as the
third axis direction is known because it conforms to the right hand rule, i.e. in this case X is E.

Like any other attribute, the orientation may be modified using the Attributes or Properties form. However,
the preferred method of modifying the orientation of an element is to rotate it in the 3D View by either:

• Using the Editor to quickly rotate the elements around its origin.

• Using the Rotate command to specify a rotation base point.

6.4.1 Using the Editor to Rotate

Unlike positioning, rotating using the Editor can only be applied on a single element selection.

Selecting and activating the Editor on a single non-routed element

will display rotation grips on the three axes of the element.

To rotate the element, select the correspondent grip and either:

• Enter an angle value in the in-canvas editor.

• Specify a point using the object snapping.

Rotating using this method is restricted to the three axes of the element’s LCS.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 119 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.4.2 Using the Rotate Command

The Rotate command allows the rotation of all the elements in a graphical selection, in any direction and from
any rotation origin.

First, the elements to be rotated must be selected. It may be any significant element displayed in the 3D View,
or, it may be several Sub-Elements or primitive below a significant element.

The rotation will be applied around the W axis, consequently the LCS needs to be set accordingly using the
methods described previously. The Rotate command is invoked by either:

• On the HOME tab, in the Modify group, clicking the Rotate

button.

• Right click to display the PowerWheel, click the Context tile to display the menu and select the
Rotate option.

• Enter Rotate in the 3D View.

The in-canvas editor will appear, displaying the Specify base point prompt.

Using the in-canvas editor textboxes or object snapping, specify the position of the rotation base point.

As with the Move command, pressing the Down arrow cursor key will offer an option to create a copy
from the rotated element.

Once the base point has been specified, the prompt changes to Specify rotation angle and a translucent
representation of the elements being moved is attached to the cursor.

Entering a value in the textbox or snapping to an item in the 3D View will rotate the selected element(s) by
the specified angle around the axis as defined by the LCS.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 120 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 9 Rotating Elements

TANK1 Orientation Errors

• Set the LCS to EQUI TANK1 and use

the Rotate command to rotate it
about the base by 45 degrees.

PUMP1 Orientation Errors

• Rotate CYLI PUMP1-CYL2 of EQUI PUMP1

to align the shaft with the axis of the pump
using the Editor.

TANK2 Orientation Errors

• Rotate NOZZ TANK2-n2 of EQUI TANK2 to

align the nozzle with the centre of the vessel
using the Editor.

• Perform a Save Work.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 121 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

6.5 The Positioning Control Form

Some commands will require a different method to specify positions using the Positioning Control form. This
is sometimes referred as to Event Driven Graphics (EDG).

In this case it will not be possible to use the object snapping or in-canvas editor. The
PowerCompass will be disabled and the Positioning Control form will be displayed.

The PowerWheel is disabled while using the Positioning Control from. Right
clicking in the 3D View will display a contextual menu.

To specify a position using the Positioning Control form the following steps are used:

• Select a Pick Type.

• Select a Pick Method.

• Hold the left button on the element owning the position to be picked.

• Release the left button to confirm the selected position.

When the left button is pressed and maintained on an element, the selection of the position to be picked will
be locked on this element. The Prompt Area will indicate the type of relevant snap item while the cursor
hovers over the element. Releasing the mouse while the Prompt Area indicates a selection will confirm the
snapped position.

If the button is pressed on the wrong element, move the mouse away from this element before releasing the
button to cancel the picking.

Some commands require two or three positions. If the first snap is wrong, the command will need to be
aborted and recalled to start a new picking operation.

6.5.1 Pick Type

The Pick Type acts like a snapping filter and its options are:

Element - picking is restricted to the element’s origin.

Ppoint - picking is restricted to Ppoints or panel vertices.

Pline - picking is restricted to structural Plines.

Graphics – enables edge, surface and corner picks on any graphical element.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 122 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Aid - picking is restricted to Construction Aids, including User defined Grids.

Screen – enables a pick anywhere in the 3D View.

Laser – picking is restricted to Laser data points.

Any – uses any appropriate Pick Type.

6.5.2 Pick Method

Snap - selects the snap point nearest to the cursor pick point. Snap points vary for different elements.

Mid-Point - derives the mid-point between two snap points along a linear item.

Intersect – derives the intersection of two picked lines from any directional elements. The elements
do not have to be co-planar.

Cursor - places the derived point exactly where the cursor picks on the element.

Distance - applies the offset value entered in the textbox. For example a +ve value of 500
derives a point 500 mm from the nearest snap point, measured towards the cursor
position, whereas, a –ve value of 500 derives a point 500 mm from the nearest snap point,
measured away from the cursor position.

The two additional buttons on the Positioning Control form are:

Working Plane – this button is now obsolete.

Explicit Position – this button displays the Explicit Position form allowing explicit co-ordinates to be
entered.

6.5.3 Positioning Control – (Worked Example)

Click the HOME > Measure > Distance button to display the Measure distance start
prompt.

The Measure Distance form will be displayed along with the Positioning Control form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 123 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Add SITE TRA.SITE.MESS to the 3D View.

On the Positioning Control form, click the Element and Snap

buttons from the Pick Type and Pick Method sections
respectively.

In the 3D View, hold the left button down on EQUI TANK2.

Release the button when the prompt states Snap : CYLINDER 1 of

EQUIPMENT /TANK2

The Measure distance start label will be shown in the 3D View.

On the Positioning Control form, click the Graphics and Midpoint

buttons from the Pick Type and Pick Method sections
respectively.

In the 3D View, hold the left button down on :SLAB and hover the
cursor over the Eastern edge of the slab.

Release the button when the prompt states Snap: EDGE of

/Concrete

This will pick the midpoint of the selected edge. The 3D View and Measure Distance form will be updated with
the relevant information.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 124 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 125 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 7

7 Creating Additional Views

AVEVA™ E3D Design provides the ability to view the model, or parts of the model, in multiple 3D Views.
However, in practice, the number of useable views will probably be limited by the size of the monitor(s) in use.

AVEVA™ E3D Design has one, default 3D View, named 3D View(1) – Drawlist(1), which cannot be deleted or
renamed.

New 3D Views with the same or different Drawlist can be created and displayed simultaneously. The content
of the 3D Views can be linked or separate, depending on the associated Drawlist and each 3D View can be
manipulated separately.

7.1 Creating an Empty View

On the VIEW tab, in the Views group, clicking the New button creates a new 3D
View with an empty Drawlist, and displays the View Settings form where the new
3D View may be configured.

See section 9.2 for details of the View Settings form.

The new 3D View is named, by default, 3D View(<x>) – Drawlist(<y>) where x is the sequential number of the
3D View and y is the sequential number of the Drawlist associated with the 3D View. It will be docked in the
same tab group as the current 3D View.

Only one 3D View can be current at any one time and is

identified by its correspondent tab being highlighted in
blue. All non-current 3D Views have a light grey tab. A 3D
View is made current by left clicking its correspondent tab,
or anywhere in the 3D View if multiple 3D Views are visible.

7.2 Copying a 3D View

On the VIEW tab, in the Views group, the Copy button options list contains the following options:

To a Separate View – this option creates a copy of the current 3D View and
creates a new Drawlist populated with the same contents as the copied 3D
View’s Drawlist. For example, copying 3D View(1) - Drawlist(1) to a separate
view may create a 3D View named 3D View(2) – Drawlist(2).

To a Cloned View – this option creates a copy of the current 3D View and is
associated with the Drawlist of the copied 3D View. For example, copying 3D
View(3) - Drawlist(3) to a cloned view may create a 3D View named 3D
View(4) – Drawlist(3).

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 126 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

To a Local View – this option creates a copy of the graphical selection in the
current view and a new Drawlist which is populated with the elements in the
graphical selection. For example, copying 3D View(3) - Drawlist(3) with a
graphical selection to a local view may create a 3D View named 3D View(4)
– Drawlist(4) and the 3D View contents would be the graphical selection.

7.3 Grid Plane View

When working with Reference Grids, it is possible to create a new view based on a selected Grid Plane.

Selecting a Grid Plane element and on the VIEW tab, in the Views group,
selecting the Grid Plane option from the Copy button options list. The new
view will be orientated parallel to the Grid plane. The clipping will be
activated with an offset from the two sides of the plane. The new view will
be named after the Grid Plane ID, e.g. B Grid View.

The creation of Reference Grids is covered in TM-1802 AVEVA™ E3D Design Model Utilities training guide.

7.4 Displaying Multiple Views

Only one 3D View can be visible in one Tab Group but it is possible to create multiple Tab Groups to visualize
multiple 3D Views simultaneously.

When several 3D Views are opened in the same Tab Group, the right click menu of the tabs, with the exception
of the 3D View(1) – Drawlist(1) tab, will display the following three options to detach the view from the Tab
Group:

Close : Remove the selected 3D View.

New Horizontal Tab Group : Move the selected 3D View to a new Horizontal
Tab Group.

New Vertical Tab Group : Move the selected 3D View to a new Vertical Tab
Group.

Float : Detach the selected 3D View completely to form an independent

window that can be moved anywhere outside the main display window.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 127 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Once one Vertical or Horizontal Tab Group has been created, the subsequent options will only allow the
creation of the same kind of Tab Group, i.e. horizontal or vertical.

When multiple Tab Groups are opened, it is possible to drag and drop a tab from one Tab Group to another.

Multiple views are not retained from session to session, only 3D View(1) is persistent.

7.5 Displaying Multiple Views – (Worked Example)

Add SITE TRA.SITE.MESS to the 3D View.

Select the VIEW > Views > Copy > To a Separate View option.

This will create a new 3D View tab 3D View(2) – Drawlist(2)

and make it the current 3D View.

Remove TANK1 from the current 3D View.

Right Click on the tab 3D View(2) – Drawlist(2) and select New

Vertical Tab Group

The two 3D Views will be now displayed side by side. 3D View(2) – Drawlist(2) has a separate Drawlist.
Consequently, TANK1 can be seen in 3D View(1) – Drawlist(1).

Close 3D View(2) – Drawlist(2).

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 128 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 10 Creating Additional Views

Perform the following tasks:

• Clear the 3D View and add SITE TRA.SITE.MESS to the 3D View

• Use the PowerCompass to set the view direction to North East Iso.

• Create a new empty 3D View and close the View Settings form.

• Add ZONE PIPE.ZONE to the 3D View (2) – Drawlist(2) and set the view direction to North.

• Create a separate copy of the current 3D View.

• Make 3D View (2) – Drawlist(2) the current 3D View. Change the viewing direction and remove PIPE
pipe1 from the 3D View. Note that this has not affected the viewing direction or view contents of 3D
View (3).

• Move 3D View (1) – Drawlist(1) to a new vertical Tab Group.

• Select TANK2 in 3D View (1) – Drawlist(1) to make it the CE and the graphical selection. Copy the 3D
View to a local view.

• Close all the 3D View tabs. Note that 3D View (1) – Drawlist(1) cannot be closed as it is the main 3D
View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 129 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 8

8 General Utilities
8.1 Search Utility
The Search utility enables the databases to be searched for specific items. The scope of the search may be
defined and the items may be identified by different criteria including name, type, attributes or any
combination of these.

On the HOME tab, in the Search group, clicking the Search button displays the Search
form.

The form is displayed in a basic search mode and may be

docked in a Panel on either side of the 3D View.

The items to be searched for may be specified by using the name that contains a specific string, one or more
element types or a combination of both.

A string may be entered in the Name Contains textbox. The string may be of any length and contain any
permissible name character. The names are case sensitive.

An element type must be entered in the Element Types textbox. By default [ALL] is displayed which will find
all element types for the search.

One or more item types may be entered in the Element Types textbox. If more than one element type is
entered, they must be separated by a space, comma or semi-colon, e.g. EQUI PIPE, NOZZ; TEE. The entries
may be any valid element type and are not case sensitive.

The options list sets the scope for the search, i.e. an element or collection which will
be searched within for the specified elements.

• Current Element - displays the name of the CE in the adjacent textbox. This updates automatically if a
new CE is selected.

• Element – allows an element name to be entered into the textbox. This is not affected by the CE.

• Current Collection – enables searching of the current collection for the specified elements.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 130 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Having made appropriate entries, clicking the Search

button initiates the search.

The time taken to complete the search will depend on

the amount of data in the scope and the number of
elements being searched for.

The Collections form is displayed showing the results of

the search.

This form allows many operations like saving and

sharing the results of the search, modifying, grouping
and sorting the grid’s columns. This functionality is
covered later in this chapter.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 131 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.1.1 More Search Tools

Clicking the More Search Tools link label displays

the form in an advanced search mode. This enables
the search scope to be refined, attribute and free
filters to be applied and searches to be managed.

The form opens by default with the Search Scope

fold-up panel open.

The In Volume checkbox enables the search to be

specified within a volume. There are two methods
to define the limits of the search volume:

• Of Element - allows an element name to be

entered in the textbox. Alternatively,
navigating to an element in the Model
Explorer and clicking the CE button
displays the element name in the textbox.
Previously selected elements in the
current session are available in the
textbox. The list may be cleared by
selecting the Clear History from options
list.

• Explicit Volume – allows a volume to be

explicitly specified by entering coordinate
values in the Lower Limit and Upper Limit
sections of the form. These limits
represent the opposing corners of a
volume box.

Selecting the Wholly Within radio button will

provide search results for elements that are wholly
within the defined volume.

Selecting the Wholly & Partially Within radio

button will provide search results for elements that
are wholly and partially within the defined volume.

The Modified checkbox restricts the search results

to those elements modified in the current session.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 132 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.1.1.1 Attribute Filters

The Attribute Filter fold-up panel provides a

method of filtering the search criteria by specifying
restrictions to one or more attributes.

A filter can be added by clicking the Add Filter link

label.

By default, the Attribute is set to NAME.

An options lists is available by clicking in the current Attribute cell which allows the
selection of a standard attributes or UDA.

If more than one element type is being searched for the options list contains a union
of all standard attributes and UDAs.

The Operator cell contains an options list of the operators that can be applied to the
selected attribute or UDA.

Once the Attribute and Operator cells have been set the Value cell can be set by
entering a value.

More than one filter can be applied.

A filter may be deleted by selecting it using the left hand column and clicking the
Delete Filter link label.

8.1.1.2 Free Filter

The Free Filter fold-up panel allows a valid PML

(Programmable Macro Language) expression to be
used as a filter by entering it in the textbox.

PML expressions such as HBOR EQ 50mm, PSPEC NE /A3B or DRNS NE U OR DRNS NE D may be used. The
filter may be removed by deleting the expression from the textbox.

Refer to the Database Management Reference section of the Help for more information about PML
expressions.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 133 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.1.1.3 Manage Searches

The Manage Searches fold-up panel enables

regularly used or complex searches to be saved for
later use. The saved search is based uses the
current search criteria.

Clicking the Create “Saved Search” Based on

Current Search Criteria link label displays the
Create Saved Search form.

The Name textbox can be used to set the name of the saved search.

The Location options list allows the location of the saved search to
be set.

Clicking the OK button saves the search, including element type

and scope definition.

Previously saved searches are selected from the

options list. Clicking the Search button runs the
selected saved search.

Clicking the Delete Selected Saved Search link

label deleted the selected saved search.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 134 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 11 Search Utility

Perform the following tasks:

• Display the Search form and set the Element Type to BRAN.

• Select the option to allow SITE SITE-PIPING-AREA01 to be entered.

• Perform the search and view the results.

• Set up a filter on the HBORE attribute to only return Branches greater than 50mm.

• Perform the search and view the results.

• Save the search with a name of bran with hbor gt 50mm in the Project Setting (TRA) location.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 135 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.2 Collections
Collections are lists of database elements that are selected and filtered using a set of criteria. A collection can
be used to perform an action on all of the elements in the list, either from the Collections form or from other
forms, e.g. the Position By and Rotate forms.

Collections also enable data to be viewed in a grid format which can have additional columns displayed and
may be filtered, sorted, grouped, printed or exported to Excel.

Collections are persistent between sessions and disciplines and some collections are persistent between
modules, for instance, allowing Draw to use a collection that was created in Model. Shared Collections may
be accessed by all project users.

On the HOME tab, in the Search group, clicking the Collections button displays the
Collections form.

It may be docked in a Panel on either side of the 3D View.

The Collections form consists of two sections.

The upper section displays the available collections under

three categories which display their contents as a tree
structure.

The lower section form displays the contents of a selected

collection in a grid.

The visibility of the System Collections and Shared

Collections is controlled by the Show Current
Collection / Show All Collections link labels.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 136 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.2.1 System Collections

The System Collections consists

• Claimlist

• Drawlist

• Current Selection

Selecting the Drawlist collection displays its contents, if

any, in the grid.

System Collections are generated automatically and

updated dynamically. For example, adding SITE SITE-
EQUIPMENT-AREA01 to the 3D View updates the
Drawlist collection.

The right click menu from the grid is as shown. The options available depend on
the collection and element type selected. The 3D View option has a sub-menu
which has the same functions as the right click menu from the Model Explorer for
adding / removing elements to / from the 3D View.

The Cut, Copy, Paste, Fill Up and Fill Down options are used for editing the values
in the cells. This is shown later in this chapter.

The Remove Selected removes the selected element from the collection.

The Navigate To option navigates to the element in the Model Explorer and
makes it the CE.

For more information about the Grids in AVEVA™ E3D Design, refer to section 8.3.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 137 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.2.2 Create a Shared Collection

Shared Collections are stored in Group Set (GPSET) elements owned by Group World (GPWL) elements and
are persistent across modules.

From the right click menu of Shared Collections select New > New
Category.

Click the New Category option to create the new category is

displayed in the Shared Collections.

A GPWL named New Shared Category<n>, where <n>

is a sequential number is created.

From the right click menu of New Shared Category1 select New >
New Collection.

A GPSET named New Shared Collection<n>, where <n>

is a sequential number is created below the category
in Shared Collections.

Selecting the Delete option deletes the category.

Selecting the Rename option enables the category name to be edited to a more descriptive name.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 138 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The right menu from a collection contains the

following options:

• 3D View - allows the addition or removal of the

contents of the collection to/from the 3D
View.

• New Collection – creates a new collection.

• Rename

• Delete

Navigate to SITE SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA02 in the Model Explorer.

From the right click menu from New Shared

Collection1 select Add CE To Collection.

The SITE is now displayed in the grid to show it is in the

collection.

Navigate to SITE SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 in the Model Explorer.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 139 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

From the right click menu from New Shared

Collection1 select Add CE Members to Collection.

The only member of this SITE, ZONE ZONE-

EQUIPMENT-AREA01 is now displayed in the grid to
show it is part of the collection.

Navigate to SITE SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA03 in the Model Explorer. Drag

and drop it into the grid or onto the collection name to add it to the
collection.

From the right click menu from New Shared

Collection1 select Edit Scope Selection to display the
Expression Editor form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 140 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This enables an expression to be associated with a

shared collection to dynamically update the contents
of the collection.

Enter ALL PIPE in the textbox and click the Evaluate

button.

The Results section of the form is populated with all

the PIPE elements contained within the MDB.

Other example expressions are:

ALL PIPE WITH PSPEC EQ /A3B - would add all pipes

in the MDB of the Spec A3B.

ALL PIPE WITH PSPEC EQ /A3B AND BORE GT 80mm

- would add pipes with spec A3B and a bore greater
than 80mm.

Clicking the OK button adds the results to the

collection for which the expression has been set.

If elements that comply with the expression are

added or deleted to the scope covered by the
expression then the collection contents will be
dynamically updated.

The expression can be removed from the collection

by opening the Expression Editor form, deleting the
expression and clicking the OK button.

Collections may contain a mixture of elements added

via an expression, which are dynamically updated,
and elements that have been added by manual
methods.

The contents of the collection created by the

expression are deleted from the collection. In the
Collections form grid, elements added manually are
displayed in normal text whilst items added via the
expression are displayed in italic text.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 141 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.2.3 My Collections

My Collections are similar to Shared Collections except

that they are not stored in the database and cannot be
viewed by other users.

They are persistent across sessions and modules for

the user who created them.

My Collections have the same functionality on right

click menus to that described previously for Shared
Collections except that a scope selection expression
cannot be applied to a collection.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 142 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 12 Using Collections

Perform the following tasks:

• Display the Collections form.

• Create a new collection using My Collections with the name Branches greater than 50mm.

• Using copy and paste, populate the collection with the saved search created previously.

• Add the collection to the 3D View.

• Create a new category in the Shared Collections with the name Area01 Equipment.

• Create a new collection below the new category with the name Electrical Equipment 01.

• Add the members of ZONE ZONE-ELECTRICAL-AREA01 to the collection.

• Create a new category in the Shared Collections with the name Area01 Structural.

• Create a new shared collection below the new category with the name All Sections.

• Edit the Scope Selection of the collection to include a rule to add all GENSEC from ZONE ZONE-
STRUCTURAL-AREA01. Make sure to evaluate the expression.

• Perform a Save Work.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 143 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.3 Working with Grids

In AVEVA™ E3D Design, many tools will use a grid to display a list of elements, similar to the Collections form.
Depending on the form, the grid may have one or several of the functions described below.

Most of the functionality is accessible from the right click menu from
columns header as shown here from the search results collection.

8.3.1 Modifying Values

If the access rights allow, attributes may be modified directly in the grid by double clicking on the cell and
entering values. Read Only cells will be indicated with a grey background. Values from pseudo-attributes and
from PML expressions are always Read Only.

Modified values will be indicated by a cyan background.

It is also possible to modify multiple rows at once in a Grid. This may be achieved by:

From the right click menu of the cell select Copy.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 144 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Select the multiple cells using the Ctrl / Shift keys or by holding
down the mouse button and dragging the cursor and from the
right click menu select Paste.

Alternatively, selecting multiple cells, the top one having the

value to be copied.

From the right click menu selecting the Fill Down will
propagate the value of the top cell to the rest of the selection.

The Fill Up option will propagate the value of the bottom cell
of the selection upwards.

When the attribute associated to a column is a

reference to another element, e.g. a
specification or a property, an ellipsis button (…)
button will appear in the cell.

The user may enter an element’s name manually, but it must exist in the
database. Or, clicking the ellipsis (…) button will display the Reference
Browser to search for a valid element.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 145 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.3.2 Sorting a Column

Clicking on the header of a column will sort the column in alphabetical order, either
ascending or descending.

Multiple columns may be sorted by holding down the Shift key while clicking on a
column header. The sorting precedence order will be then indicated by a number
on the column.

8.3.3 Freezing a Column

When a grid contains a lot of columns it may be

practical to freeze a column in order to have it
always displayed when scrolling across the other
columns.

Clicking the Pin button on the header of will

duplicate the column and keep it in a fixed
position at the left of the grid.

8.3.4 Filtering a column

The first row below the column headers is reserved for filtering the
corresponding column. By default, the filter is set to Contains. Entering
any text in the cell below the column header will filter all the values
containing the text entered for the correspondent column.

Clicking the Clear Filter button ( )in the filter cell will cancel the filter
for the corresponding column.

Clicking the Clear Filter button ( ) at the left of the filtering row will
cancel all the filters.

Other filtering options are available from the Down Arrow

button on the right of the filter cell.

It will be then possible to filter the grid to any individual

existing values by checking the relevant check boxes.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 146 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Text Filters options allow the modification of the

filtering criteria when entering text in the filtering cell.

8.3.5 Adding columns

Columns can be added to the grid from the right click menu on
any column header and selecting Column Setup to display the
Column Setup form.

Clicking the Add Column link label will add a new row
in the table to define a new column.

To define the values in the column, select an attribute from the options
list of an Expression cell, or enter a valid PML expression.

Enter any text in the Heading cell to define the name of the column that
will appear in the column’s header.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 147 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The positions of the columns can be change using the Up Arrow and Down Arrow button on the right of the
form. Alternatively, this can be done directly in the grid by dragging the columns’ headers as shown later.

If values are not set or not valid for some columns, the cell will show a red indicator that may be hovered over
by the mouse to display the reason for the error.

8.3.6 Arranging Columns

The columns can be re-arranged by drag and

drop. In this example the Function column is
going to be positioned to the right of the
Description column

Press and hold the mouse button on a column

header to re-arrange.

Drag it to the desired position in between two

columns. The new position will be indicated by
two black arrows.

Release the mouse button to set the new

position.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 148 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

It is also possible to position a column below the

others using a similar method.

8.3.7 Column Units

When columns contain numerical values with a physical dimension, e.g. length, weight, it is possible to choose
the displayed unit.

In the Collections grid, the Ruler button options list will be displayed for the
columns having numerical values which have a unit.

Clicking Ruler button options list will display the options to change the
displayed unit.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 149 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.3.8 Grouping
It is possible to activate the grouping of rows in some grids.

The right click menu from the header column of

Collections grid contains a Grouping toggle.

When Grouping is active an additional Grouping

section is available above the header columns.

Dragging and dropping a column header, in this

example the Pipe header, into the Grouping section
will group the items of the grid by the selected
column(s).

Multiple columns can be selected for grouping. Each

group will then appear as individual sections in the
grid which may be expanded or collapsed

It is possible to modify the order of the grouping by

repositioning the column headers in the Grouping
section.

The grouping order is be indicated by the numerical

value in the columns’ headers

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 150 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.3.9 Column Summaries

When columns contain numeric values, like for example lengths or weights, it is possible to display summaries
for each group. Summary functions allows calculation of:

• Averages

• Counts

• Maximum / Minimum

• Sum

The right click menu from the header column of Collections grid contains
a Column Summaries toggle.

This will add the Sum button in the header columns containing numerical
values.

Clicking the Sum button displays the Select Summaries form.

The checkbox for the required summary is checked. The results will be
then displayed in the grid for each group.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 151 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.3.10 Quick Report

A report can be created with the columns and values from the grid.

From the right click menu from the header column of the Collection grid
select Quick Report.

The Quick Report form will be displayed. A

template may be selected from the Layout
Template tab.

Selecting a template and clicking the Open button will display a confirmation
message.

Clicking the Yes button on the Report Designer form will

generate the report and open the Quick Report Designer.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 152 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The report layout may be modified and printed using Report Designer. The report will only consider the
columns and values in the grid, not the sorting, grouping and summaries.

8.3.11 Exporting to Excel

The grid can also be exported to Excel.

From the right click menu from the header column of the Collection grid
select Export to Excel to display the Save As form. A location for the file
can then be determined.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 153 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 13 Working with Grids

Perform the following tasks:

• Open the All Sections collection created previously.

• Add a new column with attribute MATREF and Heading of Material.

• Add a new column with the Expression as the CUTL pseudo attribute. Use the default Heading of Cut
Length.

• Add a new column with the Expression as NWEI. Use the default Heading of Net Weight.

• Sort the grid using the Name column in ascending order.

• Group the grid using the Material column.

• Edit the Material for the first element in the group for GR355I by entering a new value of GR275.

• Edit the Material cells for the other elements in the group using the Fill Down option.

• Change the unit of the Cut Length column to metre.

• Export the grid to Excel.

• Perform a Save Work.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 154 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.4 Measuring Functions

The measuring functions allows the evaluation of distances and angles. As seen previously these functions use
the Positioning Control form.

8.4.1 Measure Distance

On the HOME tab, in the Measure group, clicking the Distance button displays the Measure
Distance form, Positioning Control form and the ‘Measure distance start (Distance[0]) Snap:’
prompt.

The Units section enables the setting of the units the

measured distance will be displayed in. The Unit Type
options list has three entries, Default, Metric and Imperial.

Selecting Default displays the distance values in the current

session units whilst selecting Metric or Imperial activates the
Display Unit options list.

If Metric is selected the user can choose from Millimetres,

Centimetres and Metres for the display units.

If Imperial is selected the user can choose from Inches, Feet

& Inches and Feet (decimal feet) for the display units.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 155 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The prompt will change depending on the Pick Method

setting on the Positioning Control form, e.g. Measure
distance start (Mid-Point) Snap:

Picking the first measure point displays an aid text Measure

distance start at the selected point and the prompt changes
to Measure distance end (Snap) Snap:

Picking the second measure

point displays the ‘true’
distance and the E, N and U
components with aid lines
and text in the 3D View.

These values are also

displayed on the Measure
Distance form with the
addition of the direction
between the first measure
point and second measure
point.

The Offset and Direction values are expressed, by default, with respect to the World co-ordinate system. They
may be expressed in terms of another frame of reference by entering a named element, CE, Owner or db
reference no. in the wrt textbox on the Measure Distance form.

Once a measure distance task is performed, the form will remain active, enabling other distances to be
measured, until the form is closed.

8.4.1.1 Using Graphics Picks

The graphics in the 3D View may also be used to derive points for
measuring. Selecting the Graphics Pick Type on the Positioning Control
form enables the graphics to be used with any of the Pick Methods.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 156 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Clicking and holding the left mouse button over an element in the 3D View highlights the edges of the element
and displays a graphics cursor. Moving the cursor over the element(s) changes the cursor shape depending on
what the cursor is hovering over at the time, for example a surface, a corner or an edge.

Surface Corner Edge

8.4.2 Measure Angle

On the HOME tab, in the Measure group, selecting Angle 3 Points from the
Measure button options list displays the Measure Angle form, Positioning Control
form and the Measure angle root of angle (Distance[0]) Snap: prompt.

The prompt will change depending on the Pick Method

setting on the Positioning Control form.

The root of angle is the centre point of the angle.

The Units section enables the setting of the units the measured
angle will be displayed in. The Unit options list has four entries,
Default, Degrees, Radians and Gradians.

Selecting Default displays the angle values in the current

session units.

The Decimal Places textbox allows the number of decimal

places for the angle to be determined.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 157 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Picking the root of angle point displays an aid text Measure angle root of
angle at the selected point and the prompt changes to Measure angle
first point (Distance[0]) Snap:

Picking the first measure point displays an aid text Measure angle first
point at the selected point and the prompt changes to Measure angle
second point (Distance[0]) Snap:

Picking the second measure point

displays the angle with aid lines and
text in the 3D View.

These values are also displayed on the

Measure Angle form with the addition
of the directions between the root of
angle point and the first measure
point and second measure point.

The measured angle is expressed, by

default, with respect to the World
coordinate system. The measured
angle may be expressed in terms of
another frame of reference by
entering a named element, CE, Owner
or db reference no. in the wrt textbox
on the Measure Angle form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 158 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.5 Walk Mode & Fly Mode

In addition to the standard view controls, the Walk Mode and Fly Mode allows the visualization of the 3D
model in a realistic review mode, from a moving observer point of view and in perspective mode.

On the VIEW tab, in the Control group, clicking the Walk

Mode or Fly Mode buttons will activate / deactivate the
Walk Mode or Fly Mode respectively.

The 3D View will be set to perspective with a 90 degree field of vision.

In Walk Mode, the cursor will appear as a walking man.

In Fly Mode, the cursor will appear as a paper plane.

When Laser models are displayed, enabling the Walk Mode or Fly Mode will activate the HyperBubble™
mode for a photorealistic rendering of Laser data.

For more information about displaying Laser Data, refer to TM-1821 AVEVA™ E3D Design 2.1 - Using
Laser Models.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 159 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.5.1 Walk Mode Controls

In Walk Mode, the displacement may be achieved along a fixed horizontal plane with a variable speed.

The Walk Mode speed can be set on the PROJECT tab.

The Walking Mode navigation controls are operated using the 3 mouse buttons:

Left Button: Walking

Pressing the left mouse button down will initiate the walking motion by constraining the displacement on the
current horizontal plane and freeze the location of the black crosshair on the screen.

While holding the left button down, the cursor will be representing a walking man, and a dashed line will run
between the cursor and the black crosshair. Moving the cursor away from the black crosshair will set the
direction and speed of the displacement.

Holding the Shift key down will increase the walking speed, holding the Ctrl key down will decrease the walking
speed

When the cursor is above the crosshair, the observer will move forward,
below the crosshair he will move backwards.

When the cursor is on the right of the crosshair the observer will rotate to
the right, and when the cursor is on the left of the crosshair the observer
will rotate to the left.

The distance between the cursor and the crosshair will determine the
speed of the walk. The further the cursor is from the crosshair, the faster
the walk will be.

Middle Button: Rotation

Pressing and holding the middle mouse button will allow the rotation in every direction from a fixed position.
Moving the mouse will pan the view angle following the mouse position.

Right Button: Vertical Motion

Pressing and holding the right mouse button will allow the displacement in a vertical motion. The displacement
will go upward when the cursor is above the crosshair. The displacement will go downward when the cursor
is below the crosshair. The speed of the displacement will be controlled by the distance between the cursor
and the crosshair.

Pressing the Esc key or clicking the Walk Mode button will exit Walk Mode and restore the view as it was
before the Walk Mode was enabled.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 160 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.5.2 Fly Mode Controls

In Fly Mode, the displacement may be achieved in every direction at a constant speed.

The Fly Mode speed can be set on the PROJECT tab.

The Fly Mode navigation controls are operated using 2 mouse buttons.

Left Button: Flying

Pressing and holding the left mouse button will activate the flying motion.

When the cursor is above the crosshair, the observer will rotate upward,
and when the cursor is below the crosshair the observer will rotate
downward.

When the cursor is on the right of the crosshair the observer will turn right,
and when the cursor is on the left of the crosshair the observer will turn left.

The distance between the cursor and the crosshair will determine the speed
of the rotation. The further the cursor is from the crosshair, the faster the
rotation will be.

Holding the Shift key down will increase the walking speed, holding the Ctrl key down will decrease the walking
speed

Middle Button: Rotation

Pressing and holding the middle mouse button will allow the rotation in every direction from a fixed position.
The direction of the rotation is determined by the position of the cursor relatively to the black crosshair. The
speed of the rotation will be controlled by the distance between the cursor and the crosshair.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 161 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Exercise 14
Perform the following tasks:

• Clear the 3D View and add the content of the Shared Collections Area01, Area02 and Area03 from
the Areas category to the 3D View.

• Activate the Fly Mode and fly around the model using the controls described previously. Fly to the
centre of the model and then exit the Fly Mode.

• Repeat the previous step using Walk Mode.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 162 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.6 Save & Restore Views

When using AVEVA™ E3D Design it is often useful to be able to save a 3D View in a session so that it can be
restored in a subsequent session.

On VIEW tab, group Control, clicking the Save & Restore

button displays the Save & Restore View form.

8.6.1 Saving Views

The Current Directory section displays the directory where the

saved views will be stored.

Clicking the Select Directory button on the right of

the form displays the Browse for Folder form were
a directory may be found by browsing.

Entering a name in the New View textbox in the Save Current

View section of the form and clicking the Save Current View
button to the right of the textbox saves the current view in the
specified location.

The saved view will be displayed in the Saved Views section of

the form and the save time and date displayed below.

The saved view name is also displayed in the View options list in
the Saved Views section.

If another view is saved with the same name a Confirm form is

displayed.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 163 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

8.6.2 Restoring Saved Views

Restoring saved views may be achieved in three ways using the following buttons:

Restore View – if there are existing elements in the current 3D View, they are removed and the
contents and view settings from the selected saved view are restored.

Add to Drawlist - The content of the selected saved view is added to the current view. The current
view settings, i.e. direction, scale, etc., are not changed.

Replace Drawlist - The content of the selected saved view replaces the content of the current view.
The current view settings, i.e. direction, scale, etc., are not changed.

8.6.3 Deleting Saved Views

Saved views may be deleted using the following buttons:

Delete Saved View – this option deletes the saved view named in the View options list. A Confirm
form is displayed:

Delete All Saved Views – this option deletes all saved views. A Confirm form is displayed:

8.7 Copy Image

On the VIEW tab, in the Control group, selecting an

option from Copy Image button options list copies an
image of the contents of the current view to the
clipboard from where it can be pasted into a document.

The options list contains different resolutions for the

image.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 164 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This page is intentionally left blank.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 165 of 197
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 9

9 Settings
This chapter describes the different settings and options that are applicable to the functions seen previously.
However, they are not essential for an overall comprehension of the application.

9.1 PROJECT Tab Options

The project options are available from the PROJECT tab :

There are three groups of settings:

• Configuration : offers general settings to configure the user interface.

• View : configure the appearance and behaviour of the 3D View.

• Discipline : offer specific settings for Integrator, Piping and Structural.

9.1.1 Configuration Options

Selecting Configuration displays the following:

Coordinates : option to set the World axes to ENU or XYZ.

Explorer Settings : displays the Explorer Settings form (see section Error! R
eference source not found.).

Forms : sets the transparency, tabs appearance and confirmation dialog.

Properties : configures the Properties form.

Units : configures the default units for the current session.

Advanced : This enables the DEVELOPER tab. This is not for general use.

Product Gateway : Allows the selection of the of the Product Gateway to be used.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 166 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.1.1.1 Coordinates
On the PROJECT tab, selecting Options > Configuration > Coordinates displays the Format section. This
determines the axis system to be used on the PowerCompass and the appearance of the forms.

9.1.1.2 Explorer Settings

On the PROJECT tab, selecting Options > Configuration > Explorer Settings displays several sections that
include a series of checkboxes to control the appearance and behaviour of the explorers.

General:

• Auto Collapse Tree – If checked,

whenever the CE changes, any
expanded node not containing the
selected CE is automatically
collapsed. This applies to all active
explorers. This option is disabled if
Expand to CE is not selected.

• Expand to CE – If checked, this option

automatically expands the explorer
when the CE changes (if not already
expanded).

• Display Folders – if checked, this

allows folders to be displayed in the
explorers.

Model Explorer:

• Hide non-user System Data– If

checked, this option hides all System
Data elements in the MDB, e.g.
Application Data World (APPLDW)
and Template World (TPWL), to which
the user does not have write access.

• Show TUBI/ROD – If checked, this

option displays all TUBI and ROD
elements in the Model Explorer.

• Show DB Worlds – if checked, this

option displays all DB World elements
in the Model Explorer.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 167 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Draw Explorer:

• Hide non-writable LIBY – if checked, this option hides LIBY data to which there is no write access to in
the Draw Explorer.

• Show Point Worlds – if checked, this option displays the point worlds in the Draw Explorer.

Catalogue Explorer:

• Show DB Worlds – if checked, this option displays all DB World elements in the Catalogue Explorer.

The Presentation section contains a list of all the explorers each with dedicated settings:

• Element Type – if checked, this option displays the element type in the corresponding explorer.

• Sort Below – this allows the corresponding explorer to be sorted by a selected element type.

TUBI and ROD elements are Piping and Cable Tray components respectively. These elements are discussed in
the appropriate discipline training guides.

9.1.1.3 Forms
On the PROJECT tab, selecting Options > Configuration > Forms displays the sections used to control the
appearance and behaviour of the form.

The Forms section allows the transparency of the floating forms to be set. Checking the Transparency
checkbox allows the level of transparency to be set. This can be achieved by:

• Using the slider

• Clicking the Up / Down arrow buttons

• Entering the value directly in the textbox.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 168 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Transparency set to 80% Transparency checkbox unchecked

The Tabs on Forms section controls the appearance of the tabs for a docked form using radio buttons.

Display text and image selected Display only image selected

The Dialogue Options section controls the behaviour of the delete functions.

• With the Display delete confirmation dialogue checkbox checked a Confirm form is displayed when
performing a deletion.

• Checking the Do not ask me again to confirm this action checkbox on the Confirm form will also
uncheck the Display delete confirmation dialogue checkbox from the Forms section of the PROJECT
tab.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 169 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.1.1.4 Properties
On the PROJECT tab, selecting Options > Configuration > Properties displays the sections used to control the
appearance and behaviour of the Modify Properties form.

The Property Modification section contains a Dynamic update checkbox. If this is checked the property is
updated every time it is changed. This is convenient for simple model elements but can result in slow
performance if a large number of rules have to be executed for each update. If it is unchecked the changes do
not take place until the Apply button is clicked on the Modify Properties form.

The Form Layout section contains the following settings:

• Maximum entry width – determines the maximum entry width for the Modify Properties form.

• Maximum form height – determines the maximum height of the Modify Properties form by the
number of visible lines before the form is presented as a scrollable list.

• Display Plot File – if this is checked a plotfile will be visible on the Modify Properties form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 170 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Graphical Dimensions section of the form contains a Display options list. This controls how the design
parameters are displayed in the 3D View. The options are:

• Description & Value

• Description Only

• Value Only

9.1.1.5 Units
Units enable the display of output values on forms and input values in forms in a unit other than the system
units. For example, AVEVA™ E3D Design works internally in millimetres, however, distance and bore input and
display units can be modified to suit the requirements of the session.

Attribute values are stored in databases in the system units and are converted on input and output to the
current session units.

On the PROJECT tab, selecting Options > Configuration > Units displays the sections used to control the unit
settings.

The Unit Selection section

contains an options list for each
unit which allows the session unit
to be set.

By default, Distance units are

metric whilst other unit types
have a mixture of metric and
imperial units relevant to
industry practice.

Bore has Millimetres and Inch

available whilst other unit types,
for example Current, Voltage
and Impedance have only one
unit available.

Imperial distance units can be

made default by including the
UNIT database in the working
MDB.

The User defaults can be saved

and loaded using the relevant
buttons provided. However, the
Project defaults can only be
loaded and as such cannot be
changed by the individual using
this method.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 171 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.1.1.6 Advanced
On the PROJECT tab, selecting Options > Configuration > Advanced displays the Advanced Settings section.

Checking the Enable developer ribbon checkbox adds the DEVELOPER tab:

This is not for general use and as a result is not covered in this training guide.

9.1.1.7 Product Gateway

On the PROJECT tab, selecting Options > Configuration > Product Gateway displays the Advanced Settings
section.

This display two radio buttons which allows the

selection of the AVEVA NET Gateway that is
being used by the customer.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 172 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.1.2 View Options

Selecting View displays the following:

Animations & Colours: sets the zoom animations speed, the colours of the
3D View items, the display of the axes and the crosshair.

Selection & Snaps: sets the appearance and behaviour of grips and snap
cursors.

Configuration: sets the mouse navigation controls sensitivity.

Picking Control: sets the picking offset when using EDG.

Elements: selection of an element filter for the picking using EDG

Ppoints: selection of filters for picking Ppoints using EDG

PowerCompass: sets the projection mode and the size of the

PowerCompass.

9.1.3 Discipline Options

Selecting Discipline displays the following:

Integrator : configuration options for Integrator.

Piping : PIPING discipline defaults.

Structural : STRUCTURES discipline defaults.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 173 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.2 View Settings

On the VIEW tab, in the Settings group, clicking Current View button
displays the View Settings form.

This form enables settings to be made for the current 3D View and is divided into several sections which are
explained in this chapter.

Title – the textbox displays the title of the current view

which defaults to 3D View. A different title may be
entered which will be displayed on the 3D View header,
for example: My View(1) – Drawlist(2).

Projection – sets the projection to Parallel or

Perspective.

Rotate – sets the rotation mode to About Model or

About Eye.

Effects – these checkboxes enables the modification of

the appearance of the graphics displayed in the 3D
View. The checkboxes in this frame are toggles.

• Unchecking the Shaded checkbox displays the

elements in wire line. This may also be achieved
by pressing the F8 key.

• Unchecking the Outlines checkbox removes

outlines around the elements in the 3D View.

• Unchecking the Shadows checkbox removes

the shadows made by the elements in the 3D
View.
Leaving the form open and making another
3D View current, updates the form to the • Checking the Outline Translucent elements
current 3D View’s settings. checkbox displays a hard outline edge around
translucent elements.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 174 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Shaded, Outlines and

Shaded unchecked Outlines unchecked Shadows unchecked
Shadows checked

Outline Translucent Outline Translucent

elements unchecked elements checked

Tools –the checkboxes in this section control availability of the PowerCompass and the World Axes.

Background – these options enable the setting of the background colour and effect of the 3D View
background.

Clicking the Colour button displays the 3D View Background

Colour form with 16 major colours.

Clicking the More… button displays a larger form with 256 colours
to choose from.

Clicking a colour on either form sets it as the 3D View background

colour.

By default, the Graduated checkbox is checked, which gives a graduated effect to the 3D View background.
Unchecking this checkbox removes the effect and makes the 3D View background a solid colour.

Graduated checked Graduated unchecked

Capping – these options enable the setting of the clipped element capping colour and toggle capping on and
off. The colour selection is the same as for the Background colour.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 175 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Lighting – these options enable the setting of the Brightness and Reflection for the 3D View graphics using a
slider and a relative number between 0 and 1 for each setting. The default settings are 0.7 and 0.8 respectively.

Brightness 0 Brightness 1

Reflection 0 Reflection 1

Clicking the Save button will store the current View Settings to be
re-applied on the main 3D View for the next Model module
sessions.

Clicking the Reset button will restore the default settings for the current 3D View.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 176 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.3 Drawlist Settings

The Drawlist form has many functions to control the 3D View. The three main sections of the form are
described below.

On the VIEW tab, in the Content group, click the Draw List button to display the
Drawlist form.

9.3.1 Tabs

The form consists of three tabs, each of which has a grid:

• Drawlist - displays all the elements currently in the

Drawlist.

• Graphical Selection - displays all elements in the

current graphical selection.

• Primitives - displays the primitives of an element

selected on the Drawlist tab. The tab name changes to
Primitives of /<nnnn>, where <nnnn> is the name of
the element selected on the Drawlist tab. If more than
one element is selected in the Drawlist tab, the first
primitives of the first element selected will appear in
the Primitives tab. The tab name is updated
accordingly.

The grid in each tab has the same functionality. Each grid has
two columns showing the element Name, either an explicit
name or the system generated name, and the element Type.

The grids may be grouped, sorted and filtered as needed.

The right click menu from the grids have the following options:

Multiple selections can be made from the grid.

• Navigate To – this option navigates to the selected element in the Model Explorer, making it the CE.
If more than one element is selected this function navigates to the first one that was selected.

• Hide in 3D View – this option hides the selected element(s) in the 3D View. The elements are not
removed from the Drawlist, only removed from the 3D View graphics. This results in the Show
checkbox in the Display Settings section of the form being unchecked.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 177 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

• Show in 3D View – this option shows the selected elements(s) in the 3D View if they have been hidden.
This results in the Show checkbox in the Display Settings section of the form being checked.

• Remove from 3D View – this option removes the selected element(s) from the Drawlist and 3D View.

• Add to Collections – this option adds the selected element(s) to the current collection.

• Export to Excel… – this option displays the Save Drawlist As form, allowing the grid contents to be
saved to a .xls file.

• Print Preview… - this option displays the Print Preview form and displays a print preview of the grid.
The grid contents may be printed from the form.

9.3.2 Display Settings

The Display Settings section of the Drawlist form allows

single elements or multiple elements selected in the tab grids
to have their visual properties in the 3D View modified.

When the display settings of a top level element in the Drawlist are modified, all lower level elements
owned by the element are also modified. However, individual primitives may have their display settings
changed from their owner’s colour by making a selection from the Primitives of /<nnnn> tab.

The Show checkbox enables an entry in the Drawlist to be displayed or hidden in a 3D View’s graphics. If
unchecked, the Show checkbox hides the selected element(s) in the 3D View. Checking the checkbox displays
the element in the 3D View, if previously hidden.

The Colour button shows the colour of the selected element(s) and displays its colour name. If more than one
element is selected the colour of the first element selected is shown, although the operation will change the
colour of all selected elements.

Clicking the Colour button displays the Colour form which shows
the standard 16 AVEVA™ E3D Design colours. Any colour may be
selected from the palette by clicking the required colour button

Clicking the More… button expands the Colour form to show 256
available colours.

When a colour is selected the Colour button on the Drawlist form is updated. The selected elements in the 3D
View will be displayed in the selected colour.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 178 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Edges checkbox toggles the

highlighting of the element’s edges in
the 3D View.

This setting is often used with semi-

translucent elements to ensure a
clearer view of the element(s).

The Translucency slider allows the

translucency of elements to be modified.
Setting the translucency of displayed
elements allows other elements that are
obscured in the 3D View to be seen
through the semi- translucent element.

The number next to the slider label shows

the percentage of translucency for the
selected element(s), i.e. 0% is a solid
colour and 100% is completely
transparent.

The percentage may be set by dragging

the slider or by clicking the left or right
arrow buttons at each end of the slider
until the desired number is reached.

If more than one element is selected the

translucency of the first element selected
is shown, although the operation will
change the translucency of all selected
elements.

9.3.3 Options

The Options section of the Drawlist form contains three link

labels that have the following functions:

• Select CE in List – clicking this link label selects the CE, as shown in Model Explorer, in the selected tab
grid and highlights the entry. If the CE is not in the selected tab a Warning form is displayed.

• Add CE to Drawlist – clicking this link label adds the CE, as shown in Model Explorer, to the Drawlist.
This may be a significant element, a component or a primitive.

• Remove Selection – clicking this link label removes the selected elements(s) from the Drawlist. The
other tabs are updated automatically. This button is only enabled when one or more elements in any
of the tab grids has been selected.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 179 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.4 Graphics Settings

On the VIEW tab, in the Settings group, clicking the Graphics button
displays the Graphics Settings form.

The form contains five tabs from which the majority of graphics settings can be made. Each tab is described in
the following sections.

9.4.1 Colour Tab

The General Colours section allows the setting of colours

used for specific purposes in 3D Views to be set.

Clicking the button adjacent to the purpose label displays

a colour form with buttons for 16 colours. As described
previously, clicking the More… button on the colour form
shows buttons for 256 colours button.

Selecting a colour button changes the button colour on

the tab accordingly.

Each colour form has a title describing the purpose it is

setting.

The purpose of each button is as follows:

• CE – sets the colour of the Current Element in a 3D View. This colour overrides any other colour that
may be set for the element.

• Active – sets the colour of elements associated with the CE, e.g. if an Equipment primitive is the CE
then all other primitives owned by that Equipment will be displayed in the active colour.

• Visible – sets the colour of all other elements in the 3D View other than the CE and those elements
with the active colour. This setting is only applied if Auto Colour rules are inactive.

• Aids – sets the colour of the graphical aids used in AVEVA™ E3D Design.

• Highlight – sets the highlight feedback colour, e.g. for highlighting elements to be deleted.

• Tracing – sets the colour for pipes with a tracing specification.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 180 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Auto Colours Settings section contains functions to control and define the auto colouring of elements in
a 3D View.

Auto Colours are a set of rules that define the colour and other representation parameters for elements, e.g.
pipe systems may be displayed in different colours according to the fluid code or Equipment in different plant
areas be displayed in different colours.

Auto Colours are toggled on and off using the Auto Colour checkbox on the tab. The Dynamic Auto Colour
checkbox controls the re-evaluation of an elements colour if the attribute that the colour is dependent on is
modified. If enabled the colour will be changed dynamically if the attribute is changed and if disabled the
colour will change when the element is next added to a Drawlist. Both of these settings are checked by default.
Checking the Auto Colour Components checkbox enables the auto colour rules defined for component types
e.g. Valves. If a colour rule is set for valves and the Auto Colour Components checkbox is not checked, the rule
for Pipes will be applied on the valve components.

The Auto Colour Rules… link label displays the Auto Colour Rules form, from which Auto Colour rules may be
created, deleted and modified.

9.4.2 Representation Tab

The representation of elements in a 3D View is

controlled from the Representation tab.

The Representation Settings section contains the

following controls:

The Tube and Centreline checkboxes control the

representation of pipework in the 3D View.

If the Tube checkbox is enabled, pipework will be

displayed as solid elements.

If the Tube checkbox is disabled and the Centreline

checkbox enabled, the pipework is displayed as
centrelines, with components shown as a symbolic
representation defined in the catalogue.

If both Tube and Centreline checkboxes are enabled

both representations are displayed which can give an
undesirable outcome.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 181 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Tube enabled Centreline enabled

The Holes Drawn checkbox controls how negative elements are displayed in the 3D Views. AVEVA™ E3D
Design does not fundamentally change the solid primitives from which items are created but modifies them
with negative primitives that cut the solid primitives.

If the Holes Drawn checkbox is unchecked, any negative elements are displayed as black lines in a shaded
view. If the Holes Drawn checkbox is checked, the negative primitives cut the primitives to show the holes.
This does not apply to holes in pipe flanges.

Holes Drawn disabled Holes Drawn enabled

The Flange Bolt Holes Drawn checkbox controls whether holes in piping flanges are displayed, providing they
have been set-up in the catalogue. This function works in the same was as Holes Drawn but is independent
from it.

Flange Bolt Holes Drawn disabled Flange Bolt Holes Drawn enabled

The Tracing checkbox controls the displayed colour of pipe elements that have a tracing specification applied.
If the Tracing checkbox is checked, the pipe elements with a tracing specification in the 3D View will be
displayed in the Tracing highlight colour specified on the Colour tab of the form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 182 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Anti-Alias checkbox and the Level of Anti-Alias options list controls the ‘feathering’ of diagonal lines in
the 3D View. If the Anti-Alias checkbox is unchecked, diagonal lines will appear jagged. However, if the Anti-
Alias checkbox is checked, diagonal lines will appear smoother.

The Level of Anti-Alias options list has three levels of anti-aliasing that can be used, 2, 4 or 8. The higher the
number the smoother the diagonal lines will be. However, this does have an overhead on the amount of
processing the graphics card has to perform.

The Insulation Visibility/Translucency options list controls the display

of insulation on pipes that have an insulation specification.

The default setting is Off, i.e. insulation is not shown. The insulation
may be shown as Solid, in which case the Pipe cannot be seen through
the insulation. However, the options list also has entries for showing
the insulation at different levels of translucency, i.e. the pipe can be
seen through the insulation, from 12% through to 87%. The higher the
percentage the more translucent the insulation becomes.

Insulation Visibility/Translucency Off Insulation Visibility/Translucency 50%

The Obstruction Visibility/Translucency options list controls the

display of obstruction volumes where they have been defined.

The default setting is Off, i.e. obstruction volumes are not shown.
Obstruction volumes may be shown as Solid, in which case the element
that owns the obstruction volume cannot be seen through it. However,
the options list also has entries for showing the obstruction volumes at
different levels of translucency, i.e. the element can be seen through
the obstruction volume, from 12% through to 87%. The higher the
percentage the more translucent the obstruction volume becomes.

Obstruction Visibility/Translucency Off Obstruction Visibility/Translucency 50%

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 183 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

The Representation Rules… link label enables representation rules to be written and set. This functionality is
outside the scope of this training guide.

Refer to TM-1802 AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1) Model Utilities for details of Representation Rules in Model.

The Level section on the tab shows the current display level for various element types in the model. The display
level may be set by entering a valid display level number in the appropriate textbox.

The AVEVA™ E3D Design default display level is 6.

The Arc Tolerance value controls the representation of certain curves as polygon segments or faceting planes.
The smaller the arc tolerance, the smoother the curve drawn. However, on very large models this may be an
overhead on graphical performance.

Arc Tolerance 1mm Arc Tolerance 10mm

The value may be set by entering a number in the Arc Tolerance textbox. The default setting is 1mm

The Mass Arc Tolerance value controls the accuracy of the calculation of the weight and CoG for elements
that do not have a user defined weight.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 184 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.4.3 Steelwork Tab

The Steelwork tab controls the display of structural

profiles and associated elements.

The Steelwork Settings frame contains the Profile and

Insulation checkboxes which enable and disable the
display of profiles and insulation, if any has been defined
in the catalogue.

The Profile Obstruction Visibility/Translucency options

list works as previously described for the Representation
tab.

The Primary Nodes and Secondary Nodes sections

control the display, size and colour of Primary and
Secondary Nodes for structural profiles.

The Display checkboxes toggle the display of the nodes,

the Size textboxes sets the size of the nodes and the
Colour buttons enable the colour of the displayed nodes
to be set.

Refer to TM-1812 AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)

Structural Modelling for details of Primary and
Secondary Nodes.

9.4.4 Cabling Tab

The Cabling tab controls the display of cableway

volumes, centreline representation, head/tail/route
attachments and cable nodes.

The Display checkboxes toggle the display of the

attachments and nodes, the Size textboxes set the size
of the attachments and nodes and the Colour buttons
enable the colour of the displayed attachments and
nodes to be set.

Refer to TM-1815 AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)

Cableway and Cable Modelling training guide for
details of Cabling attachment points and route
nodes.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 185 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.4.5 Plines and Ppoints Tab

The Plines & Ppoints tab controls the display of

Plines on structural profiles and Ppoints on
primitives and Piping, HVAC and Cable Tray
components.

The Display checkboxes toggle the display of the

Plines and Ppoints and the Pkey and Numbers
checkboxes control the display of the Pline name or
Ppoint number respectively.

The Length textbox value determines the length of

the displayed Plines or Ppoints.

Refer to TM-1812 AVEVA™ E3D Design

Structural Modelling training guide for details
of Plines and TM-1811 AVEVA™ E3D Design
Equipment Modelling training guide for
details of Ppoints on primitives.

The Graphics Settings form has buttons along the bottom of the form that are applicable to all tabs. The
buttons have the following functions:

The Load button loads the Graphics Settings form values from a previously saved file.

The Save button saves the current Graphics Settings form values to a file.

The Apply button applies the changes.

The Cancel button cancels any changes made and dismisses the form.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 186 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

9.5 Attributes Form Settings

The right click menu from a column heading of the Attributes form will display the following options and
settings:

WRT Element : changes the element which the positions and

orientations are expressed with respect to

Display P-Points : if the element has P-Points they will be displayed in

the grids along with their own attributes.

Track CE : enables the automatic update of the Attributes form for the
CE.

Categorised/Alphabetical : regroups the attributes by category or by

alphabetical order.

Expand Nodes : expands all the attributes categories.

Collapse Nodes : collapses all the attributes categories.

Modify Category Filters : displays a selection of attribute categories to

filter.

Manage Category Filters : displays a list of element types having

filtered attributes categories.

Display Standard Attributes : displays the most common attributes.

Display UDAs : displays the User Defined Attributes.

Display Pseudo Attributes : displays attributes that are read-only

results of system processed functions depending on other attributes.

Columns : allows the display of the Description and Data Type columns.

Settings : allows the suppression of “Unset” or “Nulref” values.

Export to Excel : exports the attributes grid to an excel file.

Print Preview : displays the Print Preview form.

Also, clicking on any row of the attributes grid will display additional options :

Navigate To : if the attribute value is a reference to another element,

this option will navigate to this referenced element.

Set Attribute Value to CE : if the attribute type is a reference this option

will set its value with a reference to the CE if the type is compatible.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 187 of 197
All rights reserved.
 Appendix A

- AVEVA™ E3D Design Modules

AVEVA™ E3D Design is divided into modules to perform the various functions to produce a 3D Plant design
model. The modules and their function are described below.

Model
Model is the graphically driven data input module for the 3D model in AVEVA™ E3D Design. In this module
the plant model is built and the data stored in one or more databases. The databases contain a three-
dimensional description of all items in the plant. Component selection is provided through specifications that
dictate which catalogue components can be used.

The main features are:

• Creation of new model elements.

• Modification of existing model elements.

• Graphical manipulation of modelled elements.

• Creation of reports, e.g. MTO, weight, Centre of Gravity, model status, etc.

• Clash detection to find interferences between model elements.

The module has a number of disciplines to assist designers in building models efficiently. These disciplines are:

• GENERAL

• EQUIPMENT

• PIPING

• HVAC

• CABLING SYSTEM

• CABLE TRAY

• STRUCTURES

• SUPPORTS

• MINING

• TERRAIN

• DESIGN TEMPLATES.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 188 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Draw
The Draw module is used to create annotated and dimensioned arrangement and detail drawings from the 3D
model and also has extensive 2D drawing capabilities.

Annotation can be in the form of labels attached to model elements or 2D annotation such as drawing notes,
drawing frames, tables, etc. Annotation attached to a model element on the drawing will move if the 3D
position of the element changes.

Dimensions are projected distances between points in the 3D model and may be attached to model elements.
Dimensions attached to model elements are calculated automatically and are re-calculated when the drawing
is updated, thus reflecting the current model data.

The 3D model can be interrogated through the Draw module. However, the model cannot be changed.

Example Draw Output

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 189 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Isodraft
The Isodraft module produces dimensioned symbolic piping and HVAC isometrics for construction and
erection purposes in various formats.

Isodraft functionality includes:

• Full material lists.

• Automatic spool identification.

• Automatic splitting of complex drawings.

• User-defined drawing sheets.

Example Isodraft Output

Spool
The Spool module is used for pipework spooling. It enables the designer to split the pipework design into
logical sections (spools) ready for fabrication. The spool data can be output as isometric drawings using
Isodraft.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 190 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

This page is intentionally left blank.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 191 of 197
All rights reserved.
 Appendix B

- AVEVA™ E3D Design Database Elements

The main element types in an AVEVA™ E3D Design Model database are described below. Most element types
are abbreviated, usually to the first four letters of the full name, when they are displayed in the user interface.
These abbreviations are shown in parentheses.

World (WORL)
When the database is first built, it is usually empty except for a single element named the WORLD. Each
database has its own WORLD element as the first element in the hierarchy. The World cannot be deleted or
re-named.

Site (SITE)
Below the WORLD, the second level of the hierarchy is SITE. A SITE may be considered as a significant collection
of plant, whose size is not necessarily determined by physical area, but by practical considerations. It may, for
example be the whole project, or one part of a large project. There can be as many SITEs within an AVEVA™
E3D Design project as required for data organisation.

Zone (ZONE)
The next level below a SITE is a ZONE. As with a SITE, a ZONE is not necessarily used to define a physical area,
it is more likely to store similar types of items for easy reference, such as a piping system in one ZONE, related
Equipment in another, and so on. There can be as many ZONEs owned by a SITE as required for data
organisation.

SITEs and ZONE elements are common to all disciplines. Below ZONE level the hierarchy is discipline
dependent, i.e. the elements depend on which discipline the user is modelling.

Equipment (EQUI)
Equipment items are built up in AVEVA™ E3D Design using elements known as primitives. Each piece of
Equipment can comprise any number of primitive shapes positioned in space to represent the Equipment item.
The primitives may be owned directly by the EQUI element or by a Sub-Equipment element.

Sub-Equipment (SUBE)
A SUBE is an optional element to sub-divide an EQUI. The SUBE can own primitive elements.

Primitives
Primitives are the basic building blocks of AVEVA™ E3D Design. They are used by other disciplines to create
catalogue components. There are many types of primitives; each with its own features which when combined
with other primitives can represent complex shapes.

Examples of primitives are nozzle (NOZZ), box (BOX), cylinder (CYLI), pyramid (PYRA), cone (CONE) and dish
(DISH).

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 192 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Volume Model (VOLM)

A VOLM is a simplified version of an EQUI element. This allows volumes to be modelled without them being
called Equipment items. A VOLM may directly own any primitive except a NOZZ.

Sub-Volume Model (SVOLM)

A SVOLM is an optional element, similar to a SUBE, to sub-divide a VOLM. A SVOLM may own any primitive
except a NOZZ.

Structure (STRU)
STRU elements are administrative elements, i.e. they exist to own FRAMEWORK elements, and allow the plant
structures to be sub-divided for ease of modelling and reporting.

Framework (FRMW)
FRMW elements are used to store structural components in the model. A complex structure can be divided
into logical frameworks. Dividing the Structure in this way allows structural modelling, and also reporting, to
be done more efficiently, for example by copying a complete FRMW.

Sub-Framework (SBFR)
A SBFR is an optional element that can own structural components. They are used to further sub-divide
complex projects or for modelling sub-assemblies within a framework.

Structural Components
Linear structural profiles are represented in AVEVA™ E3D Design by Section (SCTN) elements, for straight
profiles, and Generic Section (GENSEC) elements for curved profiles. Profile sizes are selected using a section
specification that references standard catalogue data for section sizes complying with various national
standards or company standards. Flat planar items, such as plates and grating, are represented by Panel
(PANE) elements.

Pipe (PIPE)
Pipes may be considered to be like lines on a flow sheet. They may run between several end connection points
and are usually grouped by a common specification and process.

Branch (BRAN)
Branch elements are sections of a Pipe, which have known start and finish points. In AVEVA™ E3D Design the
start and finish points are called the Head and Tail. Heads and tails may be connected to Nozzles, Tees or other
Heads and Tails, depending on the configuration of the pipe, or left open ended.

Piping Components
A Branch may own a wide variety of components such as Gaskets (GASK), Flanges (FLAN), Elbow (ELBO), Tees
(TEE), Valves (VALV), etc., which are all elements. These form the shape and geometry of the Branch and
ultimately the Pipe itself. Piping components are selected using Piping Specifications that reference standard
catalogue data. For example, each time a 100mm bore elbow is needed, AVEVA™ E3D Design always accesses
the data for it from the component catalogue. The data for these elements remains constant no matter how
many 100mm bore elbows are used in the design.

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 193 of 197
All rights reserved.
 Appendix C

- Hot Keys and In-canvas Commands

Function Keys
F1 Aveva Help
F2 Clear 3D View
F3 Object Snap On/Off
F4 Object Snap Projection On/Off
F5 Toggle Walk Mode On/Off
F6 Toggle Fly Mode On/Off
F7 Grid On/Off
F8 Orthogonal drawing On/Off
F9 Grid Snap On/Off
F10 Polar Tracking On/Off
F11 Toggle Shaded/Wireline mode
F12 Dynamic hints On/Off

General Keys
Delete Deletes selected elements in 3D View with confirmation
Tab Navigates to Contextual Editor input boxes
Space Locks value in the in Contextual Editor input boxes
Home or Page Up Navigates to WORL* level in any Explorer
End or Page Down Navigates to Bottom Level in any Explorer
Exits current CIE Operation / cancels position input/ removes selection/exits edit
Esc mode
Arrow UP Shows In-3D View command of last used CIE Operation
Arrow Down Shows available Tile Icons during CIE Operation
Insert Toggle Feature Highlight function On/Off
Backspace Removes selection from 3D View
Enter confirms position, selects default option, executes command, etc.

In-canvas Command Description

AIDARC Invokes function to create AID type Arc
Invokes function to create an AIDLIN bisecting between two non-parallel
AIDBIS AIDLINs
AIDCIR Invokes function to create AID type Circle
AIDFIL Invokes function to create filleting AIDARC connecting two non-parallel AIDLINs
AIDLIN or L Invokes function to create AID type Line
AIDPOI Invokes function to create AID type Point

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 194 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

Invokes function to create an AIDLIN tangential to two circles which are non
AIDTAN concentric
AIDTEXT Invokes function to create AID type Text
ANGLE To calculate angle between any two entities
BRACING To specify bracing gaps for existing diagonal elements or members
Enables to lock view wrt an object. Also disables 3D orbit mode when it is
CAMERA enabled
CANCEL Cancels any current operation in-progress
Invokes function to copy selected entities with respect to a base point selected
CO or COPY and also paste them at required locations in a loop
COPYBASE Invokes function to copy selected entities with respect to a base point selected
COPYCLIP Invokes function to copy selected entities without any base point
CONNECT Enables function to connect any two GENSECs
Invokes function to CUT/PASTE selected entities with respect to a base point
CUTBASE selected
CUTCLIP Invokes function to CUT/PASTE selected entities
D or LINDIM Invokes function to create db type Linear Dimension
DELETE To delete selected entities
DISCONNECT Enables function to disconnect any two connected GENSECs
DIST or DI To calculate distance between any two entities
EM or EDITMODE Triggers Edit Mode
Create a ENDATU Fixing at selected End of GENSEC. Specs can be set only for old
ENDATUM BS Column and Beam type profiles
Enables function to extend the end of a structural element to a reference
EXTEND element.
FILLET To create a Fillet between two non-connected structural elements
FLY Enable FLY mode operation
FORCETRIM To trim an attached GENSEC to selective Pline of Owning GENSEC
Enables option to enter new Vertical field-of-view angle(Projection mode should
FOVY be in Perspective to enable this option)
GENSECDEF Triggers function to set default specification wrt existing GENSEC
GFITT_CRE Enable function to create a GENSEC Fitting
GFITT_MOD Enable function to modify a GENSEC Fitting
GRIDCY Invokes function to create a new GRID CYLINCER for Radial Grid only in In-Mode
GRIDID Resets IDs of REFGRDs
Invokes function to create a new GRID PLANE for REFGRD in IN-Mode(Currently
GRIDPL works for a single REFGRD)
ID Queries Coordinate Positions at snapped position
IN Triggers IN or Include mode
JMOD Enables user to modify joints on a SECTION
LCS Invokes operation to change Coordinate system between Local and World
LINDIMA Invokes function to create db type Aligned Dimensions
Enables 3D Orbit mode option to look around a locked view in Perspective
LOOKROUND ProjMode
Invokes function to move entities with respect to a base point selected and also
M or MOVE paste them at required locations in a loop
MERGE To merge two members of same element type

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 195 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

MI or MIRROR To mirror any selected Structural Elements by defining a Mirror Plane

MITRE Enables option to Mitre two ends of GENSECs
MLABEL Invokes a function that creates a Label in the 3D View
MREDO Enables user to REDO all previous actions or to desired no.of actions
NEXT To go Forwards through Views
OUT Trigger OUT mode by exiting IN mode
OUTALL takes user all the way out
OSNAPD Triggers Distance Snap Mode function
P or PAN Enables REALTIME PAN option
PANARC Enables function to Create a ARC PANEL using three point or two point methods
PANCIRC Enables function to Create a CIRCULAR PANEL with multiple options
PANDIR Pans View towards selected PLAN VIEW directions
PANDISC Enables function to Create a DISC PANEL using Centre+ or two point methods
PANELNXTRDISC Creates a Negative extrusion of a PANEL in Circular Shape in 3 different Modes
Creates a Negative extrusion of a PANEL in Rectangular Shape using Multiple
PANELNXTRMULT Points
PANELNXTRRECT Creates a Negative extrusion of a PANEL in Rectangular Shape using Two Points
PANMULT Enables function to Create a RECTANGULAR PANEL with multiple points
PANOFFSET Enables function to Create a an Offset Perimeter of PANEL with multiple points
PANRECT Enables function to Create a RECTANGULAR PANEL using two points
Enables function to Create a RING PANEL using three point to two point
PANRING methods
PASTECLIP To paste any copied or cut elements that are available in current session
PFITT_CRE Enable function to create a PANEL Fitting
PFITT_MOD Enable function to modify a PANEL Fitting
PL or PLINE Enables function to create a Polyline
PLAN Set the current View to Plan View mode
PR or PROPERTIES Open Property Window if not opened already in the application
PREV To go Back through Views
PROJMODE Toggles between Projection modes Orthogonal or Perspective
RADIAL Enables option to create a Radial Grid
REDO Redo any operation that was previously called back(Performed Undo)
REFGRD Enables option to create a Reference Grid
RO or ROTATE Invokes function to rotate any object around any defined axis
SCALE To Scale a Structural Element by selecting a Base Point
Creates a ARC GENSEC and also gives multiple options to choose the way they
SECARC are created
Creates a Curved GENSEC and also gives multiple options to choose the way
SECCUR they are created
Creates a RING GENSEC and also gives multiple options to choose the way they
SECRING are created
Creates a Straight GENSEC and gives multiple options to choose the way they
SECTION are created
SELALL To select all the elements in 3D View
SPLICE To Splice any Structural Element(s) in multiple ways
SPLIT To split any Structural Element(s) in multiple ways

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 196 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1801

STRETCH To Stretch any Structural Element along a defined path

TOWER Enables option to create a Rectangular Tower Grid
TOWERT Enables option to create a Triangular Tower Grid
U To Undo any current operation
UNDO Enables user to UNDO all operation or to desired number counts
WALK Enables user to WALK around a Model
Z or ZOOM Enables Zoom options
-VIEW or -V To change any View between Isometric or Orthographic or Plan View
-PAN or -P PANs view wrt base point selection

Copyright © 2021.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 197 of 197
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
Structural Modelling Training Guide
TM-1812
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

This page is intentionally left blank.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 2 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Revision Log
DATE REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION AUTHOR REVIEWED APPROVED

26/02/2021 3.1 Issued for Review NG

22/03/2021 3.2 Reviewed NG SK

Issued for Training AVEVATM E3D

23/03/2021 4.0 NG SK ST
Design 2.1.0.29

Updates
Change highlighting will be employed for all revisions. Where new or changed, information is presented
section headings will be highlighted in Yellow.

Suggestion / Problems
If you have a suggestion about this manual or the system to which it refers please report it to AVEVA Training
& Product Support at [email protected]

This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access or which may not
be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your licence
conditions.

Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free
from viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar
losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data
or information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or
expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from
the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such
losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 3 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with
the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year
in which the user's claim is brought.

1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software
licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take
precedence.

Copyright Notice
All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this Training Guide and the associated
documentation belongs to or is licensed to AVEVA Solutions Limited or its affiliates.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliates companies. The information contained in
this Training Guide and associated documentation is commercially sensitive, and shall not be adapted, copied,
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or medium by any means (including
photocopying or electronic means) without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where
such permission is granted, AVEVA Solutions Limited expressly requires that the Disclaimer included in this
Training Guide and this Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.

Licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency or any other reproduction rights organisation do not apply.
If any unauthorised acts are carried out in relation to this copyright work, a civil claim for damages may be
made and or criminal prosecution may result.

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliate companies shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third
party's intellectual property rights arising from the use of this Training Guide and associated documentation.

Incorporates Qt Commercial, © 2011 Nokia Corporation or its subsidiaries.

@AVEVA Solutions Limited 2015

Trademark Notice
AVEVA™, AVEVA Bocad™, [AVEVA Tags], Tribon and all AVEVA product and service names are trademarks of
AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries.

Use of these trademarks, product and service names belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is strictly
forbidden, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Group plc or AVEVA Solutions Limited. Any
unauthorised use may result in a legal claim being made against you.

All other trademarks belong to their respective owners and cannot be used without the permission of the
owner.

Copyright © 2020. Page 4 of 208

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Table of Contents
1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Aim ................................................................................................................................................................ 9

1.2 Objectives ..................................................................................................................................................... 9

1.3 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 9

1.4 Course Structure............................................................................................................................................ 9

1.5 Using this Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 9

1.6 Setting Up the Training Course .....................................................................................................................11

2 Overview of the STRUCTURES Application........................................................................................ 13

2.1 How E3D Design Stores Structural Modelling Data .......................................................................................13

2.2 Considerations for the Hierarchy of Structural Models .................................................................................13

2.3 The STRUCTURES Discipline User Interface ...................................................................................................14

3 Linear Elements............................................................................................................................... 15
3.1 Representation of Structural Profiles ...........................................................................................................15

3.1.1 Profile Justification ...................................................................................................................................... 17

3.1.2 Section Connectivity ................................................................................................................................... 17

3.2 Worked Example - Creating the Portal Frames .............................................................................................19

Exercise 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 30
3.2.1 Worked Example - Creating the Portal Frames (continued) ....................................................................... 31

3.3 Worked Example - Creating the Bracing .......................................................................................................32

Exercise 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 39
3.4 Worked Example - Creating the Purlins ........................................................................................................40

Exercise 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 44
3.5 Worked Example – Creating the Cladding Rails ............................................................................................45

Exercise 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 55
3.6 Worked Example - Creating the Runway Beam and Supports .......................................................................56

Exercise 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 64

4 Section Fittings and Joints ............................................................................................................... 65

4.1 Representation of Section Fittings ................................................................................................................65

4.2 Worked Example – Section Fittings ..............................................................................................................66

Exercise 6 .............................................................................................................................................. 70

Copyright © 2020.
Page 5 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.3 Representation of Joints ...............................................................................................................................71

4.4 Worked Example – Joints .............................................................................................................................72

Exercise 7 .............................................................................................................................................. 77
4.5 Automatic Joint Selection .............................................................................................................................78

4.5.1 Worked Example - Automatic Joint Selection on Existing Members .......................................................... 81

4.5.2 Worked Example - Automatic Joint Selection when Creating New Members ............................................ 84

4.6 Merged Joints ...............................................................................................................................................89

4.6.1 Worked Example – Creating Merged Joints ................................................................................................ 90

4.6.2 Worked Example - Modifying Merged Joints .............................................................................................. 98

4.6.3 Worked Example - Deleting a Merged Joint ............................................................................................. 100

5 Planar Elements ............................................................................................................................ 101

5.1 Representation of Structural Panels (Plates) ..............................................................................................101

5.2 Worked Example – Creating the Roofing Plates and Cladding ....................................................................102

Exercise 8 ............................................................................................................................................ 107

5.2.1 Worked Example – Creating the Roofing Plates and Cladding (continued) .............................................. 108

Exercise 9 ............................................................................................................................................ 115

5.3 Bounded Plates ..........................................................................................................................................116

5.3.1 Worked Example – Creating Bounded Plates ........................................................................................... 117

5.3.2 Worked Example – Bounded Plate Connectivity Checker ........................................................................ 124

5.3.3 Worked Example – Splitting Bounded Plates ............................................................................................ 127

5.3.4 Worked Example – Splitting Bounding Elements ...................................................................................... 133

6 Hole Management......................................................................................................................... 141

6.1 Worked Example – Managed Penetration Holes ........................................................................................142

Exercise 10........................................................................................................................................... 149

6.2 Worked Example – Non-penetration Managed Holes .................................................................................150

A Additional Information .................................................................................................................. 155

A1 Projected Start/End Snap ...........................................................................................................................155

A2 Pline Filtering .............................................................................................................................................156

A3 Joint Dominance (Jfree attribute) ...............................................................................................................157

A4 Linear Element Creation Methods ..............................................................................................................159

A5 Modifying Linear Elements .........................................................................................................................160

A6 Planar Element Creation Methods ..............................................................................................................162

Copyright © 2020. Page 6 of 208

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

A7 Panel Specifications ....................................................................................................................................163

A8 Modifying Planar Elements.........................................................................................................................164

A9 Panel Fittings ..............................................................................................................................................169

A10 Hole Management Workflows ....................................................................................................................171

B Profile Generic Types (Gtype) ........................................................................................................ 173

B1 Standard Gtypes .........................................................................................................................................173

B2 Parameters and Dkey attributes for Standard Gtypes ................................................................................174

B3 Plines for Standard Gtypes .........................................................................................................................175

Gtype PFI - Parallel Flange I ..................................................................................................................................... 179

Gtype PFC – Parallel Flange Channel ........................................................................................................................ 179

Gtype PFT – Parallel Flange Tee ................................................................................................................................ 180

Gtype TFI – Tapered Flange I ................................................................................................................................... 181

Gtype TFC – Tapered Flange Channel ....................................................................................................................... 181

Gtype TFT – Tapered Flange Tee............................................................................................................................... 182

Gtype TWT – Tapered Web Tee ................................................................................................................................ 182

Gtype TFTW – Tapered Flange Tapered Web Tee .................................................................................................... 183

Gtype ANGL – Equal and Unequal Angles ................................................................................................................. 183

Gtype RTUB – Rectangular and Square Tube ............................................................................................................ 184

Gtype CTUB – Circular Tube ...................................................................................................................................... 184

Gtype ZED – Rolled Z ................................................................................................................................................. 185

Gtype CEE – Bent Plate C .......................................................................................................................................... 185

Gtype BFLA – Bulb Flat .............................................................................................................................................. 186

Gtype PLTG – Plate Girder ........................................................................................................................................ 186

Gtype BOXG – Box Girder ......................................................................................................................................... 187

Gtype FBAR – Flat Bar or Square Bar ........................................................................................................................ 188

Gtype RBAR – Round Bar .......................................................................................................................................... 189

Gtype HBAR – Hexagonal Bar ................................................................................................................................... 189

Gtype ANGD – Double Angles ................................................................................................................................... 190

Drawing Levels and Obstruction Values for Standard Gtypes .................................................................................. 193

B4 Design Parameter Gtypes ...........................................................................................................................195

Gtype DPFI ................................................................................................................................................................ 196

Gtype DPFC ............................................................................................................................................................... 197

Gtype DPFT ............................................................................................................................................................... 198

Copyright © 2020.
Page 7 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DANG .............................................................................................................................................................. 199

Gtype DRTU .............................................................................................................................................................. 200

Gtype DCTU............................................................................................................................................................... 201

Gtype DZED ............................................................................................................................................................... 202

Gtype DCEE ............................................................................................................................................................... 203

Gtype DPLG ............................................................................................................................................................... 204

Gtype DBXG .............................................................................................................................................................. 205

Gtype DFBA ............................................................................................................................................................... 206

Gtype DRBA............................................................................................................................................................... 206

Gtype DHBA .............................................................................................................................................................. 207

Gtype DCON .............................................................................................................................................................. 207

Gtype DTWI ............................................................................................................................................................... 208

Copyright © 2020. Page 8 of 208

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 1

1 Introduction
AVEVA™ E3D Design allows designers to utilise an array of applications contained within the program
modules. This training guide provides discipline specific training for the Structural Modelling application in the
Model module.

1.1 Aim
The aim of this training guide is to provide designers with the knowledge and skills necessary to create and
modify structural models.

1.2 Objectives
• Introduce E3D Design concepts specific to Structural Modelling.

• Explain how to create structural linear and planar elements.

• Explain how to modify structural linear and planar elements.

• Explain how to apply section fittings, section joints and panel fittings.

• Outline the use of Design Aids.

• Explain how to assign materials to structural elements.

• Explain how holes and penetrations effecting structural elements are managed in E3D Design.

1.3 Prerequisites
It is expected that trainees have completed the TM–1801 AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1) Foundations training
course.

1.4 Course Structure

Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations, worked examples and set exercises. Each
workstation will have a training project populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees to
practice their methods and complete the set exercises.

1.5 Using this Guide

Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document, here is a summary: -

• Menu pull-downs and button click actions are indicated by bold blue text

• Information that needs to be entered into the software will be in bold red text

Copyright © 2020.
Page 9 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

• System prompts, example files or inputs will be bold italic black text

• Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font, colours and styles used as before.

• Products, Applications, Modules, Toolbars, Explorers and other significant software elements will be
in bold black text

• Other areas in this Training Guide will be presented with italic blue text and an accompanying icon to
classify the type of additional information.

Additional information

Refer to other documentation

The following icons will be used to identify industry or discipline specific content

Plant - Content specific to the Plant industry Marine - Content specific to the Marine industry

Electrical – Content specific to Electrical Engineering – Content specific to Engineering

Instrumentation – Content specific to

Instrumentation

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 10 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

1.6 Setting Up the Training Course

Login to E3D Design using the details provided by the Trainer. They will typically be as shown below:

Project: Training

User: A.STEELMAN

Password: A

MDB: A-STRUCTURAL

After entering the login details click

the Model tile.

In order to complete the worked

examples and exercises in the
training guide it is necessary to
configure the Training model.

On the TOOLS tab, in the Training group, click the Setup button to display the Training Setup form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 11 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

On the Structures tab select the Structures radio button.

Check the Setup Training Course checkbox.

Click the Apply button followed by the Close button

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 12 of 208
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 2

2 Overview of the STRUCTURES Application

E3D Design data is stored in a hierarchical structure and requires specific administrative elements in order to
maintain the system hierarchy.

2.1 How E3D Design Stores Structural Modelling Data

As with all E3D Design databases that store Model data, the
topmost element is the WORLD which owns the administrative
sub-level elements SITE and ZONE.

For structural modelling, the element types below a ZONE are:

Structure (STRU)

Framework (FRMW)

Subframework (SBFR)

The SBFR level is optional as structural components may be

owned by a FRMW and SBFR or a combination of both. The
elements that represent physical structural components in the
3D View are:

Generic Section (GENSEC) elements represent linear members

whether straight, curved, arc or ring. GENSECs are generally
referred to as sections.

Panel (PANE) elements represent planar members and are

sometimes referred to as plates.

2.2 Considerations for the Hierarchy of Structural Models

For some design disciplines the way the database hierarchy should be arranged is readily apparent. For
example, pipes may be grouped in ZONEs by system, piping class, or fluid code. Equipment may be grouped in
ZONEs by equipment type, systems, or physical location.

This is not always the case for structural models. Some company/project procedures require the structural
model to be broken down by project build methodology, while others may emphasise Work Breakdown
Structure, weight control or material purpose. To assist designers in meeting the required engineering
deliverables, the structural hierarchy provides more administrative elements than other disciplines.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 13 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Whatever the modelling objective may be, it is important that the hierarchy has a meaningful structure and is
fit for purpose. The production of drawings and other deliverable documents are greatly aided by a good
hierarchy breakdown and well named significant elements

The hierarchy for structural models may be created prior to modelling, created as required, created
automatically by relating to a Reference Grid (REFGRD) or a combination of these. All methods will be covered
in this training guide.

2.3 The STRUCTURES Discipline User Interface

The structures discipline user interface is accessed by

selecting STRUCTURES from the Quick Access toolbar.

The Structures discipline user interface has four specific tabs: SECTIONS, PLATES, WALLS AND FLOORS and
STAIRS LADDERS AND HANDRAILS. All other tabs are common to other disciplines.

This training guide covers the use of the SECTIONS and PANELS tabs for structural modelling. Training
guides TM-1813 Stairs, Ladders and Handrails Modelling and TM-1814 Walls and Floors Modelling cover
the respective topics in the STRUCTURES discipline

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 14 of 208
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 3

3 Linear Elements
The STRUCTURES discipline SECTIONS tab facilitates the creation and modification of structural linear
members. The sections may represent any profile shape and be of any material, for example: steel, concrete,
aluminium, etc.

3.1 Representation of Structural Profiles

To ensure design consistency and conformity to national or company standards, the definition of all profile
shapes used in structural modelling are held in the AVEVA™ Catalogue.

Each individual structural profile (column, beam, bracing, etc.) is represented in Model by a GENSEC element.
The GENSEC has many attributes, some of which are set automatically by placing or manipulating the element
via the appware whilst others may be set by the user.

The cross-sectional shape, or geometry, of the profile is defined as a 2D shape in the Catalogue. The geometry
is defined parametrically, such that the same definition may be used for many different profiles with the same
generic shape but differing sizing values, for example: depth, width, web thickness, flange thickness, etc.

The GENSEC has a Specification Reference (Spref)

attribute that points to a Specification Component
(SPCO) element in the Catalogue.

The Specification acts as a selection mechanism

and filters the available profiles to the user
depending on choices made on the selection
option lists.

The SPCO points at a Structural Profile (SPRF)

element that is also held in the Catalogue, via its
Catalogue Reference (Catref) attribute. The SPRF
in turn references the profile’s geometry
definition set, Pline set and Data set (not shown).

When a profile is created the selected 2D profile shape is extruded from the specified start position to the
specified end position.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 15 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Most sections on a project will be straight, however, functionality enables curved, arc and ring GENSECs to be
created, see Appendix A for further details.

To provide a method of referring to edges and other salient points of the profile, named lines running along
the length of the profile are provided. These lines, which are specified within the 2D geometry in the
Catalogue, are called Plines.

A profile has a standard set of Plines as well as specific Plines for its Generic Type (Gtype). The Plines have a
two, three- or four-letter abbreviated name. Plines are used for profile justification, trimming at connections
and placement of fittings.

See Appendix B for Parameters and Plines of Standard AVEVA Generic Types.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 16 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

3.1.1 Profile Justification

Plines are used to justify the profile around an

imaginary line between the start and end positions
of the GENSEC.

Columns are generally justified NA and beams CTOP, although specific circumstances may dictate different
justification.

Asymmetrical sections, for example: angles and channels, are generally justified at the ‘heel’ of the profile,
that is, LBOT or LTOP respectively.

Circular, square and rectangular hollow sections, Gtypes CTUB and RTUB, are generally justified NA, although
specific circumstances may dictate a different justification.

3.1.2 Section Connectivity

On any connection between GENSECs there is an Owning section and an Attached section.

A connection between two GENSEC elements is facilitated by a Justification Line Datum (JLDATU) element
created on the Justification line of the Owning section.

The JLDATU owns a Positioning Line Datum (PLDATU) element that owns a FIXING (FIXING) element.

These elements are created automatically when the attached section is created and the conditions are suitable
for a connection between two sections to be made.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 17 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The JLDATU is created on the Justification line of the

Owning section at the intersection the with the Attached
section’s Justification line (Jusline) attribute

The Zdistance attribute of the JLDATU is set to the distance

from the Start of the Owning section to the intersection of
the Justification lines.

As the Attached section is trimmed against a Pline, in this

case NAL or NAR, the Posline attribute of the PLDATU is
set to the trimming Pline, that is, NAL or NAR in this case.

The Cref attribute of the FIXING is set to the Attached

section’s reference.

The Attached section has two attributes Joistart and

Joiend, that are set to the FIXING reference on the Owning
section, depending on which end is connected, to create a
‘circular’ reference.

If an Owning section has two or more attached sections connecting at the same point, a single JLDATU
will own two or more PLDATUs which each own a single FIXING for the relevant Attached section.

The Attached section is trimmed against a Pline on the owning section using a rule which covers most
connection cases.

For example, a section connecting to the web of a Parallel Flange I (PFI) profile would be trimmed against the
NAL or NAR Pline, depending on the side of attachment, whereas, a section connecting to the flange of a PFI
profile would be trimmed to CTOP or CBOT Pline, depending on the side of attachment.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 18 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

3.2 Worked Example - Creating the Portal Frames

Having completed the Training Setup, select the STRUCTURES discipline from the Quick Access Toolbar
options list, navigate to GRIDWL REFERENCE_GRIDS in Model Explorer and drag and drop REFGRD
AREA02_WORKSHOP_GRID into the 3D View.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East Iso option.

The 3D View should now look like this:

In Model Explorer, expand the SITE SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA02 and select ZONE WORKSHOP_BUILDING to
make it the current element.

Select British Standard Profiles from the Section > Defaults > Profile
Specification options list.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 19 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Leave the Generic Type as the default Universal Beam and select
254x146UB37 from the Profile options list.

Leave the Justification as the default NA, select S275JR Steel from the
Material options list and PRIMARY from the Class options list.

Select the SECTIONS > Storage > Manual or Grid Storage > Grid Storage
option.

The STRU and FRMW options lists remain as <unset> at this stage.

Make sure that Node and Item snaps are set on the
Object Snapping Settings form.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Straight button to

display the Start point prompt.

Move the cursor near to the intersection of gridlines

WS.1 and WS.A at the Elev +300mm level until the
Node snap symbol is displayed.

Click to accept the Node snap and move the cursor

up so that a ‘ghost’ of the profile is displayed from
the start point and attached to the cursor.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 20 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The prompt changes to End point and the grid plane

WS.1 is highlighted in red.

Move the cursor near to the intersection of gridlines

WS.1 and WS.A at the Elev +4000mm level until the
Node snap symbol is displayed.

Click to accept the Node snap and create the column

between the two selected points.

In Model Explorer note that a STRU named STRU/AREA02_WORKSHOP_GRID has been created owning a
FRMW named FRMW/AREA02_WORKSHOP which contains the created GENSEC. Also note that in the Storage
group the STRU and FRMW options lists have been populated with the appropriate names.

The STRU and FRMW were created automatically and auto named when the GENSEC was created. When
Grid Storage is used and sections are created, the appropriate hierarchy is created if it doesn’t exist. This
can include SITE and ZONE elements.

The STRU’s GrdRef attribute is set to the Reference Grid (REFGRD) element and the FRMW’s GrdRef
attribute is set to the Grid Plane (GRIDPL) element. Where the appropriate GRIDPL to assign members to
is ambiguous, rules are used to determine the appropriate GRIDPL.

Right click in the 3D View to display the PowerWheel™

and click the Repeat tile

Pressing the Spacebar also repeats the last

command.

Create a second column at the intersection of grid lines

WS.1 and WS.C.

To create the sloping roof beam, select 203x133UB25 from the SECTIONS > Defaults > Profile options list and
select CTOP from the SECTIONS > Defaults > Justification options list.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 21 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the SECTIONS > Create > Straight >

Repeat option to display the Start point prompt
and snap to the intersection of the gridlines
WS.1 and WS.C at the Elev +4000mm level.

Make sure that the column is highlighted red as

this creates a connection between the roof
beam and the column.

Click to accept the Node snap.

Snap on the intersection of gridlines WS.1 and

WS.B at Elev+5000mm to create the sloping
roof beam.

The prompt returns to Start point, ready to

create another section as the Repeat
option was used.

Create the second roof beam connecting the

start point to the column but ensuring the end
is not connected to the other roof beam.

Snapping to the Node for the end point

without highlighting the other roof beam
will not create a connection between the
two sections.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 22 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The two columns are orientated incorrectly and need to be rotated by 90°. A GENSEC has a Beta angle attribute
that rotates the profile around its justification Pline.

Select the two columns and in the Properties form expand

the Positional header and select 90 from the Beta angle
options list.

The columns are rotated through 90° to the correct

orientation.

The connectivity between the columns and roof

beams is automatically maintained. This is known as
Dynamic Connectivity.

Having rotated the columns, the upper end of the column

needs to be extended just above the top flange of the roof
beam and allow for a joint to be applied between the two.

The joint will be applied later in the training guide.

Select the two columns and then pressing and

holding the Ctrl key, double click on one of the
columns to display the modification grips on both
columns.

Unconnected ends of sections display two

grips, a hemi-spherical Move grip and a
conical arrow Stretch grip. Connected ends
of sections only display a Move grip.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 23 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click on one of the length grips to highlight it in red. Note

that the same grip on the other column is also highlighted.

Where two or more sections are selected and the grips

displayed, if some of the sections are co-linear and the
ends are not connected, the length grips are ‘linked’,
i.e. modifying one will modify the other corresponding
ends of the qualifying selected sections.

Enter 45 in the D: textbox and press the Return key. The top
end of both columns have been lengthened by the specified
amount.

Press the Esc key to remove the grips and press the key
again to de-select the columns.

The two roof beams need to be mitred at the apex. An ‘end to end’ connection is required to enable a joint to
be applied between the two roof beams at the apex, described later in this training guide.

GENSEC ‘end to end’ connections require different kind of connection parameters to standard GENSEC to
GENSEC connections; therefore, the Mitre command has a Mitre and connect option.

Click the SECTIONS > Modify > Mitre button to display Select
first section end to mitre prompt.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 24 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Press the Down arrow cursor key to display the available in-
command options and click the Mitre and connect tile.

Select one of the roof beams near its apex end. The prompt
changes to Select second section end to mitre and connect.

Select the other roof beam near its apex end.

The two roof beams are now mitred and connected at their
apex ends.

The basic portal frame is complete on grid line WS.1 and can be copied to gridlines WS.2, WS.3 and WS.4.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Select the four sections on gridline WS.1 and right

click to display the PowerWheel.

Click the Context tile to display the Context menu.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 25 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the Copy & Paste option on the Context

menu to display the Specify base point prompt.

Snap to the node at the intersection of

gridlines WS.1 and WS.A at Elev+300mm.

The prompt changes to Specify the second

point and a ‘ghost’ of the four sections is
displayed ‘attached’ to the cursor.

Snap to the node at the intersection of

gridlines WS.2 and WS.A at Elev+300mm.

This copies the four sections to the WS.2

gridline.

With the command still active snap to the

relevant nodes on gridlines WS.3 and WS.4.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 26 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The four sections have now been copied to the relevant gridlines. The 3D View should now look like this:

When Grid Storage is being used and sections are moved or

copied from one gridline to another, they are automatically
transferred to an appropriate FRMW linked to the GRIDPL.

If the necessary FRMW doesn’t exist, as in this case, it is

automatically created and auto-named, if auto-naming is
on.

Note that in Model Explorer three additional FRMWs have

been created, each containing four GENSECs representing
the basic portal frames.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 27 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The portal frames on gridlines WS.1 requires some additional members.

Select the column at the intersection of gridlines

WS.1 and WS.A.

Right click to display the PowerWheel and click the

Context tile to display the Context menu.

Select the Copy & Paste option and snap to the node
at the bottom of the column

Press the F8 key to toggle Ortho mode on and move

the cursor North along gridline WS.1.

Press the Tab key to move to the N: textbox, enter

2650 and press the Return key.

A new column is created on gridline WS.1 2650mm

from the original column.

Press the Return key again to finish the command.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Connect button

and select the Southern roof beam on gridline WS.1.

When prompted Select section end(s), select the top

of the recently created column to connect it to the
roof beam.

When Connected is displayed press the Return key to

finish the command.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 28 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Repeat the Copy & Paste and Connect commands

for the column at the intersection of gridlines WS1
and WS, entering -2650 in the N: textbox.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 29 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 1
Create two internal columns on gridline WS.4, in accordance with the following sketch, by copying the two
existing columns and connecting them to them to their respective roof beams.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar when the exercise is complete.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 30 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

3.2.1 Worked Example - Creating the Portal Frames (continued)

To complete the portal frame, a horizontal beam is required between the internal columns on gridline WS.4,
as per the sketch above.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look South West Iso option and zoom in to the WS.4 portal frame.

Select SECTIONS > Defaults > Profile > 254x146UB37 and set the Justification to CTOP.

On the Status bar click the Distance snap button to toggle it on.

Distance snap modifies a snap by offsetting the final position by the specified distance from the displayed
snap position. A black circle is displayed at the final position. Distance snap may also be toggled from the
Object Snapping Settings form.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Straight button to

display the Start point prompt.

Note the additional Dist: textbox on top of the in-

canvas editor.

Press the Up arrow cursor key to access the Dist:

textbox, enter 3975 and press the Return key.

Position the cursor near the bottom of one of the

internal columns and note that the Distance snap
is displaying the position of the snap (a black
circle) measured from the Start of the column.

Click to accept the snap point.

Repeat the process on the other internal column

on gridline WS.4 for the End point prompt to
create a beam between the columns at with its
top flange 3975mm above the bottom of the
columns.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access

Toolbar.

This completes the portal frames.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 31 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

3.3 Worked Example - Creating the Bracing

The portal frame bracing will be created in a separate FRMW using a cross bracing configuration constructed
from angle profiles in both end bays of the Workshop, i.e. between portal frames WS.1/WS.2 and WS.3/WS.4
on both gridlines WS.A and WS.C. The bracing will be both between the columns and the roof beams.

Select FRMW FRMW/AREA02_WORKSHOP_GRID/Axis_WS.4 in Model Explorer to make current element.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Framework button to display the Create Framework form. Select Name form
the Name options list.

Enter AREA02_WORKSHOP_BRACING in the Name

textbox and click the OK button to create the FRMW.

The new FRMW is now the current element.

Select the SECTIONS > Storage > Manual or Grid

Storage > Manual Storage option.

The Storage Area displays the current FRMW, that is,

AREA02_WORKSHOP_BRACING.

To ensure that the Manual Storage setting is not

accidentally changed during modelling, select Lock
form the Lock Storage Area options list.

The REFGRD is not required for modelling the bracing. Click any line on the Reference Grid to make it the
current element and select VIEW > Content > Remove > Remove CE.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 32 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

In the SECTIONS > Default group select Equal Angle from the Generic Type options list, L75x75x8 from the
Profile options list, LBOT from the Justification options list and BRACING from the Class options list.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East Iso option and zoom into the South-West end bay.

Select SECTIONS > Create > Straight > Repeat.

Click the Distance snap button on the Status bar to toggle

it off.

Snap to bottom (Start) of one of the columns and then to

the top (End) of the opposite column.

Repeat the process snapping to the bottom (Start) of the

second column and to the top (End) of the first column to
form a cross bracing configuration.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

The bracing needs to be positioned from the top and bottom of the columns. This could be achieved by using
the Distance snap at each end during creation, however, if different gaps at top and bottom are required, this
would require changing the distance for each snap.

The Gaps utility enables bracing gaps to be set simultaneously for different bracing configurations and then
the gaps adjusted as required.

Click the SECTIONS > Modify > Gaps button to display the Select
bracing element prompt.

Select both bracing elements, noting that they are highlighted yellow
and the items they are connected to are highlighted magenta.

Bracing elements must be connected for the Gaps utility to

function. The number of bracing elements selected and the
number of connected elements determines the bracing
configuration.

Press the Return key to move to the next prompt.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 33 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The prompt Select gap references 1/2 (Cross) expects the user to
select a reference GENSEC or PANE, at the top and bottom of the
configuration, which will be used to measure the bracing gap from.

In this configuration, no gap references are available. Pressing

the Return key to move to the next prompt tells the command to
use the ends of the connected members as the reference plane.

Press the Return key to move to the next prompt.

All bracing gaps are modified simultaneously to the default value of

50mm with the value displayed on labels adjacent to the gap.

On subsequent use of the same configuration, any amended gap

values will be used.

The prompt Select gap to modify is displayed. Click on the top left
50mm label and the prompt changes to Specify the gap. Enter 425 in
the textbox and press the Return key.

Pressing the Return key at the Select gap to modify prompt will
finish the command and leave the gaps at their displayed values.

Both top gaps are modified to 425mm and the prompt returns to
Select gap to modify.

Click on the bottom left 50mm label and the prompt changes to
Specify the gap. Enter 200 in the textbox and press the Return key.

Both bottom gaps are modified to 200mm and the prompt returns to
Select gap to modify.

If different values are required for each top or each bottom gap,
then selecting only one brace element at a time and modify the
gaps before selecting the other bracing element and modifying
the gaps.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 34 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Press the Return key to finish the command.

All gaps have been set to the specified values.

The bracing angles should be back-to-back and ‘toes down’.

Currently they are back-to-back and ‘toes up’.

Select both of the bracing members and on the Properties form

expand the Positional section and select 90 from the Beta angle
options list.

Select True from the Mirror options list to mirror the GENSECs.

Mirroring a section in this way sets the Lmirror attribute of

the GENSEC to True.

The bracing angles are now ‘toes down’.

Repeat the bracing creation, gapping and Beta angle/mirroring sequence in the South-East end bay.

The gapping process uses the gap values specified previously in the session and not the default 50mm
values.

The bracing sections can now be mirrored to the bays on gridline WS.C.

Select the four bracing members and right click to display the PowerWheel. Click the Context tile and select
the Mirror option.

The Specify the first point prompt is displayed. Snap to the apex end of the roof beam on gridline WS.4. The
prompt Specify the second point is displayed. Snap to the apex end of the roof beam on gridline WS.1 to
mirror bracing members to the opposite side of the building.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 35 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The new bracing sections need to be connected to the columns on gridline ES.C as mirror function does not
copy the connections. Similarly, the mirroring has returned the Lmirror attribute on the sections to False,
therefore, the attributes need to be reset to True.

The Beta angle settings on the mirrored sections have been retained.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Connect button to display the Select section prompt.

Select one of the columns on gridline WS.C and the prompt changes to Select section end(s). Select the end
of the bracing sections at the selected column in turn. A Connected label is displayed when each end is
connected.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 36 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Press the Return key to finish the command. One end of the bracing sections are now connected to the
column. Repeat the process for all four columns on gridline WS.C to connect all the bracing sections to the
columns.

To check everything is connected as required, click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button. All sections
in the 3D View are highlighted in one of three colours.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 37 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Sections highlighted red are unconnected.

Sections highlighted green are connected at both ends.

Sections highlighted blue are connected at one end only. A label is displayed at the unconnected end.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button again to un-highlight the sections.

If sections are not connected/unconnected as required they can be easily modified using the SECTIONS >
Connections > Connect or SECTIONS > Connections > Disconnect buttons.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

The bracing between the roof beams needs to be in the plane of the roof beams. To achieve this the Local
Coordinate System (LCS) needs to be set to the roof beams.

Make one of the roof beams on the South side of

the Workshop the current element and click the
VIEW > Local Coordinate System > Current
Element button.

Note that the origin of the LCS has moved to

the start of the selected roof beam, the axes
have been orientated so that the UV (that is,
the XY or EN) plane of the LCS is the slope of
the roof beam and the PowerCompass has
changed to reflect the current LCS and
changes to local coordinates using UVW
axes.

All profiles created will now lie in the plane of the

roof beams

The roof bracing is created in Exercise 2.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 38 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 2
The roof bracing is to be the same cross bracing configuration as the column and using the same profile,
justification, material and class.

The gaps at either end of the bracing elements are to be 225mm.

Make sure that the bracing angle profiles are back to back by modifying the Beta angle and/or Lmirror
attributes as required.

The bracing sections must be moved down by 100mm perpendicular to the plane of the roof beams. This will
require the appropriate LCS plane to be selected from the PowerCompass.

When creating the roof bracing elements on the North side of the Workshop, set the LCS to the plane of
the roof beams on that side.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

The 3D View should now look like this:

Copyright © 2020.
Page 39 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

3.4 Worked Example - Creating the Purlins

The Workshop purlins will be created in a separate FRMW. Four rows of purlins, spaced at 1200mm centres,
are required to support the roof panels and will be constructed from parallel flange channels.

Unlock the Manual Storage area by selecting Unlock from the Lock Storage Area options list.

Select FRMW FRMW/AREA02_WORKSHOP_BRACING in Model Explorer to make it the current element.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Framework button to display the Create Framework form and enter
AREA02_WORKSHOP_PURLINS in the Name textbox and click the OK button to create the FRMW.

Check the new FRMW is referenced as the current Manual Storage FRMW and lock the storage area.

Select Parallel Flange Channel from the SECTIONS > Defaults > Generic Type options list and PFC150x75x18
from the SECTIONS > Defaults > Profile options list Set the Justification to LBOT, leave the Material as S275JR
Steel and set the Class to PURLIN.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East
Iso option.

Make the roof beam on the South side of gridline

WS.1 the current element and set the LCS to beam.

Toggle Distance snap on from the Status bar.

Select the SECTIONS > Create > Straight >
Continuous option and enter 200 in the Dist:
textbox on the in-canvas editor.

Snap to the point 200mm from the lower end of

the roof beam on the South side on gridline WS.1
making sure the roof beam is highlighted so the
purlin is connected.

Snap to the point 200mm from the lower end of

the roof beam on the South side on gridline WS.2
making sure the roof beam is highlighted so the
purlin is connected.

When the End point of the first purlin is

specified and the purlin created, the end point
is used as the start point of the next section, so
the prompt remains End point. This is because
Continuous was selected from the Straight
button options list.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 40 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Snap to the point 200mm from the lower end of the roof beam on the South side on gridline WS.3 and then
snap to the point 200mm from the lower end of the roof beam on the South side on gridline WS.4 to complete
the row of purlins between the portal frames.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

On the Status bar click the Significant snaps button to

toggle it on.

Significant snaps use JLDATU elements as Item snap points as well as the Start and End points of a section.
In this case, the Distance snap for the second row of purlins will use the JLDATUs of the connection
between the roof beams (Owning sections) and the first row of purlin sections (Attached sections) to
measure the specified distance from.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 41 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the SECTIONS > Create > Straight > Continuous

option to display the Start point prompt.

Set the Dist: to 1200 on the in-canvas editor.

Snap to the point 1200mm above the first line of

purlins on the roof beam on the South side of gridline
WS.1.

Make sure the selected snap is for the purlin and

not the bracing.

Create the second row of purlins 1200mm from the first row and then repeat the process to create the third
and fourth rows.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 42 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The PFC purlins are all ‘toeing’ the wrong way. To correct this, select all of the purlins and select True from the
Mirror options list in the Positional section of the Properties grid.

Press the Esc key to deselect the purlins.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 43 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 3
Create the purlins on the North side of the Workshop.

Set the LCS back to World.

Unlock the Manual Storage.

Use the Check function to check the section connectivity.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 44 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

3.5 Worked Example – Creating the Cladding Rails

The Workshop cladding rails can now be created in a separate FRMW. Three levels of cladding rails, spaced at
1500mm centres, are required around the perimeter of the workshop and will be constructed from parallel
flange channels.

In Model Explorer navigate to FRMW FRMW/AREA02_WORKSHOP_PURLINS to make it the current element.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Framework button to display the Create Framework form, enter
AREA02_WORKSHOP_CLADDING_RAILS in the Name textbox and click the OK button to create the FRMW.
Check the new FRMW is referenced as the current Manual Storage FRMW and lock the storage area.

The profile should already be set to PFC150x75x18 from the purlins. Set the Justification to LTOP, leave the
Material as S275JR Steel and set the Class to SECONDARY.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East Iso option.

Click the Object Snap Options button on the

Status bar to display the Object Snapping
Settings form.

Note that the Distance Snap and

Significant snaps checkboxes are
checked, corresponding to the Status bar.

On the Object Snap tab uncheck the

Significant snaps checkbox.

Enter 450 in the Distance snap textbox.

On the Elements sub-tab, uncheck the Node

and Item checkboxes.

Check the P-Line End Point checkbox.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 45 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the P-line Filters tab to display it.

The P-line Filters tab controls the

visibility of Plines when a Pline snap is
used.

Uncheck the Visible checkbox in the grid

header to uncheck all Visible checkboxes.

Check the Visible checkbox for the CBOT and

CTOP Plines.

CBOT and CTOP are both set as it cannot

be determined which Pline will be
required in subsequent steps.

Click the OK button to confirm the changes and close the form.

Select the SECTIONS > Create > Straight >

Continuous option.

On the Southern column of gridline WS.1, snap to

the point 450mm above the bottom of the column
using the central Pline on the outer face, i.e. CTOP
or CBOT.

Snap to the same point on the column on gridline

WS.2 to create the cladding rail between the two
columns.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Note that the cladding rail has been created in this orientation, i.e.
with its web perpendicular to the current World LCS.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 46 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The cladding rails are required to be created in this orientation,

‘toes’ down with the web parallel to the current World LCS.

The correct orientation may be achieved by modifying the Beta angle, however, when creating sections there
are two profile orientation modes available, Perpendicular and Parallel.

By default, all profiles are created with their web perpendicular to the current LCS plane, i.e. the Y direction
of the profile, as defined in the catalogue – see Appendix B, is perpendicular to the current LCS plane. This
setting may be changed using the in-command options.

The profile may require the Beta angle to be changed for asymmetric profiles to achieve the correct
orientation if either of the orientation modes are used as the orientation depends on the direction of
creation.

Select the cladding rail previously created and select the SECTIONS > Delete > Delete > Delete Current Element
option to delete it.

Select the SECTIONS > Create > Straight > Continuous again and snap to the point on the bottom outside face
of the South column on gridline WS.1 again.

When the End point prompt is displayed press the down arrow cursor key to display the available command
options.

Click the Parallel tile to set the section orientation

mode.

Snap to the point on the bottom outside face of the South column on gridline WS.2 again followed by similar
points on the gridlines WS.3 and WS.4 to create three cladding rails between the four columns

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Open the Object Snapping Settings form and on the Object Snap tab check the Node and Item snap
checkboxes and uncheck the P-Line End Point checkbox. Click the OK button on the form. Toggle Distance
Snap off in the Status bar.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 47 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the three created cladding rails and right click to display the PowerWheel and click the Context tile to
display the Context menu.

Click the Copy & Paste option on the Context menu to display the in-canvas editor.

Snap to the end of the cladding rail to

Specify base point for the copy.

Press the F8 key to toggle Ortho on and

move the cursor vertically.

Press the Tab key twice to lock the E:

and N: coordinates at 0mm, enter
1500 in the U: textbox and press the
Return key.

The prompt remains at Specify the

second point.

Press the Tab key twice to lock the E:

and N: coordinates at 0mm, enter
3000 in the U: textbox and press the
Return key.

Press the Return key again to finish the command.

The copied cladding rails need to be connected to the columns. Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Connect
button and select the Southern column on gridline WS.1 and at the Select sections end(s) prompt select the
unconnected ends of the middle and top cladding rails in turn.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 48 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Repeat the procedure for the other three columns, selecting the four unconnected ends in turn on the middle
two columns.

When finished, click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button to verify that all of the cladding rails are
connected.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button again to un-highlight the sections.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look South West Iso option to view the East end of the Workshop.

Open the Object Snapping Settings form and on the Object Snap tab uncheck the Node and Item checkboxes
and check the P-Line End Point checkbox.

On the P-line Filters tab uncheck the CTOP and CBOT checkboxes and check the LBOT, RBOT, LTOP and RTOP
checkboxes.

Click the OK button on the form.

Toggle the Distance Snap on in the Status bar.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 49 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the SECTIONS > Create > Straight > Repeat

option.

On the Southern column of gridline WS.4, snap to

the point 450mm above the bottom of the column
using the edge Pline on the outer face as shown

Snap to a similar point on the internal column, as

shown, to create the cladding rail between the two
columns.

If the outer edge Plines of the columns had

been selected the section would still have
trimmed to the inside flanges.

Press the Return key to finish the command

Create a similar cladding rail between the other

internal column and the column on gridline WS.C.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 50 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Change the Distance snap to 1950 and create the

two middle cladding rails using a similar process.

Be careful to ensure the snap point is being

measured from the bottom of the column.

Change the Distance snap to 3450 and create a

single top cladding rail between the two external
columns on gridline WS.4.

Toggle the Distance snap off.

The cladding rails need to be extended at the corners of the

Workshop.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North West Iso
option to view the East end of the Workshop.

Zoom into the South East column.

Display the Object Snapping Settings form.

On the Object Snaps > Elements tab

uncheck the Node and Item checkboxes on
the Elements tab and check the P-Line End
Point checkbox.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 51 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

On the P-line Filters tab uncheck the Visible

checkbox in the list heading and check the
Visible checkboxes for the LBOT and LTOP
Plines.

Click the OK button on the Object Snapping

Settings form.

Double click the top cladding rail on the South side of the Workshop
to display the Move grip.

The Stretch grip is not displayed as the cladding rail is connected

to the column.

Hold down the Ctrl key and select middle and bottom cladding rails
so the move grip is displayed on all three cladding rails.

Click the Additional grips button on the Status bar to display the
Extend grip on each cladding rail.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 52 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Holding down the Ctrl key select top, middle and bottom cladding
rail extend grips so all three extend grips are highlighted red.

Click on the top cladding rail Extend grip to display the in-canvas
editor with the Specify cutback prompt.

Move the cursor to the LBOT Pline of the top cladding rail on the
top East end cladding rail.

The cutback textbox displays a value of -226mm.

Click to accept the value.

All three cladding rails are extended to the outside edge of the
West end cladding rails.

Press the Esc key to remove the grips from the 3D View.

The Cutback attribute of a FIXING element extends or

contracts the start or end point of a GENSEC from its
connection location.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 53 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the three cladding rails on the East end of the Workshop to
display the grips.

Select all thee Extend grips and click on the top cladding rail
extend grip to display the in-canvas editor with the Specify
cutback prompt.

Move the cursor to the LTOP Pline of the top cladding rail on the
top South cladding rail.

The cutback textbox displays a value of -256mm.

Click to accept the value.

All three of the East end cladding rails are now aligned with the
South side cladding rails.

Repeat the process to extend the middle and lower East end cladding rails to be
flush with the flange of the inside columns

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 54 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 4
Create the cladding rails on the North side and the West end of the Workshop.

Extend the cladding rails at the corner columns.

Extend the purlins attached to the sloping roof beams at the East and West ends of the Workshop so that they
extend beyond the end cladding rails by 75mm.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 55 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

3.6 Worked Example - Creating the Runway Beam and Supports

A runway beam is required running from the back of the Workshop to the opening at the front. The beam and
supports will be created in a separate FRMW.

In Model Explorer navigate to FRMW AREA02_WORKSHOP_CLADDING_RAILS to make it the current element.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Framework button to display the Create Framework form and enter
AREA02_WORKSHOP_RUNWAY_BEAM in the Name textbox and click the OK button to create the FRMW.

Check the new FRMW is referenced as the current Manual Storage FRMW and lock the storage area.

Select Universal Beam from the SECTIONS > Defaults > Generic Type options list and 356x171UB45 from the
SECTIONS > Defaults > Profile options list. Set the Justification to CTOP and the Class to BEAM.

Select the VIEW > Content > Remove > Remove All option to clear the 3D View.

Add the four FRMWs containing the portal frames to the 3D View.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look South West Iso option to view the West end of the Workshop.

Locate file TM-1812_RunwayBeamAids.txt, typically stored in:

C:\AVEVA\Plant\PlantTraining2.1\Training\userdata

The file is a macro to create Design Aids to assist in the creation of the runway beam. The creation and
use of Design Aids is described later in this training guide.

Drag and drop the file into the 3D View to run the macro. The macro creates an Aid Group (AIDGRO)
element owning four Aid Line (AIDLIN) elements below the newly created FRMW.

Open the Object Snapping Settings form and on the Object Snap > Graphics tab check the Endpoint
checkbox. Click the OK button on the form.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Curved

button to display the Start point prompt.

Snap to the East end point of the design aid

line.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 56 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The prompt changes to Fillet point.

Snap to the end of the design aid line at the

change in direction of the aids.

The prompt displays the default radius,

that is, R=1000mm. This may be changed
by using the command options.

At the next Fillet point prompt, snap to the

next change in direction of the aid lines.

Note that there is curve at the second snap

point.

Continue snapping to the direction change

points of the aid lines and at the end point of
last aid line.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

The runway beam will be supported directly from the portal frames where possible, however, additional
tertiary members are required for some supports.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 57 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select 152x89UB16 from the SECTIONS > Defaults > Profile options list. Set the Justification to CTOP and the
Class to TERTIARY.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East Iso option.

Open the Object Snapping Settings form. Uncheck the Endpoint checkbox on the Object Snap > Graphics
tab. Uncheck the P-Line Endpoint check box on the Object Snap > Elements tab and check the Node and
Item checkboxes. Click the OK button on the form.

Select SECTIONS > Create > Straight > Repeat to

display the Start point prompt. toggle Distance
snap on from the Status bar and set the Dist: to
1485.

Snap to the apex end of one of the roof beams on

gridline WS.1. Click to accept the snap 1485mm
from the apex.

The prompt changes to End point.

Snap to the apex end of the opposite roof beam

to create a horizontal beam between the two roof
beams.

Repeat the process on the roof beams of gridline

WS.2.

With the command still active, change the

Distance snap to 500 and, holding down the Shift
key, right click to display the PowerWheel and
click the Item Mid Point tile.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 58 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Snap to the point 500mm from the mid-point of

the tertiary beam on gridline WS.1.

Snap to the point 500mm from the mid-point, on

the same side as previously, of the tertiary beam
on gridline WS.2.

With the command still active, repeat the process

to create another beam on the opposite side of
the mid-point of the tertiary beams to create two
parallel beams 1000mm apart.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Toggle the Distance snap off.

Click the VIEW > Local Coordinate System >

Object button to display the Select objects
prompt. Select the design aid line running North
South to set the LCS to the line.

Click the VW plane on the PowerCompass.

On the Status bar click the Project snaps onto LCS

button.

When Project snaps onto LCS is toggled on, all snaps will be projected onto the current LCS.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 59 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the SECTION > Create > Straight button to

display the Start point prompt.

Snap to the start of one of the horizontal tertiary

beams. Note that the snap point is projected onto
the LCS, as defined by the black dot.

Press the down arrow cursor key to display the in-

command options and click the Parallel tile. This
creates the section with its Y axis, as defined in
the Catalogue, parallel to the LCS.

The prompt is now prefixed by ( | | ), denoting

‘parallel mode’.

At the End point prompt, snap to the same point

on the parallel beam to create a cross beam that
aligns with the runway beam.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Click the Project snaps onto LCS button again to

toggle it off and click the VIEW > Local
Coordinate System > World button to return the
LCS to the default.

Select Square Hollow Section from the

SECTIONS > Defaults > Generic Type options list
and SHS80x80x6.3 from the SECTIONS >
Defaults > Profile options list. Set the
Justification to NA.

Select SECTIONS > Create > Straight > Repeat

and create two vertical supports from the two
parallel tertiary beams to the runway beam. Use
the Perpendicular To snap to connect the
supports to the runway beam.

Toggle Distance snap on, set Dist: to 50 and

create a diagonal brace between the vertical
supports.

Toggle Distance snap off.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 60 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The runway beam requires supports along its length from the roof beams or other suitable steelwork. The
supports will look like this:

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look South East Iso option

Select the North column on gridline WS.2 to make

it the CE.

Click the VIEW > Local Coordinate System > Current

Element button to set the LCS to the column.

Toggle Project snaps onto LCS on and click the UV

plane on the PowerWheel.

Select SECTIONS > Create > Straight >Repeat to

display the Start point prompt.

Snap to the end point on the runway beam aid line

so that it projects onto the current LCS.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 61 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Make sure that Ortho is toggled on (F8).

The prompt changes to End point.

Press the down arrow cursor key to display the in-

command options and click the Perpendicular tile.

Move the cursor vertically above the roof beam and

click to specify the end point to create a vertical
support running through the roof beam.

With the command still active, toggle Distance snap

on and set the Dist: to 75.

Snap to a point 75mm above the bottom of the

vertical hanger for the start point. Press the
Backtick key to change the in-canvas editor from
cartesian to cylindrical co-ordinates.

Enter 1500 in the D: textbox and press the Tab key. Enter 45 in the A: textbox and press the Tab key. Press the
Return key to create a support member at 45°.

The Backtick key is to the left of the 1 key and above the Tab key on a standard QWERTY keyboard.

Repeat the process on the other side of the vertical

support entering an angle of 135 in the A: textbox.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 62 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Ex

Using the Sections > Connections > Connect option,

connect the three sections to the appropriate roof
beam and tertiary beam and the two bracing
sections to the vertical section.

Connect the vertical section to the runway beam.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button

to check the connectivity is as expected and make
any necessary adjustments.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button

again to un-highlight the sections.

Click the Save Work button.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 63 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 5
Create a similar runway beam support on gridline WS.3.

Create a runway beam support from the horizontal beam on gridline WS.4.

Save work.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 64 of 208
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 4

4 Section Fittings and Joints

This chapter describes how the structural model may be enhanced by adding section fittings and joints.

4.1 Representation of Section Fittings

Section fittings are pre-defined catalogue items owned by a single GENSEC. The fitting geometry is defined,
usually parametrically, in the Catalogue.

Section fittings are ‘attached’ to a GENSEC using the Justification Line Datum (JLDATU), Positioning Line Datum
(PLDATU) and Fixing (FIXING) elements also used for section connectivity, see section 3.1.2. These elements
are created automatically below the GENSEC when a fitting is created.

A FIXING used for section connectivity has its Cref attribute set to the attached member’s reference,
whereas, a FIXING used for a fitting has its Cref attribute set to unset.

The Zdistance attribute of the JLDATU is

set to the distance from the Start of the
GENSEC to the specified position of the
fitting during its creation or modification.
The Zdistance is measured along the
Justification line of the GENSEC.

The Posline attribute of the PLDATU is set

to the Pline selected to ‘attach’ the fitting
to the GENSEC during creation.

The Spref attribute of the FIXING points to a Specification Component (SPCO) element in the catalogue whose
Catref attribute points to the Section Fitting (SFIT) element in the Catalogue, which references the fitting’s
geometry and other data.

Section fittings may also be templates. Template fitting definition is different to Catalogue fittings but the
methodology for their creation and modification in Model is the same.

Section fittings are grouped into similar fitting types, for example:
• Baseplates
• Stiffeners
• Lifting lugs
• Fireproofing

Copyright © 2020.
Page 65 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The Specification acts as a filter to only display the section fittings that are applicable to the Generic Type
(Gtype) of the section that owns the fitting.

Sections fittings may have Design Parameters that can be modified to change various aspects of the fitting, for
example, dimensions, plate thickness, etc.

4.2 Worked Example – Section Fittings

Select the VIEW > Content > Remove > Remove All option to clear the 3D View. Drag and drop the four portal
frames and the purlins into the 3D View from Model Explorer.

Open the Object Snapping Settings form and on the Object Snap tab, uncheck Project Snaps onto LCS,
Projected Start / End, Distance Snap and Significant snaps checkboxes, if checked.

On the Object Snap > Graphics tab click the Clear All button and on the Object Snap > Elements tab check the
Node and Item checkboxes, if unchecked.

On the P-filters tab uncheck the Visible checkbox in the header and check the NAL and NAR Pline checkboxes.
Click the OK button on the form.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East Iso option.
Zoom in to the South roof beam on gridline WS.1.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Fitting button to display the Select
section prompt. Select the South roof beam on gridline WS.1 to
display the Section Fitting form.

The prompt changes to Select specification and Select… is

highlighted in the Specification options list on the form.

Select Stiffeners from the Specification options list:

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 66 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Selecting the Specification displays the available selected fitting

types for the profile’s Gtype in the Fitting Group section on the
form.

The fitting types have an image of the fitting and a brief

description.

Scroll the Fitting Group down and click the Web Full Depth
Double button. This displays the fitting options, for example:
different stiffener thicknesses, in the Fitting pane.

Click the 10mm Stiffener button in the Fitting section.

The Design Parameters for the fitting are displayed in the Design
Parameters pane.

The design parameters may be modified by clicking in the value

cell of the appropriate parameter and entering a different value.
For this worked example leave them at the default values.

The Apply and Detail… buttons on the bottom of the form are
now active.

Click the Detail… button to display the Image form that displays
an image of the fitting. The image shows the parameters for the
fitting and the pencil icon suffix denotes that these parameters
may be modified, that is, the Design Parameters.

The sketch also shows the Positioning line, that is, the Pline, that
must be selected for the fitting.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 67 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Close the Image form.

Click the Apply button on the form and at the Select P-Line
prompt select the NAL or NAR Pline on the roof beam.

The prompt changes to Specify Distance and a ghost of the fitting

is displayed together with a fitting pin.

Moving the cursor moves the fitting along the section and the
distance from the start of the profile, measured along the
Justification line, is displayed in the D: textbox.

As more than one fitting is required on this beam, press the down
arrow cursor key to display the in-command options and click the
Repeat tile.

Snap to the end of the lower purlin to create the fitting.

The distance is displayed as 200mm, that is, the position of

the purlin from the start of the roof beam.

Snap to the ends of the other three purlins attached to the roof
beam to create stiffeners below each one.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Repeat the process on the North roof beam of gridline WS.1.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 68 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Open the Object Snapping Settings form and set the only visible Pline to NA.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Fitting button and select the
South column on gridline WS.1.

Select Baseplates from the Specification options list on the

Create Fitting form.

Click on the Rectangular button in the Fitting Group pane

and click the Rectangular 20mm – 6 Holes button in the
Fitting pane.

Modify the Hole Dia. design parameter to 22mm.

Click the Apply button on the form.

At the Select P-Line prompt select the NA Pline on the

column.

At the Specify Distance prompt snap to the Start of the

column to create the baseplate fitting.

Alternatively 0 could be entered in the D: textbox.

Repeat the process for the other three columns on gridline WS.1.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 69 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 6
Create double web stiffeners on the roof beams below the purlins on gridlines WS.2, WS.3 and WS.4.

Create 10mm Partial Depth Double Web Stiffeners on the interior columns on gridline WS.4 where the
horizontal beam connects. The Edge Offset for the stiffeners must be 0mm.

Note: the web stiffeners are justified at the centre of the stiffener, however, the stiffeners should align with
the flange of the horizontal beam. This can be achieved using a graphics Midpoint snap.

At one end of the horizontal beam the partial depth stiffener will be on the incorrect side of the column. This
can be modified by changing the Beta angle of the column.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 70 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.3 Representation of Joints

Joints are pre-defined catalogue items owned by a connection between two GENSECs. The joint geometry is
defined parametrically in the Catalogue.

Joints are referenced by a connection using the Specification Reference (Spref) attribute of the FIXING on the
owning section in a connection, see section 3.1.2.

The origin of the joint is pre-determined by the position of the FIXING.

The Posline attribute of the PLDATU is set to the Pline to which the attached GENSEC of the connection is
trimmed.

The Spref attribute of the FIXING points to the SPCO in the catalogue whose Catref attribute points to the
JOIN element in the Catalogue, which references the joint’s geometry and other data.

Joints may also be templates. Template joint definition is different to Catalogue joints but the
methodology for their use is the same.

Joints are grouped into similar joint types, for example:

• Beam to Beam joints

• Beam to Column joints
• Splice joints
• Bracing joints
• Baseplate joints

The Specification acts as a filtering mechanism to show the joints that are applicable to the Gtype of the
selected owning and attached sections.

Joints may have Design Parameters which can be modified by the user to change various aspects of the joint,
for example: dimensions, plate thickness, etc.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 71 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.4 Worked Example – Joints

Add the bracing and cladding rails to the 3D View.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East Iso option.

Zoom in to the connection between the South column and the roof beam in gridline WS.1.

Click the SECTIONS > Modify > Joint button to display the
Select sections(s) prompt.

Select the South column on gridline WS.1 and press the

Return key.

The joint pins for the column are displayed together with
the prompt Select joints.

Click the joint pin for the connection between the column
and the roof beam to highlight it red.

Press the Return key to display the Modify Joint form.

The prompt changes to Set specification and <unset> is

highlighted in the Specification options list on the form.

Select Beam to Column Joints from the Specification options list:

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 72 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Selecting the Specification displays the available selected joint

types for the combination of owning and attached section Gtypes
in the Joint Group section of the form.

The joint types have an image of the fitting and a brief description.

Click the Column Flange button to display the joint options, that
is, different joints with different options, in the Joint section.

Click the Eaves Haunch 10mm Plate button in the Joint pane. The
design parameters for the joint are displayed in the Design
Parameters pane.

Click the Detail… button to display an image of the joint.

Close the Image form and click the Apply button on the Modify
Joint form.

The joint is applied to the connection between the column and

roof beam.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 73 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Close the Modify Joint form to finish the command and remove
the joint pins form the 3D View.

Note that the joint does not fit the beam and column correctly.
This is because the Design Parameters on the form were left at the
defaults.

Select the column and with the cursor over the selected section
right click to display the PowerWheel.

Click the Navigation tile to display the Navigation gallery and click
the Joints tile to display the joint pins.

Select the joint pin for the column/roof beam joint and click the SECTIONS > Modify > Joints button to display
the Modify Joint form which is populated with the joint’s details.

Modify the following parameters in the Design Properties section

to the following values:
• Hole Dist. from Top: 50
• Hole Centres X: 70
• Hole Centres Y: 60
• No. Hole Rows (3 -5 ): 3
Click the Apply button and close the Modify Joint form. The joint
now fits correctly with the column and beam.

The joint parameters can also be modified by selecting the joint using the joint pin and expanding the
Parameters section under the Specification header in the Properties form. The non-editable parameters
are greyed out.

The remaining portal frame columns require the same haunch joint. Click the SECTIONS > Modify > Joint
button and select the seven portal frame columns.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 74 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Press the Return key to display the Modify Joint form and the joint pins.

Select the column to roof beam joint pins on all seven columns and press the Return key.

Select the same joint as before, modify the Design Properties to the values given previously and click the Apply
button. All portal frame columns to roof beams connections now have the same haunch joint applied.

Column baseplates may also be modelled as joints as opposed to fittings, however, the joint needs a FIXING
to reference the joint. This is provided by an End Datum (ENDATU) element.

ENDATUs can only exist at the start or end of a GENSEC, so there can only be two elements, one at each end,
on any one section.

Select the four columns on gridline WS.1 and enter IN in the 3D View to display the fitting pins.

Select the four baseplate fitting pins and select the SECTION > Delete > Delete > Delete Selection option to
delete the baseplate fittings previously created.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > End Datum button and at the
Select section end(s) prompt select the bottom of the South
column on gridline WS.1.

When selected a label, Fixing 1, is displayed.

Select the bottom of the other eleven columns of the portal

frames.

The bottom of the columns will be incrementally labelled Fixing

2, Fixing 3, Fixing 4, etc.

Press the Return key to end the selection.

A yellow Endatu pin is displayed at the bottom of each column,

the prompt changes to Select specification and the End Datum
form is displayed.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 75 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select Baseplates from the Specification options list on the

form.

Click the Rectangular button in the Joint Group, scroll down the
Joint pane and click the 20mm Plate – 6 Holes button.

Modify the Hole Dia. design parameter to 22 and click the Apply
button.

The joint is applied to all twelve selected columns. Each section

now owns an ENDATU and the FIXING that is owns references
the joint in the catalogue.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 76 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 7
Apply suitable bolted joints to:

• Horizontal beam between the internal columns on gridline WS.4

• Runway beam supports.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 77 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.5 Automatic Joint Selection

Automatic Joint Selection enables joints to be created automatically on existing connected members or
created automatically when a GENSEC is created and connected to another GENSEC.

For Automatic Joint Selection to function, at least one Automatic Joint Selection Specification must be
available in the Catalogue. These specifications are separate from the standard joint specifications and,
normally, uses the same joints but have specific criteria for assigning the joints with appropriate Design
Parameters, if any.

Information on Specifications for Automatic Joint Selection is available in TM-1841 – AVEVA Catalogue
(2.1) Structural Catalogues and Specifications.

When a Specification for Automatic Joint Selection is available in the catalogue the
buttons in the SECTIONS tab, Joint Selection group are enabled.

Automatic Joint Selection only operates when the Automatic button is clicked and
toggled on.

When Automatic Joint Selection is enabled and with the Automatic button toggled on, selecting members
graphically and clicking the State button in the Joint Selection group on the SECTIONS tab displays the Joint
List form:

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 78 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The form displays information about the joints on the member in the graphical selection and allows Automatic
Joint Selection to be performed on joints selected in the form.

The Joint List displays information about selected joints:

Joint Name Name of joint FIXING element

Type Stype of joint or Type if Stype is unset

Automatic: The joint specification has been chosen from an Automatic Joint
Specification
Manual: The joint specification has been chosen from a standard Joint
Selection Specification
Unset: The joint specification is unset
Invalid: The joint specification reference is set, but is pointing to an
unknown element.

Number of choices available for this joint in the Automatic Joint

Specification.
Choices The automatic joint selection system makes a default choice if there is more
than one joint detail option available. If there is more than on choice,
alternative joint detail can be selected using the Choose button.

Valid: The current specification selection is still correct for this joint.
Update Selection: The current joint specification is no longer valid for this
Message joint. It should be reselected.
This column can contain a message returned from an automatic selection
operation following use of the Automatic button.

Access Indicates if current access to this joint is Write or Read Only

Description Description from the joint, or from the catalogue if the joint description is
unset.

The Selection button updates the Joint List section to contain the joints of the members currently selected in
the 3D view.

The Update button updates details of joints in the Joint List section but does not replace the list with joints
selected in the 3D view.

The Show Tags checkbox toggles the display of graphical labels on the 3D View for each joint selected in the
Joint List section.

The Automatic Joint Specification options list enables the appropriate Automatic Joint Specification to be
selected if there is more than one available in the Catalogue(s).

The Automatic button runs automatic joint selection for all joints selected in the Joint List section.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 79 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The Select alternative joint options list is only available if a single joint is selected in the Joint List section and
the joint has more than one valid option in the current Automatic Joint Specification.

Selecting one or multiple joints in the Joint List section and clicking the Automatic button attempts to add a
joint automatically from the Automatic Joint Specification if there is a joint that meets the specification’s
criteria.

If a joint has an existing Manual labelled joint in the Selection column of the Joint List, a Confirm form is
displayed:

If the Yes button is clicked the automatically selected joint replacement may be different from the previous
manually selected joint. This depends on the joints in the Automatic Joint Selection specification and the order
of the joints in the specification.

If a manually selected has no replacement joint in the specification that meet the criteria, then a message is
displayed in the Messages section and the joint remains unchanged.

If a joint has an existing Unset labelled joint in the Selection column of the Joint List section, the same Confirm
form is displayed: If the Yes button is clicked and no joint matches the criteria in the Automatic Joint
Specification then a message is displayed in the Messages section.

If multiple joints match the criteria for a single selected joint, a message is displayed in the Messages section
and the Select alternative joint options list enabled where the selection can be made.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 80 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.5.1 Worked Example - Automatic Joint Selection on Existing Members

Select the VIEW > Content > Remove > Remove All
option to clear the 3D View.

Navigate to SITE AUTO_JOINT_SELECTION in Model

Explorer and add it to the 3D View.

Navigate to GRIDWL TRAINING_GRIDS and add

REFGRD AJS_GRID into the 3D View.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East
Iso option.

Select all members in the 3D View and click the SECTIONS > Joint Selection > Automatic button to toggle
Automatic Joint Selection on.

Click the SECTIONS > Joint Selection > State button to display the Joint List form., there will be 34 joints in the
list and all joints have the Selection column entry as Unset and the Message column entry as Unset
Specification.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 81 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select entries in the Joint List. The Message section confirms that all 34 joints have been selected.

After a short working period the Joint List form will automatically update to display the results for all joints in
the Joints List section.

All joints have been updated with appropriate entries in the Joint List section. Note that all joints are of the
same type, that is FPL (Fin Plates) as these are the first joint types in the Automatic Joint Specification that
meet the criteria. Also note that he joints have a varying number of choices for alternative joints, again due to
the criteria in the specification.

Close the Joint List form and examine the model, noting that all the joints have been created with number of
bolt holes varying depending on the depth of the attached members in accordance with the Design Parameters
set in the Automatic Joint Specification.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 82 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Open the Joint List form again and select

the first joint in the list. This joint has a value
of 3 in the Choices column.

Open the Select alternative joint options

list and select Flexible End Plate –
150mmx8mm.

Navigate to the column at Gridline A1 and inspect the beam to column web joint. Note that the joint has been
changed from a fin plate to a flexible end plate.

Close the Joint List form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 83 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.5.2 Worked Example - Automatic Joint Selection when Creating New Members
Select the VIEW > Control > Limits > Extents option and select the VIEW > Control > Look > Look North East
Iso option.

On the SECTIONS tab in the Defaults group make sure the following defaults are set:

Make sure that Object Snaps are set to Node and Item only and that Manual Storage is set to STRU/AJS_GRID
and Elevation 2 and then lock the storage.

Toggle on Significant snaps, Projected Start / End and Distance snap. Set the Distance snap to 1000mm.

Make sure that Automatic in the Joint Selection group is toggled on and select the SECTIONS > Create >
Straight > Repeat option.

Select the GENSEC start position on the beam on

Gridline D between Gridlines 1 and 2.

The Projected Start / End measures the

distance from the centreline of the column.

Select the GENSEC end position on the beam on

Gridline C between Gridlines 1 and 2.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 84 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Create two additional beams in the same bay to

create three beams equally spaced at 1000mm..

Zoom into the ends of the newly created beams

and note that joints have been applied to the
beam connections.

Select 305x102UB25 from the SECTIONS >

Defaults > Profile options list.

Select the SECTIONS > Create > Straight >

Repeat option.

Select the GENSEC Start position on the beam on

Gridline D between Gridlines 2 and 3.

Create three equally spaced beam, as before, in

the bay between Gridlines C/D and 2/3.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 85 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Zoom into the ends of the newly created beams

and note that joints have been applied to the
beam connections.

Select 457x152UB52 from the SECTIONS >

Defaults > Profile options list

Select the SECTIONS > Create > Straight >

Repeat option.

Select the GENSEC Start position on the beam on

Gridline B between Gridlines 2 and 3.

Create three equally spaced beam, as before, in

the bay between Gridlines A/B and 2/3.

Zoom into the ends of the newly created beams

and note that joints have been applied to the
beam connections.

Note that all of the joints for equal size beams, smaller attached beams and larger attached beams have
selected the same type of Fin Plate joint.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 86 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the beam on Gridline D between Gridlines 1 and 2.

Click the SECTIONS > Joint Selection > State button to display the Joint List form with the three entries for the
connected members.

Select the first entry in the list. Note that in the Choices column there are 5 choices in the Automatic Joint
Specification that satisfy the criteria for this connection.

Select the Snipe + 10mm Gusset joint from the

Select alternative joint options list and the repeat
for the other two joints in the Joints List.

Zoom into the ends of the beams and note that

joints have been modified to the selected joint.

Repeat the process with the other beams that automatic joints where applied to earlier, selecting different
joint specifications from those available.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 87 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select all the beams that have had automatic joints

applied to them.

Click the SECTIONS > Joint Selection > Reselect

button to display the joint pins on the beams and
display the prompt Select joints.

Select all the joint pins to highlight them red and

press the Return key.

Zoom into the ends of the attached beams and note

that the joints have reverted to the original
selection of joint when beams were created.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 88 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.6 Merged Joints

Standard joints between structural linear members have a single attached member. Where there are multiple
attached members the complexity of these joints mean that it is not possible to parameterise a compound
joint with simple database rules as used to create a joint connecting a single attached member to an owning
member.

For multiple attached member joints a mechanism that enables a PML function to be run when a complex
Design Template joint is instanced is used. This PML code performs calculations based on parameters of the
joint and can be used in conjunction with database rules to define joint geometry.

E3D Design provides three sample joints, together with their PML functions, to demonstrate how this
mechanism is implemented. The merged joint types are:

Linear Gusset Plate Corner Gusset Plate

Star Plate

Copyright © 2020.
Page 89 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.6.1 Worked Example – Creating Merged Joints

Clear the 3D View. Navigate to SITE MergedJoints and expand
the hierarchy in Model Explorer.

Add FRMW LinearGusset to the 3D View.

With the FRMW as the CE, click the SECTIONS > Connections >
Check button to highlight the members, and note that the
three bracing members are all connected.

It is a requirement of merged joints that the members are

connected as the utility will effectively merged the existing
connection into a single merged connection.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button again to un-
highlight the members.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Merged Joint button to display
the Select owing section prompt.

Select the top horizontal beam to display the three joint pins
of the attached members.

The prompt changes to Select joints. Select all three joint pins
to highlight them red and press the Return key to display the
Merged Joint form.

The prompt changes to Set specification.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 90 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select Gusset Plate Joints from the Specification options list.

Click the Gusset Plate button from the Joints Group section.

Click the Linear Gusset Plate button from the Joint section.

Leave the five Design Parameters as the defaults and click the
Detail button to display the Image form with an image of the
joint that will be applied.

This joint is only suitable for attached Gtypes CTUB and

RTUB.

Close the Image form and click the Apply button.

The joint is created given using the Design Parameters set in

the Merged Joint form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 91 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

In Model Explorer expand the hierarchy of the owning GENSEC

and note that each of the attached member’s FIXING elements
owns a FIXING which owns a TMPL for sniping the attached
member and adding the cap plates.

A fourth PLDATU owns an MFIX element that owns a TMPL for

the gusset plate.

Make FRMW LinearGussetCTUB the CE, add it to the 3D View

and centre the view.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button to ensure all
elements are connected correctly.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button again to un-
highlight the members.

The top beam in this FRMW, that is, the owing member of the
merged joint, is a Gtype CTUB that requires an extra step when
creating a Linear Gusset.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Merged Joint button to display
the prompt Select owing section.

Select the top horizontal beam to display the two joint pins of
the attached members.

The prompt changes to Select joints. Select both joint pins to

highlight them in red and press the Return key to display the
Merged Joint form.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 92 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select Gusset Plate Joints from the Specification options list.

Click the Gusset Plate button from the Joints Group section.

Click the Linear Gusset Plate button from the Joint section.

Leave the five Design Parameters as the defaults and click the
Apply button.

As the owning member is a Gtype CTUB and the attached

members are trimmed to one of the internal Plines around the
NA, for example NASS, the Pline to which the linear gusset
plate is attached needs to be selected rather than the Pline
specified in the PLDATU Posline attribute used.

The prompt Select P-Line is displayed. Select Pline CBOT from

the owning member.

The Pline Filters tab on the Object Snapping Settings form

can be used to limit the displayed Plines.

The Linear Gusset Plate joint is created with the gusset plate
aligned with the bottom of the owning member.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 93 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Make FRMW CornerGusset the CE and add it to the 3D View.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button to ensure all
elements are connected correctly.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button again to un-
highlight the members.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Merged Joint button to display
the Select owing section prompt.

Select the right-hand end column to display the three joint pins
of the attached members.

The prompt changes to Select joints. Select the second joint

pin from the top, that is, the joint for bracing member, to
highlight the joint pin red.

Press the Return key to display the Merged Joint form.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 94 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select Gusset Plate Joints from the Specification options list.

Click the Gusset Plate button from the Joints Group section.

Click the Corner Gusset Plate button from the Joint section.

Leave the seven Design Parameters as the defaults.

Note that the Apply button is not yet enabled.

As the joint has only one attached member but has a second
member, that is, the top horizontal beam, that will constrain the
gusset plate, a reference member needs to be selected.

Click the Reference button below the Joint section and select
the top horizontal beam to enable the Apply button.

Click the Apply button on the Merged Joint form.

The joint is created given using the Design Parameters set in the
Merged Joint form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 95 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Clear the 3D View.

Make FRMW Star Plate the CE and add it to the 3D View.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button to ensure

all elements are connected correctly.

Click the SECTIONS > Connections > Check button again to

un-highlight the members.

Click the SECTIONS > Create > Merged Joint button to

display the prompt Select owing section.

Select the tubular column to display the four joint pins of the
attached members.

The prompt changes to Select joints. Select all of the joint

pins to highlight the joint pin red and press the Return key
to display the Merged Joint form.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 96 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select Star Plate Joints from the Specification options list.

Click the Star Plate button from the Joints Group section.

Click the Star Plate button from the Joint section.

Click the Detail button to display the Image form with an

image of the joint that will be applied.

Close the Image form, leave the Design Parameters as the

defaults and click the Apply button.

The prompt Select P-Line is displayed.

Select the NA Pline.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 97 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The joint is created given using the Design Parameters set in

the Merged Joint form.

4.6.2 Worked Example - Modifying Merged Joints

With the FRMW StarPlate displayed in the 3D View, select
the VIEW > Control > Look > South West Iso option.

Zoom into the junction between the attached members and

the Star Plate:

The Star Plate must be the same thickness as the attached

member’s flanges and the Star Plate needs to be wider.

Select the SECTIONS > Modify > Joint > Merged Joint option
to display the Select owning section prompt.

If a GENSEC is the CE the second prompt is displayed.

Select the owing tubular section to display a merged joint

pin at the merged joint origin. The prompt changes to Select
joints.

Select the pin to highlight it red and press the Return key to
change the prompt to Set specification. The Merged Joint
form is displayed with the joint pre-selected.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 98 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Modify the Design Parameters to:

Star Plt. Thk. 30mm

Star Plt. Width 100mm
Offset from Attached 75mm
Attached Flange Cutback 300mm
Fillet Rad. 100mm

30mm is the attached members flange thickness.

Click the Apply button on the Merged Joint form.

The prompt Select P-Line is displayed.

Select the NA Pline.

The joint is modified to increase the width of the Star Plate,

make the Star Plate thickness the same as the attached
member’s flanges and add a Fillet Radius.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 99 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

4.6.3 Worked Example - Deleting a Merged Joint

Clear the 3D View.

Make the FRMW LinearGusset the CE and add it to the 3D

View.

Select the SECTIONS > Delete > Delete > Merged Joint option to display the Select
owning section prompt.

If the owning section is the CE, the second prompt is displayed.

Select the owing beam to display the merged joint pin at

the merged joint origin. The prompt changes to Select
joints.

Select the pin to highlight it red and press the Return key to
delete the merged joint.

The attached members return to their original state, i.e.

they are connected to the owning member with their
individual JLDATU/PLDATU/FIXING constructs.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 100 of 208
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 5

5 Planar Elements
Unlike linear elements, planar elements are not catalogue driven but are modelled by creating a series of
points (vertices) to form a 2D shape that is extruded through the planar members thickness. Each panel or
plate is represented in Model by a Panel (PANE) element that is used to represent any sheet material in a
structural model.

5.1 Representation of Structural Panels (Plates)

The panel’s planar area is defined by a Panel Loop (PLOO) element.

A PLOO owns a series of Panel Vertex (PAVE)

elements positioned, generally, at each change
in direction of the 2D shape.

A line joining adjacent vertices defines each

panel edge.

The panel thickness is defined by the Height

attribute of the PLOO element, i.e. the distance
through which the 2D shape is extruded to form
the 3D plate.

A PANE can be justified Top, Centre or Bottom which determines which way the thickness is extruded. To
maintain correct justification the PAVE elements should be constructed in a clockwise direction. Specifying the
PAVE positions in an anti-clockwise direction will reverse the direction of extrusion if the PANE is justified Top
or Bottom.

PAVE elements may be given a +ve or –ve radius to

respectively create a convex or concave curve at the
vertex.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 101 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The PLOO definition may include arc elements to create curved edges. Arc, ring and disc shapes may also be
created, however, the shapes are all achieved by applying convex or concave curves to PAVE elements. See
Appendix A for further details of panel construction methods.

5.2 Worked Example – Creating the Roofing Plates and Cladding

Select FRMW FRMW/AREA02_WORKSHOP_RUNWAY_BEAM in Model Explorer to make it the current
element. Create a FRMW named AREA02_WORKSHOP_ROOFING and lock it as the Manual Storage.

Clear the 3D View. Add the four portal frames, the purlins and the cladding rails to the 3D View from Model
Explorer.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look >North East Iso option.

Open the Object Snapping Settings form. On the Object Snap tab, click the Clear All button on the Elements
and Graphics tabs and check the P-Line End Point checkbox. On the P-line Filters tab make LTOP and LBOT
the only visible Plines. Click the OK button on the form.

Click the DESIGN AIDS > Construction Aids > Line button
to display the First point prompt.

Snap to the LTOP Pline on the lower South purlin.

The prompt changes to Second point.

Snap to the LTOP Pline on the upper South purlin.

Press the Return key to finish the command and create a

design aid line between the tops of the purlins.

Repeat the process on the North side purlins.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 102 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Double click the purlin design aid line on the South side to
display the grips.

Use the Extend grip to extend the upper end of the line so
that it is past the apex of the roof beams.

Extend the lower end of the line so that it is past the outer
edge of the cladding rails.

Press the Esc key to remove the grips.

Repeat the process with the purlin design aid line on the
North side.

Select the lower South purlin and click the VIEW > Local Coordinate System > Current Element button to set
the LCS. Click the VW plane on the PowerCompass and toggle on Project Snaps onto LCS from the Status bar.

Toggling on the 3D View snap grid, either by clicking the button on the Status bar or pressing the F7 key,
can help to visualise the current LCS, especially when selecting planes.

Click the DESIGN AIDS > Construction Aids > Line button
to display the First point prompt

Snap to the outside edge (the LBOT Pline) on the upper

cladding rail on the South side.

Note that the snap is projected onto the LCS at the end of
the purlin.

The prompt changes to Second point.

Snap to the outside edge (the LBOT Pline) on the lower

cladding rail on the South side.

Press the Return key to create a design aid line between

the ends of the cladding rails co-planar with the lines
between the purlins.

Create a line between the cladding rails on the North side.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 103 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Extend the upper end of the vertical design aid lines on the
South and North sides so that they are past the lower ends
of the purlin lines.

Set the LCS back to World.

Open the Object Snapping Settings form and on the Object Snap tab uncheck the P-Line End Point checkbox
and check the Item checkbox. Click the OK button on the form.

Toggle Project Snaps onto LCS off on the Status bar.

Create a design aid line between the start points of the South column on gridline WS.1 and the South column
on gridline WS.4.

Select the four design aid lines previously created on the West end of the Workshop and click the HOME >
Modify > Mirror button.

Holding down the Shift key, right click to display the PowerWheel and click the More > Midpoint tile.

Snap to the midpoint of the design aid line between the bottom of the columns, toggle Ortho on (F8) and click
a point to the South of the line to mirror the aid lines to the East end of the Workshop.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 104 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

On the PLATES tab in the Defaults group, select 8mm from

the Panel Thickness options list, S275JR Steel from the
Material options list, PLATE from the Class options list and
Bottom (BOTT) from the Justification options list.

Select the top purlin on the South side of the

Workshop and click the VIEW > Local
Coordinate System > Current Element
button to set the LCS.

On the Object Snapping Settings form

uncheck the Item checkbox on the Elements
tab and check the Intersection checkbox on
the Graphics tab.

Click the OK button on the form.

Select the PLATES > Create > Panels >

Rectangle (2 points) option to display the
First corner prompt. Snap to the intersection
of the design aid lines at the apex of the roof.

Toggle ortho off (F8) The prompt changes to

Second corner. Snap to the intersection of
the sloping design aid line and the vertical
design aid line at the opposite corner of the
South side roof to create a single plate.

Double click the plate to display the grips.

Toggle ortho on (F8).

Holding down the Ctrl key, click the bottom

two Move grips on the panel to highlight
them in red.

Move the cursor away from the current

position and enter -75 in the V: textbox on
the in-canvas editor and press the Return
Key.

Press the Esc key to remove the grips from

the display.

The plate is extended 75mm, in the plane of

the roof, beyond the outside edge of the
cladding rails.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 105 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

With the plate as the current element, click the

PLATES > Modify > Split button to display the Select
element(s) to split with prompt.

Rotate the model to view it from below and select the

roof beams on gridlines WS.3 and WS.4.

Press the Return key to split the roof plate into three
separate plates.

Set the LCS back to World.

Select the three roofing plates and mirror them to the North side of the Workshop.

Unlock the Manual Storage and Save Work.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 106 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 8
Create the cladding for the North and South sides in a new FRMW named AREA02_WORKSHOP_CLADDING.

The cladding is 8mm thick S275JR Steel plate and is supported by the cladding rails. The cladding should extend
to the outside edge of the cladding rails on the East and West ends of the Workshop and to the underside of
the roofing plates. The cladding should be split at the columns on gridlines WS.2 and WS.3.

The roofing plates have been removed from the 3D View.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 107 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

5.2.1 Worked Example – Creating the Roofing Plates and Cladding (continued)
Create additional design aid lines on the West end of the
Workshop on the edge of the cladding rails to form the
shape of the end cladding plate.

Mirror the design aid lines to the East end of the

Workshop.

Remove the roofing plates and the side cladding from the
3D View.

Make sure the Graphics Intersection snap is toggled on and

click the NU plane on the PowerCompass.

Select the PLATES > Create > Panels > Multiple points
option.

At the First point prompt snap to the intersection of the

design aid lines in the North-West corner and continue to
snap in a clockwise direction on the other four points
required to form the end plate.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 108 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > South West Iso option
to view the East end of the Workshop.

Select the PLATES > Create > Panels > Multiple points
option to display the First point prompt.

Snap to the intersection of the design aid lines in the South-

East corner and continue to snap in a clockwise direction
on the other four points required to form the end plate.

Click the N button on the PowerCompass to view the South

elevation of the workshop.

Zoom into the middle cladding rail and note that the panel
is clashing with the cladding rail. This is because the panel
is justified the incorrectly, that is, Bottom instead of Top.

With the end plate as the CE, on the Properties form

expand the Specification heading and select Top from the
Surface justification options list.

The end plate no longer clashes with the cladding rail.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 109 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Open the Object Snapping Settings form, clear any current

snap settings and check the P-Line End Point checkbox on
the Elements tab.

On the P-line Filters tab make the LBOT, RBOT, LTOP and
RTOP Plines the only visible Plines.

Double click the East end plate to display the grips at the
vertices.

On the Status bar click the Additional grips button to

display the additional grips displayed on the panel.

Click the Add Vertex grip at the centre of the bottom

edge of the end plate to highlight it red.

Press F11 to toggle wireline mode on and snap to the end

of the outside Pline of the North internal column to
create a new vertex in the panel.

Click the Add Vertex grip between the grip at the new
vertex on the bottom edge of the plate.

Holding down the Shift key right click to display the

PowerWheel and click the P-Line Intersect tile.

Hover the cursor over the Pline on the outer edge of the
column until it highlights dark red.

Move the cursor and hover over the bottom Pline on the
outside edge of the cladding rail. When the Pline
highlights dark red and an intersection snap symbol is
displayed at the intersection of the Plines, click to accept
the snap.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 110 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the Add Vertex grip on the sloping edge of the

panel.

Snap to the equivalent Pline intersection on the other

internal column to create the opening in the panel.

Press F11 again to toggle shaded mode on.

The West end cladding panel should look like this:

The end cladding panels clash with the end of the purlins,
so the panels need to be cut around the outline of each of
the purlins.

Rather than create many extra vertices in the panel

boundary, negatives can be created in the panel.

On the Object Snapping Settings form uncheck the Item checkbox and check the P-Line End Point checkbox
on the Elements tab.

On the P-line Filters tab make LTOP, RTOP, LBOT and RBOT the only visible Plines. Click the OK button on the
form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 111 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Zoom into the end of a purlin.

Select the PLATES > Create > Negative > Multiple points
option to display the Select panel prompt.

Select the panel. The prompt changes to First point.

Snap to the end point of one of the Plines on the corner

of a purlin.

The prompt changes to Next point. Snap to the other

three Plines at the corners of the purlin in a clockwise
direction.

After the fourth snap press the Return key to finish the
command.

A negative is created around the purlin; however, the

panel should be offset from the purlin as the top edge is
co-linear.

With the cladding panel as the CE, right click to display

the PowerWheel, click the Navigate tile to display the
Navigate gallery and click the Negative tile.

Select the negative and click the PLATES > Modify >
Offset button to display a grip at the origin of the
negative and the Define offset distance prompt.

Enter 10 in the D: textbox, press the Return key to set the

distance and then the Esc key to deselect the negative.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 112 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The offset for the negative may be +ve or – ve..

The plate is now 10mm clear all around the purlin and can
now be copied to the other purlins.

Navigate to the negative again and select it. Right click in

the 3D View to display the Power Wheel.

Click the Context tile to display the menu and select the
Copy & Paste option to display the Specify base point
prompt.

Select the end of the LBOT Pline on the purlin with the
negative.

The prompt changes to Specify the second point. Select

the LBOT Pline on the next purlin.

Paste the negative to all purlins on the North side and

repeat the process for the South side purlins.

Press the Esc key to end the Copy & Paste command.

Repeat the process on the East end cladding.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 113 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Negatives in PANE elements are created using a secondary PLOO. The primary PLOO, via its PAVE
elements, describes the 2D shape of the panel and is the first PLOO below the PANE element in the
hierarchy. All subsequent PLOOs owned by the PANE describe the 2D shape of a hole in the panel.

Holes may only partially penetrate a panel by setting the Depth of the hole on creation or by modifying
the Height attribute of the PLOO for the hole using the Properties grid.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 114 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 9
Add SITE SITE-CIVIL-AREA02 to the 3D View. The Workshop column sit on a concrete plinth 300mm above
grade.

The bottom of the cladding is currently terminated at the top of the plinth. Modify the cladding so that it
terminates at grade.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 115 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

5.3 Bounded Plates

Bounded Plate functionality enables the creation of multiple plates bounded by a closed network of GENSEC
and/or PANE elements.

GENSECs that are used as bounding elements must be connected and PANEs that are used as bounding
elements must have one edge co-linear and co-planar with the end of any adjacent GENSECs. Bounding
elements are deemed to be any GENSEC or PANE element that has its top surface on a selected reference
plane. For GENSECs this optimally works for members that are justified on the top surface of the section, that
is, justified CTOP, LTOP and RTOP.

Bounding elements are only derived from the elements in the 3D View, therefore, any elements not in the 3D
View are not considered for bounding elements or notches.

GENSEC or PANE elements intersect the edges of a bounded plate may be used as ‘notches’ such that the edge
of the bounded plate is cut around the intersecting elements. When the intersecting element is a non-enclosed
profile Gtype, for example PFI, PFC, ANGL, etc., then the notch maybe a cut around the profile shape, a Profile
cut notch or around the bounding box of the profile, an Outline cut notch. For enclosed profile Gtypes, for
example CTUB, RTUB, BOXG, etc., then an Outline cut is always used.

The Bounded Plate Connectivity functionality enables created bounded plates

to be checked to ensure the connectivity to their bounding elements is valid,
correct certain boundary conditions and remove the connectivity for individual
plates, if required.

Bounded Plate connectivity is created and maintained to the bounding elements

by a Structural Connection Set (STCSET) that owns Structural Connection
(STCONN) elements, one for each of the bounding elements, which in turn own
two or more Structural Connection Vertex (STCVER) elements that give the start,
intermediate and end position of the connection and bounding element
reference

Bounded Plates may be created with three different boundary alignments:

Inside

Inside alignment creates the edges of the bounded plates at the inside edge of the bounding GENSECs. The
bounded plates are justified TOP such that the top of the plate is aligned with the reference plane, i.e. the top
of the bounded elements.

The edges of the bounded plates may be offset from the inside edge of the bounding GENSECs.

Centre

Centre alignment creates the edges of the bounded plates at the centreline edge of the bounding GENSECs.
The bounded plates are justified BOTT such that the bottom of the plate is aligned with the reference plane,
i.e. the top of the bounding elements.

The edges of the bounded plates may be offset from the centreline of the bounding GENSECs.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 116 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Where bounded plates are adjacent to another bounded plate, i.e. they share a bounding GENSEC, a gap may
be specified to create a gap between the bounded plates, the plates being offset from the centreline by half
of the specified gap.

Outside

Outside alignment creates the edges of the bounded plates at the outside edge of the bounding GENSECs. The
bounded plates are justified BOTT such that the bottom of the plate is aligned with the reference plane, i.e.
the top of the bounding elements.

The edges of the bounded plates may be offset from the outside edge of the bounding GENSECs.

Where bounded plates are adjacent to another bounded plate, i.e. they share a bounding GENSEC, the
bounded plates are Centre aligned.

The thickness of the bounded plates is taken from the Value specified in the PANELS > Defaults > Panel
Thickness options list. However, this may be modified using an in-command option.

5.3.1 Worked Example – Creating Bounded Plates

Select VIEW > Content > Remove > Remove All to
clear the 3D View.

Navigate to SITE BoundedPlates in Model Explorer

and add it to the 3D View.

Click the first Isometric view direction tile from

VIEW > Control > Look button gallery.

In Model Explorer navigate to the FRMW

LOWER_DECK_BP and lock the PLATES > Storage >
Manual Storage area.

Select 10mm from PLATES > Defaults > Panel

Thickness options list.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 117 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the PLATES > Create > Bounded button to

display the Select top surface of section prompt.

Zoom into one of the external primary beams on

the lower deck, place the Surface snap cursor over
the top flange of the beam and select the surface.
This is the reference plane that determines the
bounding elements and notches.

It is necessary to zoom into the required

surface to accurately establish the plane for
the bounded plates.

The prompt changes to Select bounding elements.

Zoom out and drag a selection rectangle around the

complete lower deck.

The elements whose top surface lay on the

reference plane are selected.

Members may be selected individually by

holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the
required members.

When the selection is complete, press the Return

key and the prompt changes to Select sections
and/or panels for notches.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 118 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Drag a selection rectangle around the complete

lower deck again.

This time only the top Lower Deck Star Plates on

the columns are selected.

When the selection is complete, press the Return

key and the prompt changes to Select boundary
alignment <Inside>.

The initial default alignment is Inside,

however, the last used alignment is any
session is used as the subsequent default.

Press the Return key to select the default Inside

alignment and to change the prompt to Specify
edge offset (include notches, Profile cut) or
<0mm>.

Enter 10mm in the textbox for the edge offset and

press the Return key.

The prompt changes to Confirm plate properties

<Thk. 10mm, Just. Top>.

Press the Return key again to confirm the

properties.

the bounded plates are created on the Lower

Deck.

Make STRU LOWER_DECK_PLATE the CE to

highlight the bounded plates.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 119 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Zoom into the North West corner of the Lower Deck.

Note that the bounded plate has been created on the

inside edges of the bounding GENSECs with the
specified 10mm offset and has been notched around
the column tubular column.

Unlock the storage area.

Select the VIEW > Control > Limits > Extents option.

In Model Explorer navigate to FRMW

UPPER_DECK_SECONDARY and remove it from the
3D View.

Navigate to FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP to make it the CE

and lock the storage area.

Click the PLATES > Create > Bounded button to display

the Select top surface of section prompt.

Zoom into one of the external primary beams on the

upper deck, place the Surface snap cursor over the top
flange of the beam and select the surface.

The prompt changes to Select bounding elements.

Zoom out and drag a selection rectangle around the

complete upper deck.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 120 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

When the selection is complete, press the Return

key and the prompt changes to Select sections
and/or panels for notches.

Drag a selection rectangle around the complete

upper deck again.

This time only the top columns of the Upper Deck

Structure are highlighted.

When the selection is complete, press the Return

key and the prompt changes to Select boundary
alignment <Inside>.

Press the Down cursor key to display the in-

command options and click the Outside tile.

Press the Return key to select the default Inside

alignment and to change the prompt to Specify edge
offset (include notches, Profile cut) or <0mm>

Press the Down cursor key to display the in-

command options and click the Outside tile.

The prompt changes to Specify edge offset (include

notches, Profile cut) or <10mm>.

Press the Return key to accept the 10mm offset.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 121 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The prompt changes to Specify gap between

adjacent plates (include notches, Profile cut)
10mm.

Press the Return key to accept the 10mm gap.

The prompt changes to Confirm plate properties

<Thk. 10mm, Just Bot.>

Press the Down arrow cursor key to display the in-

command options and click the Thickness tile an
display the Panel Thickness <10mm> prompt.

Enter 50 in the prompt textbox and press the Return

key.

The Confirm plate properties <Thk. 50mm, Just

Bot.> prompt is updated to display the new plate
thickness.

Press the Return key again to create the bounded

plate (grating) on the Upper Deck.

Zoom into the South West corner column of the

Upper Deck Structure.

Note that the bounded plates have been notched

around the column profile. This is a Profile notch,
that is, the bounded plates have been notched
around the column profile at the specified offset.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 122 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

With the FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP as the CE, select the PLATES >
Delete > Delete CE Members option to display the Delete Selected
Members form which displays the Upper Deck bounded plates.

Click the Delete All Member button to delete the Upper Deck
bounded plates.

Repeat the process to create the Upper Deck bounded

plates with the following change:

At the Specify edge offset (include notches, Profile

cut) or <10mm> prompt, press the Down arrow cursor
key to display the in-command options, click the
Outline cut tile and press the Return key.

Complete the process and zoom into the South West

corner column of the Upper Deck Structure again.

Note the bounded plates have been notched around

the bounding box of the column profile, that is, an
Outline notch.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 123 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

5.3.2 Worked Example – Bounded Plate Connectivity Checker

With the FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP as the CE, click the PLATES > Tools > Bounded Plate Connectivity button to
display the Bounded Plate Health Checker form.

Click the CE button at the top right-hand side of the form to display all of the bounded plates owned by the
FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP.

The form’s grid displays the Name, Status and Comment for each bounded plate. In this case all of the
bounded plates’ connectivity have passed the health check, denoted by a green check mark in the Status
column.

The total number of bounded plates is displayed as 28 at the bottom left of the form.

Select bounded plates 3, 4 and 5 from the grid and click the Navigate to Selected button on the form. The 3D
View zooms into the selected bounded plates.

The bounded plate numbers may vary.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 124 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the Highlight button on the form to highlight the selected bounded plates in the model.

Click the Highlight button again to unhighlight the selected bounded plates.

Click the Remove Connectivity button on the form to remove the connectivity from the three selected
bounded plates. Note that the number of bounded plates reported by the Bounded Health Plate Checker form
is now 25.

Move the external South West Upper Deck Primary beam up by 1000mm.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 125 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

With the FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP as the CE, click the CE button on the Bounded Plate Health Checker form
again and scroll to the bottom of the form. Four bounded pates now display an error icon in the Status column.
The Comment column states that the Bounding elements are not coplanar. Select the four bounded plates
with the error icon status and click the Highlight button.

The only choices are to move the bounding element, so it is again coplanar with the reference plane of the
bounded plates or remove the connectivity from the affected bounded plates.

Move the South West Upper Deck Primary beam back to its original position and with the FRMW
UPPER_DECK_BP as the CE click the CE button on the form. Note that all of the bounded plates now pass the
health check again.

Move the external South West Upper Deck Primary beam South by 500mm.

Moving the beam South by 500mm does not disconnect it from the column at each end. If the beam was
disconnected, then error comments rather than warning comments would be displayed for the two PANEs
connected to the ends of the beam and these two PANEs could not be updated

With the FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP as the CE, click the CE button on the Bounded Plate Health Check form
again and scroll down the form to find four bounded plates that display a warning icon in the Status column.
The Comment column states that the Position of bounding condition has changed.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 126 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the, now enabled, Update or Reset Selection button on the form. The bounding conditions are now
updated, and the bounded plates extended to meet the new conditions.

There are other error and warning comments

than may be displayed if the bounding
conditions are altered. The Update or Reset
Selection button is enabled when a warning
comment is displayed. Clicking the button
with resolve the bounding conditions,
however, there may be unexpected results.

Move the beam back to its original position and update the bounded plates again using the Bounded Plate
Health Checker form.

5.3.3 Worked Example – Splitting Bounded Plates

Bounded plates may be split using a structural element, that is, a GENSEC or PANE or by a defined plane.

The splitting of bounded plates uses the standard PLATES > Modify > Split command but an additional prompt
is introduced when bounded plates are encountered.

In Model Explorer navigate to FRMW

UPPER_DECK_SECONDARY and add it to the 3D
View.

Click the PLATES > Modify > Split button to

display the Select element(s) to split prompt.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 127 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the three bounded plates in the North

West corner of the upper deck and press the
Return key to display the Select elements to split
with (Gap width: 0mm) or <Plane> prompt.

Press the Down arrow cursor key to display the

in-command options and click the Gap tile to
display the Specify the gap width or <0mm>
prompt.

Enter 10 in the textbox and press the Return key

to set the gap width.

The prompt returns to Split element(s) to split

with (Gap width: 10mm) or <Plane> with the gap
value updated.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 128 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Press the F11 key to change to wireline mode.

Select a secondary beam in the North West bay

as the element to split with and press the Return
key to split the three selected bounded plates.

Press the F11 key again to return to shaded

mode.

The three selected plates have been split along

the centreline of the selected beam.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 129 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

In Model Explorer make FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP the CE and click the PLATES > Tools > Bounded Plate
Connectivity button to display the Bounded Plates Health Checker form.

Click the CE button on the form to populate the Bounded Plates grid.

Note that there are now 31 bounded plates. All bounded plates pass the health check, that is, the split plates
have their connectivity maintained.

Close the Bounded Plate Health Checker form.

Open the Object Snapping Settings form. On the Object Snaps tab, check the Distance Snap checkbox and
enter 500 in the adjacent textbox and press the Return key.

Click the Clear All button on the Elements tab and check the Item checkbox.

Click the OK button on the form.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 130 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the PLATES > Modify > Split button to display

the Select element(s) to split prompt.

Select the three bounded plates in the South West

corner of the upper deck and press the Return key to
display the Select element(s) to split with (Gap
width: 10mm) or <Plane> prompt.

Zoom into the three highlighted bounded plates and

press the Return key to select the Plane option and
display the Select first point (Gap: 10mm) prompt
together with a graphical representation of the
plane.

Hover the cursor over the North East corner vertex of

the Eastern plate and click to select the point 500m
South of the vertex.

The prompt changes to Select second point (Gap:

10mm) or <Finish>.

Hover over the vertex at the South East corner of the

Western plate and click to select the point 500m
North of the vertex

Copyright © 2020.
Page 131 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Press the Return key to finish the command.

Zoom to extents and note that the three panels are

split along the defined plane.

In Model Explorer make FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP the CE and click the PLATES > Tools > Bounded Plate
Connectivity button to display the Bounded Plates Health Checker form.

Click the CE button on the form to populate the Bounded Plates grid. Note that there are now 34 plates in the
Bounded Plates grid.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 132 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

All bounded plates pass the health check, that is, the split plates have their connectivity maintained.

Close the Bounded Plates Health Checker form.

5.3.4 Worked Example – Splitting Bounding Elements

The bounding elements of a bounded plates may be split using a structural element, a GENSEC or PANE, or by
a defined plane.

The splitting of bounding sections uses the standard SECTIONS > Modify > Split command.

In Model Explorer navigate to FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP and remove it from the 3D View.

On the Object Snapping Settings form, Object Snaps tab, uncheck the Distance Snap checkbox and check the
Significant snaps checkbox. On the Elements tab check the Item Mid Point checkbox.

Click the SECTIONS > Modify > Split button to display

the Select element(s) to split prompt.

Select the four primary beams in the Western half of

the upper deck.

After the first element is selected the prompt

changes to Select element(s) to split or <Next>.

Press the Return key to display the Select

element(s) to split with or <Plane> prompt.

Press the Return key to select the Plane option and

display the Select first point prompt.

Zoom into the selected beams and snap to a

midpoint between two secondary beams on the
North side of the Western primary beam and click to
select the point.

The prompt changes to Select second point or

<Finish>.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 133 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Snap to a midpoint between two secondary beams

on the North side of the Eastern selected primary
beam and click to select the point.

The prompt changes to Select third point or

<Finish>.

Snap to a midpoint between two secondary beams

on the North side of the Eastern selected primary
beam and click to select the point.

The prompt changes to Select third point or

<Finish>.

Press the Return key to finish the command.

The four primary beams are split on the line of the

defined plane.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 134 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

In Model Explorer navigate to FRMW

UPPER_DECK_BP and add it to the 3D View.

Click the PLATES > Tools > Bounded Plate

Connectivity button to display the Bounded Plate
Health Checker form.

Click the PLATES > Tools > Bounded Plate Connectivity button to display the Bounded Plate Health Checker
form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 135 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the CE button on the form to display the upper deck bounded plates in the Bounded Plates grid.

Note that some of the plates have a warning status with the comment Bounding conditions have changed.

Select all of the rows in the grid that have the warning status and click the Update or Reset Selection button
on the form. All of the selected entries are updated to a Pass status and comment, that is, the connectivity
has been updated and maintained.

Close the Bounded Plate Health Checker form.

In Model Explorer navigate to FRMW UPPER_DECK_BP and remove it from the 3D View.

Click the SECTIONS > Modify > Split button to

display the Select element(s) to split prompt.

Select the four, previously split, primary beams in

the Western half of the upper deck.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 136 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Press the Return key to display the Select

element(s) to split with or <Plane> prompt.

Zoom in to the selected primary beams and

select a secondary beam in the middle of the
South West upper deck bay.

The prompt changes to Select element(s) to split

with or <Next>.

Press the Return key to split the selected

primary beams on the selected secondary beam.

Zoom to extents.

In Model Explorer navigate to FRMW

UPPER_DECK_BP and add it to the 3D View.

Click the PLATES > Tools > Bounded Plate

Connectivity button to display the Bounded Plate
Health Checker form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 137 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the CE button on the form to display the upper deck bounded plates in the Bounded Plates grid.

Note that some of the plates have a warning status with the comment Bounding conditions have changed.

Select all of the rows in the grid that have the warning status and click the Update or Reset Selection button
on the form. All of the selected entries are updated to a Pass status and comment, that is, the connectivity
has been updated and maintained.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 138 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Copyright © 2020.
Page 139 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

This page left intentionally blank

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 140 of 208
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 6

6 Hole Management
On a typical project it is necessary for designers to create holes in linear and planar elements. The Hole
Management application may be used to assist designers in managing the processes of hole creation and
modification.

In Hole Management penetration holes are specified and requested by the penetrating discipline, for example:
Piping, HVAC or Equipment. Reviewing of hole requests is provided by the discipline that owns the penetrated
element, normally Structures. For cases where a penetration is required, say, for a steel section through a
deck/floor plate, the hole would be specified, requested and approved by the Structures discipline.

The specification of a penetration hole by the relevant discipline in the appropriate Model application creates
a ‘virtual’ hole in the penetrated element, consisting of a FRMW and two FIXINGs. Each FIXING has a
Specification Reference (Spref) attribute that points to the hole definition in the catalogue. An Association
(ASSOC) element that references all the hole elements is also created.

Once the ‘virtual’ hole has been created the penetrating discipline enters the Hole Management application
and requests the hole. The owner of the panel, normally the Structures discipline, then reviews and approves
(or rejects) the hole request using the mechanism provided by the Hole Management application.

The act of approving the request creates the ‘actual’ hole as a PFIT in a PANE or a FIT in a GENSEC. The Hole
Management application checks and validates the hole using association restrictions and stores data on the
hole history and status. Only valid holes may be approved. For a structural penetration the Structural Designer
may be both the requester and approver. Specific company procedures, controlled by Data Access Control
(DAC), may be required if the Originator and Reviewer need to be different personnel.

See Appendix A for details of the Hole Management Request and Review workflows.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 141 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

6.1 Worked Example – Managed Penetration Holes

Hole Management workflow depends on the various discipline elements being in different databases with no
write access from other disciplines, for example: Structural Designers do not have write access to Piping
components and vice-versa; this would normally require the user to be logged in as a specific discipline
Designer to perform the Request/Approval workflow for a managed hole.

For this worked example the Setup Tools tab on the Training Setup form enables users to switch to the
appropriate discipline for the request/approval workflow without exiting and re-entering E3D Design.

Click the TOOLS > Training > Setup button

to display the Training Setup form.

Click the Setup Tools tab.

The Current MDB and Current User details

are displayed in the form.

Enter A in the Current User Password

textbox.

Enter A.PIPER in the New User Name textbox and A in the New User Password textbox.

Click the Switch User button and close the form.

Select the PIPING discipline from the Discipline options list in the Quick Access Toolbar and click the PIPING
tab.

Switching users clears the 3D View. Navigate to STRU/AREA02_WORKSHOP_GRID in Model Explorer and add
it to the 3D View.

Navigate to ZONE-PIPING-AREA02 and add it to the 3D View.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > North East Iso option.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 142 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the PIPING > Penetrate > Pipe > Create Penetration option
to display the Create Penetration form.

Click the Pick Penetrated Items button on the form and select the
West end cladding panel. The panel name is displayed in the list.

Click the Pick Penetrating Items button on the form and select
pipe 0350-FIRE-52/B1. The branch name is displayed in the list.

Leave the Specification options list set to Penetrations and click

the OK button on the form to display the Hole Management –
Definition form.

Multiple Penetrated Items and multiple Penetrating Items may be selected. The same penetration hole is
applied to all selected penetrating items.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 143 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Leave the Class as Standard Types and the Type as

Circular Hole –Type D.

Enter 25 in the Clearance textbox, this creates a 25mm

clearance around the pipe.

For a circular hole the only parameter is Diameter which

is automatically set to the outside diameter of the
penetrating pipe + 2 x the clearance value.

If multiple pipes of differing outside diameters are

selected, the diameter value defaults to 100. The
user must then enter a suitable diameter for all
pipes or re-select the pipes individually.

The ‘virtual’ hole shape is displayed on the panel showing

the diameter specified hole diameter.

The Set to Minimum button resets the Hole shape

parameters to the minimum value(s) required to
create a valid hole

Leave the X Offset, Y offset and Rotation values at 0 and

the Purpose as PIPE.

The Single or Merged hole penetrations frame at the top of the form enables individual single holes or a
merged hole to be specified for multiple penetrating items by selecting the appropriate radio button. As
there is only one penetrating item in this example the options are disabled.

Click the OK button on the form.

The ‘virtual’ hole shape is remains displayed.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 144 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the West end cladding panel to

make it the current element.

Select PIPING > Penetrate > Holes >

Hole Manager to display the Hole
Association Manager form.

The Hole Association Filter

mechanism may be used to filter
the displayed Hole Associations
using the radio buttons and
options lists.

Click the Apply filter link label to display

the Hole Association for the cladding
panel in the list.

If the panel contains more than one

penetration they would all be listed
using the current filtering criteria.

Make sure the Hole Association is highlighted blue and right click it to display
the pop-up menu. Select the Validate option to initiate validation checks and
the Valid column changes from Not Checked to Passed (assuming the checks
are valid).

With the Hole Association highlighted click the Manage Selected Holes link label to display the Hole
Management form.

If there is more than one Hole Association in the list any number may be selected to be displayed on the
Hole Management form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 145 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The selected hole(s) are displayed in the List of

holes.

No entry in the Status column indicates that

the hole has not been previously managed.

The Hole Management form has three tabs:

• Hole Validation Results

• Selected Hole Data

• Hole History

The Hole Validation Results tab displays the results of the tests on the hole association restrictions. If one or
more of the tests fail, then the whole association fails, and the hole cannot be requested.

Click the Selected Hole Data tab. All elements involved in the penetration are listed.

The Hole Comment textbox enables a comment to be added to the latest action by entering an
appropriate comment and clicking the Save button. Only the latest action comment is kept as no provision
is made to store them.

Below the Hole Comment textbox are the Originator Tasks

and Reviewer Tasks link labels. Certain tasks are active
dependant on the status of the hole and the write access of
the user.

In this case only the Request and Delete Entry Reviewer tasks
are active as no other course of action is possible.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 146 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the Request link label and click the Yes button on the
displayed Confirm form.

Click the Hole History tab and note that an entry has been made detailing the change in status of the hole.

Note that the Originator tasks are now inactive. Return to the Hole Association Manager form then dismiss
the form.

Click the TOOLS > Training > Setup button to display the Training Setup form and click the Setup Tools tab.

Enter A in the Current User Password

textbox.

Enter A.STEELMAN in the New User Name

textbox.

Enter A in the New User Password textbox.

Click the Switch User button and close the form. Click the Yes button on the savework Confirm form and click
the OK button on the subsequent message. Close the Training Setup form.

Select the STRUCTURES discipline from the Quick Access Toolbar options list.

Add the STRU STRU/AREA02_WORKSHOP_GRID and ZONE ZONE-PIPING-AREA02-WORKSHOP to the 3D

View.

Select the VIEW > Control > Look > North East Iso option.

Select PLATES > Penetrate > Holes > Hole Manager to display the Hole Association Manager form. Make the
West end cladding panel the current element and click the Apply filter link label to display the Hole
Associations. Select the displayed hole and click the Manage Selected Holes link label to display the Hole
Management form.

Right click on the entry in the List of holes and select Focus on Hole from the pop-up menu. The penetration
is centred in the 3D View.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 147 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the Selected Hole Data tab and right

click on the first FIXING in the data list
and select Add to 3D view from the pop-
up menu

The ‘virtual’ hole fixing is displayed in the 3D View.

In the Reviewer Tasks the Approve and Reject options are now active.

Click the Approve link label and click the Yes button on the Confirm
form.

The ‘virtual’ hole FIXINGs have disappeared and the ‘actual’ hole has
been created in the cladding panel.

The ‘virtual’ hole FIXINGs have not been deleted but removed from
the 3D View. There are retained in event of the hole being
modified.

Click the Hole History tab and note the new STATUS column entry.

Close the Hole Management form.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 148 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Exercise 10
Create penetrations for the remaining pipes penetrating the West end cladding panel. Use Circular Hole –
Type D with Sleeve from the Standard Type Class for the penetrations.

Use a Clearance of 20mm, a Sleeve Height of 150mm and Sleeve Thickness of 6mm.

Reject the non-sleeved penetration created in the worked example and modify it to be a sleeved penetration
with the same parameters as other five pipe penetrations in the West end cladding panel.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 149 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

6.2 Worked Example – Non-penetration Managed Holes

Managed holes that do not involve a penetrating item made be created in PANE elements, for example access
holes, and the managed hole may be associated with another element. Non penetration managed holes fall
into two categories:

• Free Holes – these are standard hole shapes, some of which include sleeves or kicker plates. A User
defined shape is also available.

• Fitting Holes – these are managed holes created by a catalogue fitting, for example: a window, door,
hatch, access cover, etc.

Free Holes may be created by any discipline, however, Fitting Holes can only be created from the PLATES
tab. Both types of non-penetration hole go through the same Request and Approval workflow as described
for penetration holes.

Make sure the user is A.STEELMAN and the STRUCTURES discipline is selected. Remove any piping
components from the 3D View. Select the VIEW > Control > Look > North East Iso option.

Select PLATES > Penetrate > Holes > Create Hole option to
display the Create Hole form.

Click the Pick Penetrated Panel or Floor link label and select the
West end cladding panel near the middle of the panel midway
between the lower and middle cladding rails.

Select Rectangular Hole – Type HR from the Hole Type options

list and click the Apply button.

The Free Hole Definition from is displayed with the selected hole
type current and default hole shape parameters.

The hole is located at the position selected on the panel and is

displayed in the Hole Position and Orientation section of the
form and graphically on the PANE.

The postion dimensions are from the origin of the panel

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 150 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Enter 500 in the Width and Height textboxes and leave the
Radius, that is, the corner radius of the hole, at 25mm.

Enter 4278 in the X Offset textbox, i.e. the centre of the

panel, 1200 in the Y offset textbox and 0 in the Rotation
textbox. The graphics position is updated.

The hole position may be aligned in X or Y with other

elements by clicking the appropriate link label and
selecting a position using the Positioning Control form.
Clicking the Explicit Position button enables a new
position to be specified using the same form.

Click the Associated Elements tab on the form.

Clicking the Pick Associated Elements link label enables

other elements in the model, for example: a piece of
equipment, to be associated with the managed free hole.

For this worked example no other elements will be

associated with the free hole.

Click the OK button to create the ‘virtual’ hole.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 151 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Select the PLATES > Penetrate > Holes > Hole Manager option to display the Hole Association Manager form.

Make the West end panel the current element and click the Apply filter link label.

A new association is displayed in the Hole Associations list with the Discipline GEN.

Highlight the association, right click and select Validate from the pop-up menu. The Status will change to
Passed.

Click the Managed Selected Holes link label to display

the Hole Management form.

Click the Request link label under the Originator

Tasks.

As the hole has been created in the STRUCTURES

discipline, being logged in as A.STEELMAN will
enable the hole to be requested and approved
without the need to change user.

Click the Approve link label and click the Yes button
on the Confirm form to create the hole in the panel.

Once approved the Redundant and Reject link labels are active. The Originator may decide that the hole
is no longer required and makes it redundant. Once redundant the Reviewer task Agree Redundant is
active.

Once the hole has been agreed redundant only the Delete Entry task is available which removes all
components of the hole. There are other scenarios where various combinations of Originator or Reviewer
tasks are active. See Appendix A for Managed Hole workflows.

Click the Reject link label and the Yes button on the Confirm form.

Click the Delete Entry link label and the Yes button on the Confirm form to remove the hole

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 152 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Click the PLATES > Penetrate > Fitting Hole button to

display the Hole Fittings form.

Select Managed-Access-Holes from the Table options list.

Select STANDARD_DOOR from the displayed list. The

fitting is displayed in the form’s 3D View.

Click the Properties button to display the Modify

Properties form.

Enter 30 in the Open angle textbox and click the OK

button to set the design parameter.

Click the Pick Penetrated Item button and select a

position in the centre of the West end cladding panel.

The fitting position is displayed in the Hole Position and Orientation section and graphically on the cladding
panel, similar to the free hole created previously.

Enter 4278 in the X Offset textbox, that is, the centre of the panel. Enter 300 in the Y offset textbox, that is,
the plinth height of the Workshop. Enter 90 in the Rotation textbox. The graphics is updated to reflect the
values.

Click the OK button on the form, to create the fitting hole.

Select PLATES > Penetrate > Holes > Hole Manager to display the Hole Association Manager form.

Make the West end panel the current element and click the Apply filter link label.

A new association is displayed in the Hole Associations list with the Discipline FITT.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 153 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Highlight the association, right click and select Validate from the pop-up menu. The Status will change to
Failed.

Click the Managed Selected Holes link label to display

the Hole Management form.

Hover the cursor over the Failed result entries to

display a tooltip with additional information.

The Request link label is active, however, if the hole is

requested with failed validation tests a warning
message is displayed.

Click the Delete Entry link label and click the Yes
button on the Confirm form. to delete the fitting hole.
Close the Hole Management form.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 154 of 208
All rights reserved.
 APPENDIX A

A Additional Information
This appendix includes information of less frequently used functionality available in the STRUCTURES
discipline, particularly the SECTIONS and PLATES tabs, which is not detailed in the main body of this training
guide.

A1 Projected Start/End Snap

With Projected Start/End snap OFF, an Item snap is to the

actual start or end point of a GENSEC

Similarly, with Projected Start/End snap OFF, an Item Mid

Point snap is to the midpoint between the actual start and
end point of a GENSEC, or a JLDATU if Significant snap is
ON.

With Projected Start/End snap ON, an Item snap is from

the JLDATU position of the start or end point on the
owning GENSEC.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 155 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Similarly, with Projected Start/End snap ON, an Item Mid

Point snap is to the midpoint between the JLDATU
position of the start or end point on the owning GENSEC,
or a JLDATU if Significant snap is ON.

A2 Pline Filtering
Plines can be selected and filtered from the P-line Filters tab on the Object Snapping Settings form.

The form displays the fourteen Standard Plines applicable to all Gtypes and System Plines which are Gtype
specific and only applicable to some profiles.

Additional Custom Plines may be added to the list, for example Plines from old or client catalogues, by
entering a PKEY and Description at the bottom of the form and clicking the Add button.

The Visible checkbox next to each Pline determines whether it is visible, when appropriate, in the 3D View.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 156 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

A3 Joint Dominance (Jfree attribute)

The JLDATU in a connection’s JLDATU/PLDATU/FIXING construct is positioned along the justification line of
the connection’s owning section from the start position of the section using the JLDATUs Zdistance attribute.

A FIXING element has a Jfree attribute which can be set to either True or False. The attribute determines if
the distance of the JLDATU that owns the FIXING from the start of the owning section will be maintained if
the GENSECs start position is changed.

If Jfree is set to False, the Zdistance attribute of the JLDATU will be modified if the start position of the
GENSEC changes, that is, the FIXING position will not change and the position of the end of the attached
section will be maintained.

If Jfree is set to True, the Zdistance attribute of the JLDATU will be maintained if the start position of the
GENSEC changes, i.e. the FIXING position change and the position of the end of the attached section will be
modified.

The Jfree attribute is set to False by default.

The default may be changed using PROJECT > Options >

Discipline > Structural.

When Jfree is false, displayed joint pins are coloured cyan.

Moving the bottom, that is, the start position of the column
down maintains the position of the JLDATU and the attached
section ends are not moved.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 157 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Selecting joints pins and changing the Joint dominance

attribute to True in the Properties form colours the joint pins
orange.

This colour is maintained for joint pins where Jfree is True.

With the two column connections having their Jfree attribute

set to True, moving the bottom, that is, the start position of the
column down moves the position of the JLDATU and the
attached section ends are moved.

In this scenario some of the connected sections on the

horizontal framing have the Jfree attributes of their FIXINGs set
to True.

Moving the bottom, that is, the start position of the column
down moves the position of the JLDATU and the attached
section ends are moved.

Setting the Jfree attribute to True can, in the correct

circumstances, assist in modification of modelled section,
however, it can have unexpected results if the effect of the
Jfree attribute is not considered.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 158 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

A4 Linear Element Creation Methods

The following describes the available creation methods for different forms of a GENSEC.

• The SECTIONS > Create > Straight options list has the following creation methods:

• Single creates a single GENSEC

• Continuous creates any number of GENSECs with the end position of the first being the start position
of the second, etc.

• Repeat creates any number of GENSECs using Single mode by automatically repeating the command.

The SECTIONS > Create > Curved options list has the following creation methods:

• Free Definition creates a curved GENSEC with as many points as required and variable curve angles

• Fixed Angle creates a curved GENSEC with as many points as required at a fixed curve angle

The SECTIONS > Create > Arc options list has the following creation methods:

• Centre + Sweep requires a centre point, diameter (or radius), start angle and sweep angle

• Ends + Radius requires a start point, end point and a third point to define the arc direction

• Three Point requires three points through which the arc passes

• Semi-Circle requires a start and end point and a point to define the arc direction

Copyright © 2020.
Page 159 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The SECTIONS > Create > Ring options list has the following creation methods:

• Centre + requires a centre point and a diameter (or radius)

• Three Point requires three points through which the arc passes

• Two Point requires two points through which the arc passes. The second point defines the ring
diameter

A5 Modifying Linear Elements

Double clicking a GENSEC displays modification grips. Each type of GENSEC has its own set of grips:

Straight GENSEC

Curved GENSEC

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 160 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Arc GENSEC

Ring GENSEC

The following gives a brief description of the SECTIONS tab, Modify group options not detailed in the main
body of this training guide.

The SECTIONS > Modify > Extend button enables selected GENSEC end(s) to be extended to a plane
constructed by specifying one, two or three points or by selecting a panel.

The SECTIONS > Modify > Fillet button enables two GENSECs to be merged into one GENSEC with a fillet
radius.

The SECTIONS > Modify > Split button enables single or multiple GENSECs to be split by single or multiple
GENSECs, single or multiple PANEs or a plane constructed by specifying one, two or three points. The selected
elements to split on do not physically need to intersect with the GENSEC(s) selected to be split, however, the
projection of the element(s) or the plane must intersect them.

Where GENSECs are used to split on and they clash with the GENSEC(s) to be split, the GENSECs will be
automatically connected.

The SECTIONS > Modify > Splice button enables single or multiple GENSECs to be spliced by single PANE or
a plane constructed by specifying one, two or three points. The selected PANE or constructed plane must
intersect the GENSEC(s) selected to be split.

The SECTIONS > Modify > Merge button enables two co-linear GENSECs to be merged into a single GENSEC.
The resulting GENSEC inherits the attributes of the first GENSEC selected.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 161 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

A6 Planar Element Creation Methods

The following describes the available creation methods for different forms of a PANE.

The PLATES > Create > Panels button options list has the following creation options:

• Rectangle (2 points) creates a rectangular panel by specifying opposite corners of the rectangle

• Multiple points creates a panel by specifying multiple vertex points. This creation method has
options to create fillets at vertices and arc segments during the panel shape definition.

The PLATES > Create > Arc button options list has the following creation options:

Centre + Sweep requires a centre point, inner diameter (or radius), panel width, start angle and sweep angle

• Three Point requires three outside circumference points on the arc and a panel width

• Two Point requires a start diameter point, an end diameter point and a panel width

The PLATES > Create > Ring button options list has the following creation options:

• Centre + requires a centre point, outside diameter (or radius) and a panel width

• Three Point requires three outside circumference points on the ring and a panel width

• Two Point requires a start diameter point, an end diameter point and a panel width

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 162 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The PLATES > Create > Disc button options list has the following creation options:

• Centre + requires a centre point and a diameter (or radius)

• Three Point requires three circumference points on the disc

• Two Point requires a start diameter point and an end diameter point

The PLATES > Create > Negative options list has some of the same creation methods used for panel creation.

A7 Panel Specifications
Although planar elements are not catalogue driven it is still possible to use a specification when creating a
PANE element.

Providing valid panel specification(s) are present in Paragon, they will be available in the PLATES > Defaults
> Specification options list.

A panel specification restricts the available thickness values for the panel in the PLATES > Defaults > Panel
Thickness options list to those specified by the specification in Paragon and disables the ability to enter a
value in the options list.

Panel specifications have the material reference set in Paragon so the PLATES > Defaults > Material options
list is disabled.

Using a panel specification removes the Thickness in- command option so that the user cannot modify the
panel thickness whilst creating the panel.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 163 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

No panel specification:

With panel specification:

A8 Modifying Planar Elements

Double clicking a PANE displays modification grips. Each type of PANE has its own set of grips:

Grips are displayed on the justification line of the panel.

Rectangular PANE

Multiple point PANE (with arc segment)

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 164 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Arc PANE

Ring PANE

Disc PANE

Copyright © 2020.
Page 165 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The use of the grips is demonstrated in the following images:

Pressing and holding the Ctrl key before selecting a grip enables more than one grip to be selected. Selecting
the two grips at either end of an edge enables the edge to be stretched/moved.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 166 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Clicking the Additional grips button on the Status bar toggles on other grips that can be used to modify the
PANE.

Clicking the Additional Vertex grip, which occurs at the midpoint between two vertices, adds a new vertex
to the PLOO which can then be modified.

Each vertex has three grips:

Copyright © 2020.
Page 167 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The Radius grip enables a +ve or –ve radius, to create a convex or concave curve, to be added to the vertex
or to change the radius where one already exists.

The Chamfer grip enables a chamfer to be added to the vertex. The selected vertex is moved and a new
vertex created.

The same grips are displayed and function in the same way on similar shapes for negatives in a PANE.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 168 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

A9 Panel Fittings
Panel fittings are created in the model in a similar way to Section fittings described in section 4.2 of this
training guide.

Panel fittings are created by clicking the PLATES >

Create > Fitting button to display a Select panel
prompt.

When a panel is selected the Panel Fitting form is

displayed and the prompt changes to Select specification.

The form operates in the same way as the Section Fitting

form described earlier in this training guide, that is:

• Select a Specification from the options list

• Select a fitting type from the Fitting Group section

• Select a fitting from the Fitting section

• Modify Design Parameters, if any, as required

• Click the Apply button

A ‘ghost’ of the fitting is displayed on

the panel with ditance and angle
feedback from the panel origin.

A position may be specified graphically

or by entering values in the U: and V:
textboxes.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 169 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

In-command options enable the

angle and justification of the fitting
to be modified and the fitting
creation to be repeated.

Double clicking the panel fitting twice displays Move

and Rotation grips.

The angle may also be modified on the Properties

form.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 170 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

A10 Hole Management Workflows

Hole Creation/Modification Workflow

In this workflow the Originator creates the ‘virtual’ hole and then either requests it or deletes the entry.

Once requested, the Originator may cancel the request and delete the entry prior to it being reviewed.

If requested and not cancelled or deleted, the Reviewer checks the hole details and, if acceptable, approves
it, thereby creating the ‘actual’ hole.

If the Reviewer rejects the hole, the Originator may re-request the hole without modification, modify the
‘virtual’ hole and then re-request it, cancel the request or delete the entry.

Redundant Hole Workflow

In this workflow the ‘actual’ hole has been created. The Originator decides that the hole is now redundant
and sets its status to Redundant.

Before the Originator can delete the entry the Reviewer must agree that the hole is redundant.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 171 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Rejected Hole Workflow

In this workflow the ‘actual’ hole has been created. The Reviewer, possibly due to changed conditions,
decides to reject the hole. The Originator has the option to:

• Modify the hole and re-request it, whereby it will go through the normal review and approval cycle.

• Cancel the request, in which case the ‘virtual’ hole details remain

• Delete the entry, in which case the entire hole is deleted, and the ‘virtual’ hole and association
deleted. The panel restored to its original state.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 172 of 208
All rights reserved.
 APPENDIX B

B Profile Generic Types (Gtype)

This appendix details the parameters and Plines for the available profile Gtypes.

B1 Standard Gtypes

Gtype Description

PFI Parallel Flange I

PFC Parallel Flange Channel

PFT Parallel Flange Tee

TFI Tapered Flange I

TFC Tapered Flange Channel

TFT Tapered Flange Tee

TWT Tapered Web Tee

TFWT Tapered Flange, Tapered Web Tee

ANGL Equal or Unequal Angle

RTUB Rectangular or Square Tube

CTUB Circular Tube

ZED Z Profile

CEE Flanged C Profile

BFLA Bulb Flat

PLTG Plate Girder

BOXG Box Girder

FBAR Flat Bar

RBAR Round Bar

HBAR Hex Bar

ANGD Double Angles

Copyright © 2020.
Page 173 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

B2 Parameters and Dkey attributes for Standard Gtypes

A standard data set is used for all standard Gtypes. Where a parameter has no meaning for a Gtype it is set
to 0.

No. Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

1 Depth DPTH Geometry
2 Width A WIDA Geometry
3 Width B WIDB Geometry
4 Width C WIDC Geometry
5 Web Thickness WTHK Geometry
6 Flange Thickness A FTKA Geometry
7 Flange Thickness B FTKB Geometry
8 Radius A RADA Geometry
9 Radius B RAD B Geometry
10 Radius C RAD C Geometry
11 CofG X Axis Offset CGXO Geometry
12 CofG Y Axis Offset CGYO Geometry
13 Flange Thickness Centre Offset FTCO Geometry
14 Flange Slope (degrees) FSLO Geometry
`15 Web Slope (degrees) WSLO Geometry
16 Gage Line A GLNA Data
17 Gage Line B GLNB Data
18 Gage Line C GLNC Data
19 Maximum Bolt Diameter A MBDA Data
20 Maximum Bolt Diameter B MBDB Data
21 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
22 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
23 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 174 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

B3 Plines for Standard Gtypes

All standard Gtypes will have a common set of fourteen Standard Plines.

Nine Plines are at the corners, mid points and the centre of the bounding box.

One Pline is at the Neutral Axis of the profile and four Plines are positioned where a line drawn through the
Neutral Axis in the X and Y directions cross the bounding box.

For symmetrical profiles some Plines are coincident whilst asymmetrical profiles will have no co-incident
Plines.

Gtype specific Plines are added to the Standard Plines. These are required for trimming purposes.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 175 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Standard Plines

Pkey Description
LBOT Left Bottom
CBOT Centre Bottom
RBOT Right Bottom
LMID Left Middle
CMID Centre Middle
RMID Right Middle
LTOP Left Top
CTOP Centre Top
RTOP Right Top
NA Neutral Axis
BNA Bottom Neutral Axis
LNA Left Neutral Axis
RNA Right Neutral Axis
TNA Top Neutral Axis

Notes:

1. The setting of the PLIN element Cconnect attribute to ANY for trimming purposes on Standard Plines
is Gtype dependant.

Gtype Specific Plines

Pkey Description Gtype Cconnect

NAL Neutral Axis Left PFI, PFT, TFI, TFT ANY
NAR Neutral Axis Right PFI, PFT, TFI, TFT ANY
IMID Inside Middle ANGL, PFC, TFC ANY
IBOT Inside Bottom ANGL ANY
AA Circumference 0° CTUB ANY
BB Circumference 15° CTUB unset
CC Circumference 30° CTUB unset
DD Circumference 45° CTUB unset
EE Circumference 60° CTUB unset
FF Circumference 75° CTUB unset
GG Circumference 90° CTUB unset
HH Circumference 105° CTUB Unset
II Circumference 120° CTUB unset

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 176 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

JJ Circumference 135° CTUB unset

KK Circumference 150° CTUB unset
LL Circumference 165° CTUB unset
MM Circumference 180° CTUB unset
NN Circumference 195° CTUB unset
OO Circumference 210° CTUB unset
PP Circumference 225° CTUB unset
QQ Circumference 240° CTUB unset
RR Circumference 255° CTUB unset
SS Circumference 270° CTUB unset
TT Circumference 285° CTUB unset
UU Circumference 300 CTUB unset
VV Circumference 315° CTUB unset
WW Circumference 330° CTUB unset
XX Circumference 345° CTUB unset
NAAA NA 0° CTUB ANY
NACC NA 30° CTUB ANY
NAEE NA 60° CTUB ANY
NAGG NA 90° CTUB ANY
NAII NA 120° CTUB ANY
NAKK NA 150° CTUB ANY
NAMM NA 180° CTUB ANY
NAOO NA 210° CTUB ANY
NAQQ NA 240° CTUB ANY
NASS NA 270° CTUB ANY
NAUU NA 300° CTUB ANY
NAWW NA 330° CTUB ANY
LTFL Left Top Flange PLTG, BOXG ANY
RTFL Right Top Flange PLTG, BOXG ANY
LBFL Left Bottom Flange PLTG, BOXG ANY
RBFL Right Bottom Flange PLTG, BOXG ANY
ITFL Inside Top Flange Left PFI, PLTG unset
ITFR Inside Top Flange Right PFI, PFC, PLTG unset
IBFR Inside Bottom Flange Right PFI, PFC, PLTG unset
IBFL Inside Bottom Flange Left PFI, PLTG unset
HTLA Hole Top Left Gage A PFI, PFT, TFI, TFT, TWT, TFWT, ZED, PLTG BOLT

Copyright © 2020.
Page 177 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

HTLB Hole Top Left Gage B PFI, PFT, PLTG BOLT

HTLC Hole Top Left Gage C PFI, PFT, ANGL BOLT
HTRA Hole Top Right Gage A PFI, PFC, PFT, TFI, TFC, TFT, TWT, TFWT,PLTG BOLT
HTRB Hole Top Right Gage B PFI, PFT, PLTG BOLT
HTRC Hole Top Right Gage C PFI, PFT BOLT
HBLA Hole Bottom Left Gage A PFI, TFI, PLTG BOLT
HBLB Hole Bottom Left Gage B PFI, ANGL, PLTG BOLT
HBLC Hole Bottom Left Gage C PFI, PLTG BOLT
HBRA Hole Bottom Right Gage A PFI, PFC, TFI, TFC, ANGL, ZED, PLTG BOLT
HBRB Hole Bottom Right Gage B PFI, PLTG BOLT
HBRC Hole Bottom Right Gage C PFI, PLTG BOLT
IFAT Inside Face Top ANGL unset
IFAB Inside Face Bottom ANGL unset

Notes:

2. All Plines except ITFL, ITFR, IBFR and IBFL have the Level attribute set to 9 10. Plines ITFL, ITFR, IBFR
and IBFL have their Level attribute set to 99 99.

3. The PLIN element Pvifilter attribute is set to 1 for those Plines that will appear in the UI options list.
This does not affect the Plines on the Object Snapping Settings form P-line Filter tab.

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 178 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

The following diagrams show the parameters and Plines on standard Gtypes.

Gtype PFI - Parallel Flange I

Gtype PFC – Parallel Flange Channel

Copyright © 2020.
Page 179 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype PFT – Parallel Flange Tee

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 180 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype TFI – Tapered Flange I

Gtype TFC – Tapered Flange Channel

Copyright © 2020.
Page 181 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype TFT – Tapered Flange Tee

Gtype TWT – Tapered Web Tee

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 182 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype TFTW – Tapered Flange Tapered Web Tee

Gtype ANGL – Equal and Unequal Angles

Copyright © 2020.
Page 183 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype RTUB – Rectangular and Square Tube

Gtype CTUB – Circular Tube

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 184 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype ZED – Rolled Z

Gtype CEE – Bent Plate C

Copyright © 2020.
Page 185 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype BFLA – Bulb Flat

Gtype PLTG – Plate Girder

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 186 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype BOXG – Box Girder

Copyright © 2020.
Page 187 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype FBAR – Flat Bar or Square Bar

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 188 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype RBAR – Round Bar

Gtype HBAR – Hexagonal Bar

Copyright © 2020.
Page 189 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype ANGD – Double Angles

Equal Angles

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 190 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Unequal Angles LLBB

Copyright © 2020.
Page 191 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Unequal SLBB

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 192 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Drawing Levels and Obstruction Values for Standard Gtypes

Generally, profile geometry sets shall have two representations, Simple and Actual, whilst enclosed shapes
will have internal obstruction volumes. The Display Levels and Obstruction values will be:

Representation Drawing Levels Obstruction Value

Simple 0-3 0
Actual 4-8 2
Obstruction 9 - 10 1

Gtype Simple Actual Obstruction

PFI None

PFC None

PFT None

TFI None

TFC None

TFT None

TFTW None

Gtype Simple Actual Obstruction

Copyright © 2020.
Page 193 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

ANGL
None
ANGD

CTUB

ZED None

CEE None

PLTG None

BOXG

FBAR None

RBAR None

HBAR None

BFLA None

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 194 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

B4 Design Parameter Gtypes

Design parameter Gtypes are based on standard Gtypes and use the same parameter Dkeys and Plines.
However, unlike standard Gtypes that all have a common set of parameters, only the required parameters
for the design parameter Gtype are used.

There are no design parameter Gtypes for tapered flange profiles.

Gtype Description

DPFI Design Parameter Parallel Flange I

DPFC Design Parameter Parallel Flange Channel

DPFT Design Parameter Parallel Flange Tee

DANG Design Parameter Equal or Unequal Angle

DRTU Design Parameter Rectangular or Square Tube

DCTU Design Parameter Circular Tube

DZED Design Parameter Z Profile

DCEE Design Parameter Flanged C Profile

DPLG Design Parameter Plate Girder

DBXG Design Parameter Box Girder

DFBA Design Parameter Flat Bar

DRBA Design Parameter Round Bar

DHBA Design Parameter Hex Bar

DCON Design Parameter Cone

DTWI Design Parameter Tapered Web I

Copyright © 2020.
Page 195 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DPFI

Notes:

1. Plines HTLB, HTLC, HTRB, HTRC, HBLA and HBRA are not shown in the diagram above but exist in
the Pline set. The positioning of all Plines with a first character of H depends on the values of
attributes LNA, GLNB and GLNC.

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Web Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 4 Flange Thickness A FTKA Geometry
DESP 5 Root Radius RADA Geometry
DESP 6 Gage Line A GLNA Data
DESP 7 Gage Line B GLNB Data
DESP 8 Gage Line C GLNC Data
DESP 9 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 10 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 11 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 196 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DPFC

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Web Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 4 Flange Thickness FTKA Geometry
DESP 5 Root Radius RADA Geometry
DESP 6 Toe Radius RAD B Geometry
DESP 7 CofG Y Axis Offset CGYO Geometry
DESP 8 Gage Line A GLNA Data
DESP 9 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 10 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 11 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
Page 197 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DPFT

Notes:

1. Plines HTLB, HTLC, HTRB and HTRC are not shown in the diagram above but exist in the Pline set.
The positioning of all Plines with a first character of H depends on the values of attributes GLNA,
GLNB and GLNC.

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Web Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 4 Flange Thickness FTKA Geometry
DESP 5 Root Radius RADA Geometry
DESP 6 CofG X Axis Offset CGXO Geometry
DESP 7 Gage Line A GLNA Data
DESP 8 Gage Line B GLNB Data
DESP 9 Gage Line C GLNC Data
DESP 10 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 11 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 12 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 198 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DANG

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Leg Length Y DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Leg Length X WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Y Leg Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 4 X Leg Thickness FTKA Geometry
DESP 5 Toe Radius RADA Geometry
DESP 6 X Leg Toe Radius RAD B Geometry
DESP 7 Y Leg Toe Radius RAD C Geometry
DESP 8 CofG X Axis Offset CGXO Geometry
DESP 9 CofG Y Axis Offset CGYO Geometry
DESP 10 Gage Line A GLNA Data
DESP 11 Gage Line B GLNB Data
DESP 12 Gage Line C GLNC Data
DESP 13 Mass per Unit Length SAPM Data
DESP 14 Surface Area per metre SAUL Data
DESP 15 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
Page 199 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DRTU

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 4 Outside Corner Radius RADA Geometry
DESP 5 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 6 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 7 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 200 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DCTU

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Outside Diameter DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Wall Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 3 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 4 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 5 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
Page 201 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DZED

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Web Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 4 Flange Thickness FTKA Geometry
DESP 5 Root Radius RADA Geometry
DESP 6 Toe Radius RAD B Geometry
DESP 7 Gage Line A GLNA Data
DESP 8 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 9 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 10 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 202 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DCEE

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 4 Outside Corner Radius RADA Geometry
DESP 5 Flange Length RAD B Geometry
DESP 6 CofG Y Axis Offset CGYO Geometry
DESP 7 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 8 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 9 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
Page 203 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DPLG

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Top Flange Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Bottom Flange Width WIDB Geometry
DESP 4 Web Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 5 Top Flange Thickness FTKA Geometry
DESP 6 Bottom Flange Thickness FTKB Geometry
DESP 7 CofG X Axis Offset CGXO Geometry
DESP 8 Gage Line A GLNA Data
DESP 9 Gage Line B GLNB Data
DESP 10 Gage Line C GLNC Data
DESP 11 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 12 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 13 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 204 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DBXG

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Top Flange Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Bottom Flange Width WIDB Geometry
DESP 4 Width outside Webs WIDC Geometry
DESP 5 Web Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 6 Flange Thickness FTKA Geometry
DESP 7 CofG X Axis Offset CGXO Geometry
DESP 8 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 9 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 10 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
Page 205 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DFBA

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Depth DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Width WIDA Geometry
DESP 3 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 4 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 5 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Gtype DRBA

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Diameter DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 3 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 4 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 206 of 208
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DHBA

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Dimension across flats DPTH Geometry
DESP 2 Corner radius RADA Geometry
DESP 3 Mass per Unit Length MAUL Data
DESP 4 Surface Area per metre SAPM Data
DESP 5 Cross Sectional Area XSAR Data

Gtype DCON

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Start Diameter SDIA Geometry
DESP 2 End Diameter EDIA Geometry
DESP 3 Wall Thickness WTHK Geometry

Copyright © 2020.
Page 207 of 208
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1812

Gtype DTWI

DP No. Design Parameter Description Dkey Data Type

DESP 1 Start Depth SDIA Geometry
DESP 2 End Depth EDIA Geometry
DESP 3 Web Thickness WTHK Geometry
DESP 4 Flange Thickness FTKA Geometry

Copyright © 2020.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. Page 208 of 208
All rights reserved.
Training TM-1814
AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
Guide Walls and Floors Modelling
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
2
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Revision Log

Date Revision Description Author Reviewed Approved

08/12/2014 0.1 Issued for Review AVEVA E3D (1.1) KH

06/07/2015 0.2 Reviewed KH KB
07/07/2015 1.0 Issued for Training AVEVA E3D (1.1) KH KB KB
23/03/2016 1.1 Issued for Review AVEVA E3D (2.1) NG
21/04/2016 1.2 Reviewed NG SM
26/04/2016 2.0 Issued for Training AVEVA E3D (2.1) NG SM KB

Updates
Change highlighting will be employed for all revisions. Where new or changed information is presented section
headings will be highlighted in Yellow.

Suggestion / Problems
If you have a suggestion about this manual or the system to which it refers please report it to AVEVA Training
& Product Support at [email protected]

This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access or which may not
be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your licence
conditions.

Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free
from viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar
losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of
data or information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages,
charges or expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user
resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of
whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence)
or otherwise.

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with
the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year
in which the user's claim is brought.

1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software
licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall
take precedence.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
3
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Copyright Notice

All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this Training Guide and the associated
documentation belongs to or is licensed to AVEVA Solutions Limited or its affiliates.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliates companies. The information contained in
this Training Guide and associated documentation is commercially sensitive, and shall not be adapted, copied,
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or medium by any means (including
photocopying or electronic means) without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where
such permission is granted, AVEVA Solutions Limited expressly requires that the Disclaimer included in this
Training Guide and this Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.

Licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency or any other reproduction rights organisation do not apply.
If any unauthorised acts are carried out in relation to this copyright work, a civil claim for damages may be
made and or criminal prosecution may result.

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliate companies shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a
third party's intellectual property rights arising from the use of this Training Guide and associated
documentation.

@AVEVA Solutions Limited 2015

Trademark Notice

AVEVA™, AVEVA Everything3D™, AVEVA E3D™, [AVEVA Tags], Tribon and all AVEVA product and service
names are trademarks of AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries

Use of these trademarks, product and service names belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is
strictly forbidden, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Group plc or AVEVA Solutions Limited. Any
unauthorised use may result in a legal claim being made against you.

Fluent is a trade mark of Microsoft Corporation. The Fluent user interface is licensed from Microsoft
Corporation by AVEVA and use of the Fluent trademark is strictly forbidden.

All other trademarks belong to their respective owners and cannot be used without the permission of the
owner.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
4
All rights reserved.
 CONTENTS

1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................7
1.1 Aim ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Objectives.......................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Course Structure............................................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Using this Guide ............................................................................................................................... 7
1.6 Setting up the Training Course ....................................................................................................... 8
2 Overview of the Walls and Floors Application .....................................................................9
2.1 Data Hierarchy and Element Types................................................................................................. 9
2.1.1 Soft Type Elements ................................................................................................................... 10
2.2 Data Hierarchy Considerations ..................................................................................................... 10
2.3 Naming Conventions ...................................................................................................................... 10
2.4 Accessing the Walls and Floors Application ............................................................................... 11
3 Building Levels.....................................................................................................................13
3.1 The Building Levels Form .............................................................................................................. 13
3.2 Worked Example – Building Levels and Administrative Hierarchy........................................... 14
Exercise 1 – Creating Administrative Hierarchy.......................................................................17
4 Floor Elements .....................................................................................................................19
4.1 Respresentation of Floor Elements .............................................................................................. 19
4.2 Worked Example – Creating Floor Elements ............................................................................... 21
Exercise 2 – Creating the Roof and Ceilings (Floors) ..............................................................29
4.3 Worked Example – Creating a Screed Element ........................................................................... 30
5 Wall Elements.......................................................................................................................33
5.1 Representation of Wall Elements.................................................................................................. 33
5.1.1 Straight Wall - STWALL............................................................................................................. 33
5.1.2 Curved Wall - WALL .................................................................................................................. 34
5.1.3 User Defined Wall - GWALL...................................................................................................... 34
5.2 Worked Example - Creating Wall Elements ................................................................................. 34
Exercise 3 – Creating Internal Walls .........................................................................................42
6 Wall and Floor Fittings.........................................................................................................43
6.1 Worked Example - Creating Wall and Floor Fittings ................................................................... 43
Exercise 4 – Creating Wall and Floor Fittings ..........................................................................45

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
5
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

This page is intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
6
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 1

1 Introduction

AVEVA Everything3D™ (AVEVA E3D™) allows designers to utilise an array of applications contained within
the program modules. This training guide provides discipline specific training for the Walls and Floors
application contained within the Model module.

1.1 Aim

The aim of this training guide is to provide designers with the knowledge and skills necessary to create and
modify structural models using the Walls and Floors application.

1.2 Objectives

 Introduce AVEVA E3D concepts specific to the Walls and Floors application.

 Make designers aware of the administration elements required by the application.

 Explain how to create and modify a variety of wall and floor elements.

 Understand how to apply wall and floor fittings.

1.3 Prerequisites

It is expected that trainees will have completed the TM – 1801 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1) Foundations and
the TM – 1812 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1) Structural Modelling training courses.

1.4 Course Structure

Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations, worked examples and set exercises.
Each workstation will have a training project populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees
to practice their methods and complete the set exercises.

1.5 Using this Guide

Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document.

Button clicks are indicated by bold turquoise text.

Information the user has to enter will be bold red text.

Additional information notes and references to other documentation will be indicated in the styles below.

 Additional information

 Refer to other documentation

System prompts will be bold, italic and in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose function'.

Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
7
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

1.6 Setting up the Training Course

Login to AVEVA E3D using the details provided by the Trainer. They will typically be as shown below:

Project: Training

User: A.STEELMAN

Password: A

MDB: A-STRUCTURAL

Click the Model tile.

On the Tools tab, in the Training group, click the Setup button to display the Training
Setup form.

On the Structural tab select the Walls and Floors radio button to indicate the current training course and
check the Setup Training Course checkbox. Click the Apply button followed by the Close button.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
8
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 2

2 Overview of the Walls and Floors Application

This chapter outlines the features of the Walls and Floors application, as well as discussing the data hierarchy
and element types used in the application.

2.1 Data Hierarchy and Element Types

The Walls and Floors application utilises a similar hierarchy to the other STRUCTURES discipline
applications, however, greater emphasis is placed on the Purpose of ZONEs, STRUs, FRMWs and SBFRs.

These hierarchy elements are used in an administrative capacity to divide the model into items representing
Buildings, Levels, Floors/Walls, and Wall/Floor subtypes respectively.

To further emphasise the use of structural components for building representation, Soft Types of elements
are used for SBFR elements and other physical structural components.

 Soft Type of elements have the same attributes as the standard element but are named differently to
identify their function.

The data hierarchy used by the Walls and Floors application is:

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
9
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

2.1.1 Soft Type Elements

Three soft types are utilised at SBFR level:

 Compound Screed (CSCREED)

 Compound Floor (CFLOOR)

 Compound Wall (CWALL).

Other soft types and corresponding hard types utilised by the application are:

 Straight Wall (STWALL) soft type of Section (SCTN)

 Curved Wall (WALL) soft type of General Section (GENSEC)

 General Wall (GWALL) soft type of Panel (PANE)

 Floor (FLOOR) soft type of Panel (PANE)

2.2 Data Hierarchy Considerations

As with other AVEVA E3D STRUCTURES discipline applications the data hierarchy breakdown should be
well thought out and have a meaningful structure.

Some company/project procedures require structural models to be broken down by project build methodology,
weight control requirements, material purposes, etc. If such procedures are not in use, consideration should
be given to project deliverables that will be produced from the structural model.

Draw, the AVEVA E3D Drawing Production module, uses a similar concept of a Draw List to that used in
Model to define the contents of a ‘View’ on the drawing sheet. The construction of these Draw Lists are greatly
aided by a good hierarchy breakdown and well named significant elements.

2.3 Naming Conventions

Any element in an AVEVA E3D database may be named, enabling the user to readily identify model
components and produce meaningful reports. It is good practise to name significant model items such as
SITE, ZONE, STRU, FRMW and SBFR elements. This is especially true of the Walls and Floors application
where many of these administrative elements represent detailed building items.

Naming conventions and auto-naming rules are normally set by an Administrator and are usually specific to
an individual company and/or project.

For the purpose of this training course users will be directed to enter names for significant model elements
where required. The worked examples and exercises will also make use of the Auto-naming functionality within
AVEVA E3D.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
10
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

2.4 Accessing the Walls and Floors Application

The structures discipline user interface is accessed by

selecting STRUCTURES from the Quick Access toolbar

The Structures discipline user interface has four specific tabs, i.e. SECTIONS, PLATES, WALLS AND
FLOORS and STAIRS LADDERS AND HANDRAILS. All other tabs are common to other disciplines.

The WALLS AND FLOORS tab contains all the features required to create and manipulate wall and floor
elements.

 This training guide covers the use of the WALL AND FLOORS tab for walls and floors modelling.

Training guides TM-1812 Structural Modelling and TM-1813 Stairs, Ladders and Handrails Modelling
cover the other tabs in the STRUCTURES discipline.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
11
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

This page is intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
12
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 3

3 Building Levels

3.1 The Building Levels Form

Clicking the WALLS AND FLOORS > Tools >

Building Levels button displays the Building Levels
form.

The form is frequently accessed during the floor/wall

creation process and is central to many of the functions
in the Walls and Floors application.

The Building Levels form has two primary functions:

 enables the user to set and modify the elevation of levels within a building.

 enables storage areas for elements to be set which allows them to be associated with either
FRMW or SBFR elements.

When a new elevation is entered, the Elevation Level list of the Building Levels form is updated dynamically,
moving the levels into ascending order based on their elevations. It is important to note that the elevations are
absolute with respect to a datum which can be selected using the Settings > Wrt options list from the form
menu.

The Building Levels form is also used to set Storage areas for Compound Wall/Floor/Screed elements that
have been created. To do this, the user must navigate to a suitable element in Model Explorer then select an
appropriate storage area from the Storage Areas section of the Building Levels form.

If the user selects an inappropriate Storage Area (e.g. a compound wall is set to a floor storage area) a warning
message will be displayed. Equally, if an element is selected that is owned by another level, a warning
message will also be displayed.

When a new level is selected (in the upper part of the form) the Storage Areas section of the form will update
to reflect the storage area associations in place for that level. Only one element can be set against a storage
area at any time.

If more than one element is present in the owning framework the user must remember to switch the storage
area when they modify each element.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
13
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

3.2 Worked Example – Building Levels and Administrative Hierarchy

This worked example demonstrates how to set up the hierarchy for walls and floors of building B01. Some
elements are pre-populated in the training model and will be modified as appropriate. Other elements will be
created as part of the worked example and in subsequent exercises.

In Model Explorer navigate to the element SITE SITE-

STRUCTURAL-AREA02 and expand the hierarchy. Navigate
to ZONE ZONE BUILDING_B01.

In the Properties grid note the Purpose of the ZONE is set to

CIV.

Expand the ZONE hierarchy, navigate to STRU BUILDING_01_LEVEL_01 and note the Purpose attribute of
the STRU element in the Properties grid is unset.

In order to utilise the existing STRU in the Walls and

Floors application the Purpose attribute needs to be
modified

Enter LEVL in the Properties grid for the Purpose

attribute.

With the purpose of the STRU correctly set, the Building

Levels form can then be used to modify the elevation of
the Level.

Click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Tools > Building

Levels button to display the Building Levels form.

BUILDING_01_LEVEL_01, i.e. the STRU, is displayed on

the form with an Elevation of 0mm.

Select Modify > Elevation… from the form menu to

display the Elevation form:

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
14
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Enter 100000 in the Elevation textbox and click the OK

button.

The Elevation is now changed in the Building Levels

form.

Keep the Building Levels form open.

An additional Level is required for the building. Select

Create > Level… from the Building Levels form to
display the Create Level form.

Enter BUILDING_01_LEVEL_02 in the Name textbox

and 103800 in the Elevation textbox.

Click the OK button to create the new level.

The new level is displayed in the Building Levels form.

Close the Building Levels form.

 As the new level was created using the Building

Levels form the Purpose attribute of the STRU has
been automatically set to LEVL.

With the STRU BUILDING_01_LEVEL_02 as the CE, click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Create >
Framework button to display the Create Framework form.

Enter B01_LEV_02_WALLS in the Name textbox and

select WALL Walls from the Purpose options list.

Click the OK button to create the new level.

Create a second FRMW element below STRU

BUILDING_01_LEVEL_02 named
B01_LEV_02_FLOORS and set the Purpose to
FLOO Floors.

Now that FRMWs have been created, soft type

elements at the SBFR level can be created.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
15
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

With the FRMW B01_LEV_02_WALLS as the CE,

select WALLS AND FLOORS > Create > Walls >
Compound Wall to display the Create Compound
Wall form.

Enter LEV02_INT_WALLS in the Name textbox and

click the OK button.

Create a second CWALL element owned by FRMW

B01_LEV_02_WALLS named LEV02_EXT_WALLS.

With the FRMW B01_LEV_02_FLOORS as the CE,

select WALLS AND FLOORS > Create > Floors >
Compound Floor to display the Create Compound
Floor form.

Enter LEV02_FLOORS in the Name textbox and click

the OK button.

The hierarchy in Model Explorer should now look like

this:

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
16
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Exercise 1 – Creating Administrative Hierarchy

Create the following elements for BUILDING_B01:

 Create an additional Level for Building B01 named BUILDING_01_LEVEL_03 and set the Elevation
to 107800.

 Create a FRMW named B01_LEV_03_ROOF below Level BUILDING_01_LEVEL_03 and set the
Purpose to FLOO.

 Navigate to BUILDING_01_LEVEL_01 and create two new FRMWs named B01_LEV_01_WALLS

and B01_LEV_01_FLOORS and set the Purpose to WALL and FLOO respectively.

 Create CWALL elements below FRMW B01_LEV_01_WALLS to store internal walls and external
walls named LEV01_INT_WALLS and LEV01_EXT_WALLS respectively.

 Create a CFLOOR element below FRMW B01_LEV_01_FLOORS named LEV01_FLOORS.

Click the Save Work button on the Quick Access Toolbar.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
17
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

This page is intentionally left blank

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
18
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 4

4 Floor Elements

4.1 Representation of Floor Elements

A Floor (FLOOR) element is a soft type of Panel (PANE) element. These elements are not catalogue driven
and are defined by the user.

Floors may be used to represent any sheet material in a structural model; although they generally represent
concrete slabs. Essentially a floor is a 2D user defined shape extruded through a height (or thickness).

The planar area of the Floor is defined by a Panel Loop (PLOO) element. A Panel Loop is itself defined by
linking together a set of Panel Vertex (PAVE) elements, each of which has a specific position in the 2D
coordinate system of the panel. Each panel edge is defined by a ling joining adjacent vertices.

The floor thickness is defined by setting the Height attribute of the PLOO. This represents the distance through
which the 2D Panel Loop is extruded to form the 3D floor panel.

Each PAVE can have an optional Fillet Radius setting which represents a circular arc that produces a convex
(+ve radius) or concave (-ve radius) fillet.

The default fillet radius is 0 (sharp corner representation) but can be any valid radius.

When creating a PLOO, it is recommended to create the PAVEs in a clockwise sequence when viewed from
above.

 If the vertices are created in anti-clockwise sequence, the direction and justification will be
reversed.

 If the vertices are not created in sequence, the loop will self-intersect, resulting in incorrect loop
geometry.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
19
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
20
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

4.2 Worked Example – Creating Floor Elements

This worked example utilises the administrative hierarchy created previously to create floor elements for
Building 01.

Click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Tools > Building Levels button to display the Building Levels form.
Select BUILDING_01_LEVEL_01 in the Elevation Level section of the form.

In Model Explorer navigate to the CFLOOR

LEV01_FLOORS. This element will be used to store the
floor element associated with this level.

Expand the Settings form menu and ensure that the

Unset Storage Area option is not active.

 A tick mark will be displayed against this menu option

if it is active.

In the Storage Areas section of the form, click on the

Floors entry followed by the Screeds entry. The
LEV01_FLOORS element is displayed next to each
storage area. Leave the Walls storage area unset.

Close the Building Levels form.

The Level 01 floor thickness is 200mm.

With the CFLOOR LEV01_FLOORS as the CE, select

WALLS AND FLOORS > Settings > Defaults > Floor
Specification to display the Floor/Screed Specification
(Default) form.

Ensure that the Floor Specification is selected from the

Specification options list on the form.

Click the 200.00mm entry in the list to display it in the

Thickness textbox.

Click the Apply button and then the Cancel button to

close the form.

The FLOOR element for Level 01 will be created

the building grid.

In Model Explorer navigate to REFGRD

AREA02_BUILDING_B01_GRID below
GRIDWL REFERENCE_GRIDS. Drag and drop
the REFGRD into the 3D View.

On the VIEW tab, in the Control group, select the

Up Left Arrow option in the Isometric group of
the Look button options list.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
21
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Select WALLS AND FLOORS > Create > Floors >

Floor to display the Create Floor form.

Enter FLOOR_01 in the Name textbox.

Leave the Description as unset, the Justification

at Top and the Representation settings as the
defaults.

In the Create Methods frame click the Fixed radius

arc, passing through two points button to display
the Radius form and the Positioning Control form.

A prompt is displayed in the 3D View.

Enter 15000 in the Radius textbox on the Radius form and press the
Return key.

On the Positioning Control form click the Graphics and Snap buttons.

Snap to the intersection of gridlines B1.A and B1.4 at Elev

0mm.

An aid graphic displays the start point.

Snap to the intersection of gridlines B1.A and B1.1 at Elev

0mm.

An aid graphic displays the end point.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
22
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

In order to determine the ‘sense’ of the arc a prompt requests the

selection of a polar control point.

Change the Positioning Control form by clicking the Screen button,

retaining Snap.

Select a point on the south side of gridline B1.A between gridlines B1.1 and B1.4. A curved segment of the
floor is displayed in the 3D View.

In the Create Methods frame of the Create Floor

form click the Derive points from graphic picks
button.

Change the Positioning Control form back to Graphics and Snap.

Snap to the intersection of gridlines B1.B and B1.1 at Elev

0mm.

An aid graphic displays the Last Vertex.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
23
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Snap to the intersection of gridlines B1.B and B1.4 at Elev

0mm.

An aid graphic displays the Last Vertex.

All vertices, i.e. 5 vertices, for the floor have now been created

On the Create Floor form check the Display

modification form check and click the Apply button.

The Loop Vertex Editor form is displayed.

Click the Select all button in the Mode Selection frame.

All of the vertices on the floor are highlighted and an axes
aid displayed at the origin, i.e. the first vertex.

Enter 360 in the Expand/Contract textbox in the Expand/

Contract frame.

Click the Expand group button in the Expand/Contract

frame. Graphical aid lines preview the ‘expanded’ floor
outline, i.e. the vertices are moved by the specified value
in the appropriate directions.

Click the Modify button on the form to expand the floor.

.Select Control > Close form the form menu to close the
form.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
24
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Tools > Building

Levels button to display the Building Levels form.
Select BUILDING_01_LEVEL_02 in the Elevation
Level section of the form.

In Model Explorer navigate to the CFLOOR

LEV02_FLOORS.

In the Storage Areas section of the form, click on the

Floors area followed by the Screeds area. The
LEV02_FLOORS element is displayed next to each
storage area. Leave the Walls storage area unset.

Close the Building Levels form.

Select WALLS AND FLOORS > Create > Floors >

Floor to display the Create Floor form.

Enter FLOOR_02 in the Name textbox and ensure the

Justification is set to Top.

For this floor the Level 01 floor will be used as a

‘template’.

Click the Trace boundary button in the Create

Methods frame to display the Identify start vector
prompt.

Double click near the north east corner of the Level 01

floor.

An axes aid is displayed at the corner vertex and the

Create Methods frame shows that 6 Vertices have
been defined.

Make sure the Display modification form checkbox is unchecked and click the OK button on the Create
Floor form to name the floor and close the form.

Whilst using the Trace boundary method is a quick way to obtain floor geometry from an existing model
element, the new floor element has to be created in the same position as the copied item, therefore, the
position of the Level 02 floor element must now be modified.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
25
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

In Model Explorer navigate to FLOOR FLOOR_02 to

make it the CE.

In the Properties grid expand the Positional header

and modify the U component of the Position attribute
from D 3800mm to U 0mm.

The floor is now positioned at the correct elevation.

FLOOR_02 was created with 6 Vertices rather 5

created for FLOOR_01. Two vertices were created at
the selected start vertex position, one for the start and
one for the end of the PLOO.

Select WALLS AND FLOORS > Modify > Floor >

Definition to display the Loop Vertex Editor form.

Select Utilities > Remove coincident from the form

menu.

A confirmation message is displayed:

Click the Yes button to remove the coincident vertex.

The Level 02 floor needs to smaller than the Level 01 floor to fit inside the walls.

Click the Select all button in the Mode Selection group, enter 200 in the textbox in the Expand/Contract
frame and click the Contract group button. The new floor outline is displayed. Click the Modify button on the
form to contract the floor.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
26
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

The Level 02 floor requires a stairwell opening on the north side of the building. Additional PAVE elements
will be added to the floor PLOO to create the stairwell opening.

FLOOR_02 north side vertices as created FLOOR_02 north side vertices after additions

 The floor vertices are automatically re-numbered when new vertices are created.

In the top Vertex frame make sure the counter is set to

1 and click the Create points button in the Mode
Selection frame.

In the bottom Vertex frame enter 4995 in the Y textbox

and leave the X value at 200mm.

 The first vertex is offset from the floor origin

because the PLOO was contracted by 200mm
previously.

A New vertex text aid is displayed at the current X and

Y coordinate values.

Click the Create button to create the new vertex, i.e.

vertex <2>.

Enter 2850 in the X textbox, leave the Y value as 4995mm and click the Create button to create vertex <3>.

Enter 9725 in the Y textbox, leave the X value as 2850mm and click the Create button to create vertex <4>.

Enter 200 in the X textbox, leave the Y value as 9725mm and click the Create button to create vertex <5>.

Select Control > Close from the form menu to close the form.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
27
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

FLOOR_02 should now look like this:

Save Work.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
28
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Exercise 2 – Creating the Roof and Ceilings (Floors)

Create the following elements for BUILDING_B01

 Create a CFLOOR element named LEV03_ROOF below FRMW B01_LEV_03_ROOF.

 Create a 200mm thick roof element (as a FLOOR) named ROOF_03 below FRMW
B01_LEV_03_ROOF. The roof element should cap the walls, i.e. it is the same size as FLOOR_01.

 Create a new FRMW named B01_LEV_01_CEILINGS, with a Purpose of FLOO, that owns a
CFLOOR named LEV01_CEILING.

 Create a false ceiling (as a FLOOR) for Level 01 named CEILING_01 that is 50mm thick. Include a
gap for the stairwell opening and set the elevation of the ceiling such that a 950mm cavity is created
between the top of the ceiling and the underside of FLOOR_02.

 Create a false ceiling for Level 02, similar to Level 01 but without the stairwell opening, with a
950mm cavity between the top of the ceiling and the underside of ROOF_03.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
29
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

4.3 Worked Example – Creating a Screed Element

This worked example creates a screed on the roof of Building 01.

In Model Explorer navigate to CFLOOR LEV03_ROOF to make it the CE.

Select WALLS AND FLOORS > Create > Floors >

Compound Screed to display the Create Compound
Screed form.

Enter LEV03_SCREED in the Name textbox and click

the OK button.

Click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Tools > Building

Levels button to display the Building Levels form.
Select BUILDING_01_LEVEL_03 in the Elevation
Level section of the form.

In Model Explorer navigate to the CSCREED

LEV03_SCREED.

In the Storage Areas section of the form, click on the

Screeds area. The LEV03_SCREED element is
displayed next to each storage area. Leave the Walls
storage area unset.

Close the Building Levels form.

With CSCREE LEV03_SCREED as the CE select

WALLS AND FLOORS > Create > Floors >
Screed to display the Create Screed form.

Enter SCREED_03 in the Name textbox, 200 in the

Thickness textbox and make sure the
Justification is set to Bottom.

Click the Trace boundary button in the Create

Methods frame to display the prompt Identify start
vertex.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
30
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Click the roof element near the north east

corner.

The prompt changes to Identify end vertex.

Click the roof element near the north west

corner.

The prompt changes to Identify vertex

between start and end.

Click the roof element near the south west

corner to create the screed.

Click the OK button on the Create Screed form.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
31
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

The screed requires a slope from the edges

towards the centre

On the Object Snapping Settings form check

the Endpoint checkbox on the Graphics sub-
tab and click the OK button on the form

Click the DESIGN AIDS > Construction Aids >

Line button and create an aid line from the north
west corner to the south east corner of the
screed.
..

With the SCREED SCREED_03 as the CE, click the WALLS

AND FLOORS > Modify > Screed Slope button to display the
Screed Slope form.

Select Conical from the Type options list and enter 1 in the
Slope textbox.

Click the Origin link label to display the Positioning Control

form and the Define Slope Origin Point forms.

 The slope origin is the lowest point of the screed slope.

Click the Graphics and Midpoint buttons on the Positioning

Control form and select the design aid line.

The coordinates of the new slope origin are displayed in the

Define Slope Origin Point form.

Click the Apply button to accept the position and click the
Cancel button to close the form.

The slope origin and slope direction are

displayed in the 3D View.

Click the Apply button on the Screed Slope

form to create the slope and close the form.

The screed slope is achieved by creating a

Negative Solid of Revolution (NREV)
element owned by the SCREED.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
32
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 5
5 Wall Elements

5.1 Representation of Wall Elements

The Walls and Floors application has three types of wall:

 Straight Wall (STWALL), soft type of Section (SCTN)

 Curved Wall (WALL), soft type of Generic Section (GENSEC)

 User Defined Wall or General Wall (GWALL), soft type of Panel (PANE)

Each wall type has its own requirements which are described in the following sections.

5.1.1 Straight Wall - STWALL

STWALL elements, like SCTNs, are 2D shapes, defined in and selected from a catalogue, and extruded over
a length determined by selected start and end positions.

The cross section geometry of an STWALL is defined in the catalogue and referenced via the Specification
Reference (Spref) attribute. All other aspects of its geometry are defined by setting attributes as the STWALL
is modelled.

Two important attributes of an STWALL are the Start Position (POSS) and the end position (POSE). These
two attributes determine the wall’s length and orientation.

The edges of a STWALL are identified by a Pline defined in the catalogue. For example, the standard P-lines
for a rectangular STWALL are:

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved. 33
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

5.1.2 Curved Wall - WALL

Curved walls may be created as an arc or a full circle. WALL elements as a soft type of GENSEC have a
Spref attribute referencing a 2D shape defined in the catalogue similar to STWALL elements.

5.1.3 User Defined Wall - GWALL

GWALL elements are a soft type of the PANE element. This element uses a Panel Loop (PLOO) to describe
the wall’s shape and panel thickness to define the height of the wall.

GWALLs are used when the shape of the wall cannot be achieved using either an STWALL or a WALL
elements to define its shape.

5.2 Worked Example - Creating Wall Elements

This worked example utilises the administrative hierarchy created previously to create the exterior and interior
wall elements for Building 01.

External walls will be created around the extremities of FLOOR_01.

Click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Tools > Building

Levels button top display the Building Levels form.

Select BUILDING_01_LEVEL_01 from the Elevation

Level list.

In Model Explorer navigate to the CWALL

LEV01_EXT_WALLS. This element will be used to store
the external wall elements associated with this level.

In the Storage Areas section of the Building Levels form,

click the Walls entry. The LEV01_EXT_WALLS element
is displayed next to each storage area.

Close the Building Levels form.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
34
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Select WALLS AND FLOORS > Settings > Defaults > Wall
Specification to display the Wall Specification (Default)
form.

Select Concrete Walls from the Specification options list

and Wall from the Generic Type options list.

Select 200_thk_wall from the list and IBOW from the

Justification options list. Leave the Member line and Joint
line options set to NA.

Click the Properties button to display the Modify

Properties form. Enter 3800 in the Height textbox and click
the OK button.

Click the Apply button of the Wall Specification (Default)

form and close the form.

Remove all floors and ceilings except FLOOR_01 from the

drawlist.

With CWALL LEV01_EXT_WALLS as the CE, select WALLS AND FLOORS >
Create > Walls > Straight Wall to display the Straight Wall form and the
Positioning Control form.

Select the Continuous radio button in the String Method frame. Make sure the
Confirm checkbox is unchecked in the Verification frame.

Set the Positioning Control form to Graphics and Cursor.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
35
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Select the south west corner of Floor 01. A text aid

is displayed showing the Start point of the wall.

Select north west corner of Floor 01 to create the

straight wall on the west edge.

As the Continuous string method was selected the

Start text aid moves to the end point of the first wall.

Select the north east corner of Floor 01 to create

the straight wall on the north edge and then select
the south east corner of Floor 01 to create the east
edge wall.

Close the Straight Wall form.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
36
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

With CWALL LEV01_EXT_WALLS still as the CE, select WALLS AND FLOORS
> Create > Walls > Curved Wall to display the Ring Wall form and the
Positioning Control form.

Make sure that the Arc radio button is selected in the Circle Definition frame and
select the Through 3 points button in the Creation Methods frame.

Set the Positioning Control form to Graphics and Cursor.

Select the south east corner of Floor 01 and then a

point near the middle of the floor’s curved edge.

A text aid is displayed showing the first point and the

second point of the wall.

Select the south west corner of Floor 01 as the third

point to create the curved wall on the south side.

Close the Ring Wall form.

Click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Tools > Building

Levels button to display the Building Levels form.

Select BUILDING_01_LEVEL_02 from the Elevation

Level list.

In Model Explorer navigate to the CWALL

LEV02_EXT_WALLS. This element will be used to store
the external wall elements associated with this level.

In the Storage Areas section of the Building Levels form,

click the Walls entry. The LEV02_EXT_WALLS element
is displayed as the Walls storage area.

Close the Building Levels form.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
37
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Make FLOOR FLOOR_01 the CE and click the WALLS

AND FLOORS > Tools > Trace button to display the
Boundary Tracing form.

Make sure Walls is selected from the FLOOR boundary

with options list and that the wrt textbox is set to
/BUILDING_01__LEVEL02.

Check the Mitre Walls checkbox.

Click the Apply button to create the Level 02 external

walls.

Click the Yes button on the confirmation message and

then the Cancel button on the Boundary Tracing form
to close it.

The walls have been created, however, the justification

needs to be modified to make sure they align with the
Level 01 walls.

Select all of the Level 02 walls, including the small ends

to the curved wall, and in the Properties grid under the
Specification header select OBOW from the
Justification options list.

The Level 02 walls are now aligned with the Level 01

walls.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
38
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Tools > Building

Levels button to display the Building Levels form.

Select BUILDING_01_LEVEL_01 from the Elevation

Level list.

In Model Explorer navigate to the CWALL LEV01_INT to

make it the CE.

In the Storage Areas section of the Building Levels form,

click the Walls entry. The LEV01_INT_WALLS element is
displayed as the Walls storage area.

Close the Building Levels form.

Select WALLS AND FLOORS > Settings > Defaults > Wall Specification to display the Wall Specification
(Default) form.

Select Concrete Walls from the Specification options list and Wall from the Generic Type options list.

Select 100_thk_wall from the list and CBOW from the Justification options list. Leave the Member line and
Joint line options set to NA.

Click the Properties button to display the Modify Properties form. Enter 2600 in the Height textbox and click
the OK button.

Click the Apply button of the Wall Specification (Default) form and close the form.

Remove the Level 02 external walls from the drawlist and add in the FRMWs B01_COLUMNS and
B01_BEAMS_LEV_02 from STRU BUILDING_01_STEELWORK.

Select WALLS AND FLOORS > Create > Walls > Straight Wall to display the Straight Wall and Positioning
Control forms.

Click the Element and Distance buttons on the Positioning Control

form and enter 2900 in the Distance textbox.

Click near the bottom of the west external wall at the north west end to display a Start text aid. Click in a
similar position on the east external wall, i.e. at the north east end, to create a wall across the internal width
of the building.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
39
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Change the Positioning Control form settings to

Element and Snap and click near the bottom of
the steel column on the intersection of gridlines
B1.2 and B1.B.

On the Straight Wall form click the

Perpendicular to button and select the internal
wall previously created to create a wall from the
column to the internal wall.

Repeat the same process to create another wall

between the steel column on the intersection of
gridlines B1.2 and B1.A and the long internal
wall.

Click near the bottom of the steel column on the intersection of

gridlines B1.2 and B1.A.

On the Straight Wall form click the Direction and distance

button to display the Define straight wall end form and enter S
WRT /* in the Direction textbox and 1730 in the Distance
checkbox.

Click the OK button to create the wall.

To make the end of this wall approximate the direction of

the curved wall, make the straight wall the CE and on the
Properties grid expand the Design header and enter N
10 E in the End cut textbox.

Create a straight wall between the column at the

intersection of gridlines B1.3 and B1.B and the long
internal wall.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
40
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Select WALLS AND FLOORS > Connections > Connect Walls > Connect Walls.

At the First wall end prompt select the end of the straight wall created in the previous step.

At the Second wall end prompt select the east end of the long internal wall.

A confirmation message is displayed as the walls

are already connected.

Click the Yes button to trim the long internal wall.

To check all of the internal and external walls are connected as

expected, navigate to FRMW B01_LEV_01_WALLS to make it
the CE and click the WALLS AND FLOORS > Connections >
Query button to display the Highlight Connections form.

The number of each reported connections for the CE are display

against the relevant connection category.

Check the category checkboxes to highlight the walls in the

category colours.

 The colours for the highlighted connections may be set in the backstage area, i.e. PROJECT > Options
> Discipline > Structural.

Close the Highlight Connections form.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
41
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Exercise 3 – Creating Internal Walls

Create internal walls for Level 02 of BUILDING_B01 as shown in the diagram below:

All walls are 100mm thick, 2800mm height and justified CBOW.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
42
All rights reserved.
 CHAPTER 6
6 Wall and Floor Fittings

The Walls and Floors application enables fittings to be created for wall and floor elements in a similar way to
section or panel fittings. The fittings are catalogue items that have been defined in Paragon.

6.1 Worked Example - Creating Wall and Floor Fittings

In this example fittings will be added to the exterior walls of Level 02 of Building B01.

Make the north wall on Level 02 the CE and select

WALLS AND FLOORS > Create > Fittings > Wall
Fitting to display the Wall Fittings form.

In the Specification Data frame select Standard

Window from the options list.

Select the “ANY”- Windows for any wall from the

Wall Types list and the entry is displayed in the
Current Selection list, Further options are displayed
in the Type list.

Select “DG-S” Direct glazed, single panel to

transfer it to the Current Selection list.

Select 1200mm 1200mm Wide and then 1200mm

DG-S/1200x1200.

Three windows are to be created in the wall. For the

first window, enter the following information:

Dist offset from Outside of Wall

Dist along wall 2500

Elevation 1200

An axes aid is displayed at the entered position.

Click Apply to create the first window.

For the second window change the Dist along wall to 7000
and click the Apply button.

For the third window change the Dist along wall to 12000 and
click the Apply button.

Click the Cancel button to close the form.

The north wall of Level 02 now has three windows.

 Clicking the Properties button, if available, displays the

Modify Properties form where any Design Parameters for
the fittings may be set or modified.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved. 43
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Remove Level 03, Level 02 ceilings and Level 02 west and south external walls from the drawlist.

Right click in the 3D View to display the PowerWheel. Click the View Direction tile and then the up left arrow
tile.

Make the Level 02 floor the CE and select WALLS

AND FLOORS > Create > Fittings > Floor Fitting to
display the Floor Fittings form.

In the Specification Data frame select Floor Fittings

from the options list.

Select “Furniture” Furniture from the What type of

Floor Fitting list.

Select “Tables” Tables from the What type of

furniture list.

Select 0 Office_Table from the Selection list.

A plane and axes aid are displayed at the FLOOR

origin.

Select Top Upwards from the Reference Datum

options list.

Click the Position fitting button to the right of the X

Position and Y Position textboxes to display the
Positioning Control form.

Click the Graphics and Snap buttons on the

Positioning Control form and select a position in the
middle of the south west room on Level 02.

An axis aid is displayed at the position and the X Position

and Y Position textboxes display the values.

Click the Apply button to create the floor fitting at the

specified position.

Close the Floor Fittings form.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
44
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
TPS Template Modelling TM-18XX

Exercise 4 – Creating Wall and Floor Fittings

Create the following wall and floor fittings for BUILDING_B01.

 Create windows in Level 01 external walls.

 Create a double door in the curved external wall in Level 01.

 Create additional windows in Level 02 external walls.

 Create doors in Level 01 and 02 internal walls.

 Create desks and chairs in the Level 02 rooms.

Save Work.

Copyright © 2014. www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
45
All rights reserved.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
Stairs, Ladders and Handrail Modelling Training Guide
TM-1813
 This page is intentionally left blank.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 2 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

Revision Log
DATE REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION AUTHOR REVIEWED APPROVED

22/05/2018 2.1 Issued for Review SM

25/03/2019 2.1 Reviewed SM NG

04/11/2020 3.0 Issued for Training AVEVA E3D Design SM NG ST

Updates
Change highlighting will be employed for all revisions. Where new or changed, information is presented
section headings will be highlighted in Yellow.

Suggestion / Problems
If you have a suggestion about this manual or the system to which it refers please report it to AVEVA Training
& Product Support at [email protected]

This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access, or which may
not be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your
licence conditions.

Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free
from viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar
losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data
or information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or
expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from
the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such
losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with
the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year
in which the user's claim is brought.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 3 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software
licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take
precedence.

Copyright Notice
All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this Training Guide and the associated
documentation belongs to or is licensed to AVEVA Solutions Limited or its affiliates.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliates companies. The information contained in
this Training Guide and associated documentation is commercially sensitive, and shall not be adapted, copied,
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or medium by any means (including
photocopying or electronic means) without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where
such permission is granted, AVEVA Solutions Limited expressly requires that the Disclaimer included in this
Training Guide and this Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made.

Licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency or any other reproduction rights organisation do not apply.
If any unauthorised acts are carried out in relation to this copyright work, a civil claim for damages may be
made and or criminal prosecution may result.

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliate companies shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third
party's intellectual property rights arising from the use of this Training Guide and associated documentation.

Incorporates Qt Commercial, © 2011 Nokia Corporation or its subsidiaries.

@AVEVA Solutions Limited 2015

Trademark Notice
AVEVA™, AVEVA Bocad™, [AVEVA Tags], Tribon and all AVEVA product and service names are trademarks of
AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries.

Use of these trademarks, product and service names belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is strictly
forbidden, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Group plc or AVEVA Solutions Limited. Any
unauthorised use may result in a legal claim being made against you.

All other trademarks belong to their respective owners and cannot be used without the permission of the
owner.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

Table of Contents
1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Aim ................................................................................................................................................................ 9

1.2 Objectives ..................................................................................................................................................... 9

1.3 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 9

1.4 Course Structure............................................................................................................................................ 9

1.5 Using this Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 9

1.6 Setting up the Training Course .....................................................................................................................11

2 Overview of the Stairs, Ladders and Handrail Application ................................................................. 13

2.1 Principles Employed in the Application ........................................................................................................13

2.1.1 Standards and Defaults ............................................................................................................................... 13

2.1.2 Assemblies .................................................................................................................................................. 14

2.1.3 Representation Modes ............................................................................................................................... 15

2.1.4 Progressive Disclosure ................................................................................................................................ 17

2.2 Accessing the AVEVA E3D Design SLH Application ........................................................................................18

2.3 The SLH User Interface .................................................................................................................................18

2.4 SLH Form Layout and Features .....................................................................................................................20

Data Hierarchy and Element Types ..........................................................................................................................22

3 Stair Flights ..................................................................................................................................... 23

3.1 Stair Flight Hierarchy Overview ....................................................................................................................23

3.2 Creating a Stair Flight ...................................................................................................................................24

3.2.1 Reference Point Options ............................................................................................................................. 25

3.2.2 Stair Flight Creation – Calculate Mode ....................................................................................................... 26

3.2.3 Connections to Supporting Elements.......................................................................................................... 29

3.2.4 Stair Configurations .................................................................................................................................... 30

3.3 Modifying a Stair Flight ................................................................................................................................31

3.3.1 Positioning Options ..................................................................................................................................... 32

3.4 Creating and Modifying Stair Flights – A Worked Example ...........................................................................33

3.4.1 Setting up the 3D View ............................................................................................................................... 33

3.4.2 Creating a Stair Flight in Layout Mode ........................................................................................................ 34

3.4.3 Creating a Stair Flight in Detail Mode ......................................................................................................... 41

Copyright © 2020.
Page 5 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
Exercise 1 - Creating and Modifying Stairs ............................................................................................... 47

4 Rung Ladders .................................................................................................................................. 49

4.1 Rung Ladder Hierarchy Overview .................................................................................................................49

4.2 Creating a Rung Ladder.................................................................................................................................51

4.2.1 Ladder Representation Options .................................................................................................................. 51

4.2.2 Top Exit Edge............................................................................................................................................... 53

4.2.3 Bottom Rung Spacing Options .................................................................................................................... 55

4.3 Modifying a Rung Ladder ..............................................................................................................................55

4.3.1 Positioning Options ..................................................................................................................................... 56

4.4 Creating and Modifying Rung Ladders – A Worked Example ........................................................................57

4.4.1 Setting up the 3D View ............................................................................................................................... 57

4.4.2 Creating a Rung Ladder in Layout Mode ..................................................................................................... 57

4.4.3 Creating a Rung Ladder in Detail Mode ...................................................................................................... 65

Exercise 2 – Creating and Modifying Rung Ladders .................................................................................. 70

5 Step Ladders ................................................................................................................................... 71

5.1 Step Ladder Hierarchy Overview ..................................................................................................................71

5.2 Creating a Step Ladder .................................................................................................................................73

5.2.1 Step Ladder Representation Options .......................................................................................................... 73

5.2.2 Reference Point Options ............................................................................................................................. 74

5.2.3 Connections to Supporting Elements.......................................................................................................... 75

5.2.4 Step Ladder Configurations......................................................................................................................... 77

5.2.5 Step Ladder Handrail Assemblies ................................................................................................................ 79

5.3 Modifying a Step Ladder...............................................................................................................................79

5.4 Creating and Modifying Step Ladders – a Worked Example ..........................................................................80

5.4.1 Setting up the 3D View ............................................................................................................................... 80

5.4.2 Creating a Step Ladder in Layout Mode ...................................................................................................... 81

5.4.3 Modifying the Step Ladder.......................................................................................................................... 88

Exercise 3 - Creating and Modifying Step Ladders.................................................................................... 91

6 Handrails ........................................................................................................................................ 93
6.1 Handrail Hierarchy Overview........................................................................................................................93

6.2 Creating Handrail .........................................................................................................................................96

6.2.1 Route Definition – Planar Elements ............................................................................................................ 97

6.2.2 Route Definition – Stair Flights ................................................................................................................... 99

AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

6.3 Modifying Handrail .....................................................................................................................................100

6.3.1 The Modify Handrail Form ........................................................................................................................ 101

6.3.2 The Modify Handrail Components Form................................................................................................... 101

6.3.3 Splitting ..................................................................................................................................................... 102

6.3.4 Merging ..................................................................................................................................................... 104

6.4 Creating and Modifying Handrail – A Worked Example ..............................................................................105

6.4.1 Creating Handrail in Layout Mode ............................................................................................................ 105

6.4.2 Creating Handrail in Detail Mode ............................................................................................................. 114

Exercise 4 – Creating and Modifying Handrail ....................................................................................... 119

7 SLH Utilities................................................................................................................................... 121

7.1 Model Editor .............................................................................................................................................. 121

7.1.1 Model Editing ............................................................................................................................................ 121

7.1.2 Shape Editing ............................................................................................................................................ 122

7.1.3 Quick Routing ............................................................................................................................................ 123

7.2 The Checker Utility .....................................................................................................................................124

Exercise 5 – Data Checks ...................................................................................................................... 126

Copyright © 2020.
Page 7 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
This page left intentionally blank
 CHAPTER 1

1 Introduction
The AVEVA™ E3D Design Stairs, Ladders, and Handrails application is part of the STRUCTURES discipline that
enables designers to construct accurate and detailed 3D models. This training guide provides specific training
for the Stairs, Ladders and Handrails application.

1.1 Aim
The aim of this training guide is to provide designers with the skills and knowledge necessary to create, modify
and check stair, ladder, and handrail elements using the Stairs, Ladders and Handrails application.

1.2 Objectives
The objectives of the training course are to:

• Introduce concepts specific to the application.

• Outline the administrative elements required by the application.

• Explain how to create and modify Stair Flight, Rung Ladder, Step Ladder and Handrail elements.

• Explain how to use the data checking utility.

1.3 Prerequisites
It is expected that trainees will have completed the TM-1812 AVEVA E3D Design Structural Modelling course.

1.4 Course Structure

Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations, worked examples and set exercises. Each
workstation will have a training project populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees to
practice their methods and complete the set exercises.

1.5 Using this Guide

Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document, here is a summary: -

• Menu pull-downs and button click actions are indicated by bold blue text
• Information that needs to be entered into the software will be in bold red text
• System prompts, example files or inputs will be bold italic black text
• Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font, colours and styles used as before.
• Products, Applications, Modules, Toolbars, Explorers and other significant software elements will be in
bold black text
• Other areas in this Training Guide will be presented with italic blue text and an accompanying icon to
classify the type of additional information.

Additional information

Copyright © 2020.
Page 9 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
 Refer to other documentation

The following icons will be used to identify industry or discipline specific content

Plant - Content specific to the Plant industry Marine - Content specific to the Marine industry

Electrical – Content specific to Electrical Engineering – Content specific to Engineering

Instrumentation – Content specific to

Instrumentation
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

1.6 Setting up the Training Course

To start AVEVA E3D Design, double click the desktop icon to display the Login form. Login using the details
below:

Project: Training (TRA)

User: A.STEELMAN

Password: A

MDB: A-STRUCTURAL

After entering the login details click the

Model tile.

The details above are indicative of

typical entry to AVEVA E3D Design
projects. Alternative login details may
be supplied by the Trainer.

In order to complete the exercises and

worked examples in the training guide it is
necessary to configure the training model.

On the TOOLS tab in the Training group, click the Setup button to display the Training Setup
form.

On the Structures tab, select the Stairs, Ladders & Handrail radio button. Check the Setup Training Course
checkbox, click the Apply button and close the form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 11 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
This page is intentionally left blank
 CHAPTER 2

2 Overview of the Stairs, Ladders and Handrail Application

The Stairs, Ladders, and Handrails (SLH) application allows designers to create and modify detailed access and
demarcation components within 3D models. The application is integrated with other AVEVA E3D Design
structural utilities.

2.1 Principles Employed in the Application

There are a number of features employed in the SLH application.

• Standards and Defaults.

• Pre-defined assembly elements.

• Two representation modes.

• Progressive disclosure concepts.

2.1.1 Standards and Defaults

The SLH application utilises Standards and Defaults to control the creation of stair, ladder, step ladder and
handrail elements within the 3D model.

The Standards used by SLH are a set of geometric constraints. International, National, project, or industry
standards can be used in the determination of geometry for stair, rung ladder, step ladder and handrail
elements. Any number of standards may be used in a project.

Defaults provide an interpretation of a referenced standard and allow SLH Administrators to implement
preferred working practises. This gives SLH Administrators control over the displayed and pre-populated
options within forms for a number of SLH elements.

The values used within a Default must comply with the maximum and/or minimum values of the Standard it
references. In addition, SLH Administrators may stipulate valid values for certain geometric parameters. For
example, the width between stair stringers may be limited to a series of values that coincide with the width
of supplied stair treads.

Defaults are also used to associate assemblies with standards. The range of elements available for selection
in the Creation and Modification forms will be governed by the Default selected.

Forms relating to the settings of Standards and Defaults are only accessible to SLH Administrators. An example
of these forms and a typical user form referencing a default and standard are shown overleaf.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 13 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

Detailed guidance on the administration of the AVEVA E3D Design SLH application is provided in TM-1864
AVEVA™ E3D Design Stairs, Ladders and Handrail Administration training guide.

2.1.2 Assemblies
The SLH application utilises a range of pre-defined assemblies to represent SLH model elements. A number of
sample assemblies are provided. Further assemblies can be created using SLH assembly constructors in
conjunction with standard catalogue and template functionality. A typical assembly selection is displayed
below.

The ability to modify the representation of SLH elements is subject to the mode of operation being used and
the degree of customisation applied to user defined assemblies.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 14 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

2.1.3 Representation Modes

The SLH application enables elements to be created in Layout mode or Detail mode, as
described in the following sections.

2.1.3.1 Layout Mode

Layout mode allows designers to implement a range of SLH elements, compliant to the referred standard,
without the need to specify an exact representation. The representation is intended as an indicative display
and its representation cannot be significantly modified by the user. The created elements do not own
traditional structural elements (e.g. sections, panels) and assemblies containing such elements cannot be
selected.

As with all SLH elements, aid graphics are used

to provide an initial representation of the
element’s geometry, position and orientation
during creation and modification.

Elements created in Layout mode can be clash

checked, reported on, and displayed in drawings.

Due to the use of default representations,

detailed Material Take Off reports cannot
be generated for SLH items created in
Layout mode.

Elements created in Layout mode can be converted to Detail mode at a later stage.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 15 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

2.1.3.2 Detail Mode

Detail mode enables designers to provide greater accuracy and representation to modelled elements. A range
of assembly options, governed by the Default selected, allow the designer to view and select the exact
representation of the element. The range of assemblies available in detailed mode is controlled by the SLH
Administrator.

Model elements created in Detail mode cannot be converted to Layout mode. Equally, Layout mode elements
that are converted to Detail mode can never be reverted to Layout mode.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 16 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

2.1.4 Progressive Disclosure

Progressive disclosure concepts are used to provide the user with suitable information and options at
appropriate times in the design process. The forms used in the SLH application are designed to guide the user
through the design process while still allowing flexibility to review previously entered information and allow
editing. Each form utilises a number of context sensitive pages reflected in the top section of the form.

Visual references, as to progress through the design

process, are provided at the top of the form.
Successfully completed pages are marked with a blue tick,
while outstanding mandatory information is noted by an
orange triangle.
The user can navigate between pages using Next and Back
arrow buttons or by clicking the link labels relating to
successfully completed pages.

Where possible, feedback relating to options selected and

information entered is provided within the form.

In addition, any fields that cannot be populated are greyed

out.

Where mandatory fields are not completed, or incorrect

information is entered into the form, the user will be
prevented from navigating to subsequent pages.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 17 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

2.2 Accessing the AVEVA E3D Design SLH Application

After entering AVEVA E3D Design the user interface is displayed.

The SLH application is accessed by selecting STRUCTURES from the discipline

options list on the Quick Access Toolbar. The four tabs that make up the
STRUCTURES discipline are displayed.

The STAIRS LADDERS HANDRAIL tab contains SLH application specific functions.

The STAIRS LADDERS HANDRAILS tab will generally be referred to as the SLH tab in this training guide.

2.3 The SLH User Interface

As with many other AVEVA E3D Design applications, SLH is a Microsoft® Office Fluent™– based user interface.
A series of tabs are displayed at the top of the screen. Some tabs are common across all design disciplines,
while other tabs are specific to the application being used. The SLH tab is one of four tabs in the STRUCTURES
discipline and is the focal point for creation and modification of SLH elements.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 18 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

The SLH tab has four groups. Create, Modify, Delete and Tools.

Generally, when a button is clicked a form is displayed which is docked on the right-hand side of the 3D View.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 19 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

2.4 SLH Form Layout and Features

Throughout the SLH application, common form layout and features have been used, an overview of which is
given in the following sections. The general layout of both the Create and Modify forms are the same.

The top section of the form allows Representation Mode

selection and displays the pages to be completed as part of the
creation process. The number of pages will vary with both the
element type and Representation Mode being used.

The mid-section of the form allows users to enter information

pertinent to the page being considered. This may consist of text
fields, graphical selection processes, and checkbox options.

The lower section of the form provides summary information

(when available) and provides action buttons and Forward and
Back buttons to facilitate the creation or modification process.

A small number of forms available within the application do not

adhere to the common functions. Where this is the case
additional explanation will be provided in the relevant section
of the guide.Some fields or buttons in the forms may be
inactive. Inactive fields or buttons are greyed out and usually
arise as a result of:

• Missing mandatory information in a page.

• Geometry errors in component creation.

• Default settings made by an Administrator.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 20 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

On successful completion of a page the text displaying the name of the page in the top part of the form
changes to become a link label. This enables navigation between completed pages and editing of previous
settings.

Similar functionality is reflected in the Summary section at the bottom of the form. Successfully selected
geometry parameters change to link labels; enabling navigation to the parameter was set.

Other common form functions are explained below:

Mandatory – indicates mandatory information is still required.

Completed – indicates that mandatory information is completed.

Autonaming – names the element being created using pre-defined naming rules.

Show Dimension – displays a graphical aid showing the geometry parameter being considered.

Checkbox – Allows users to toggle options in forms.

Flip – allows the user to change the direction of the element.

Next – arrow button that takes the user to the next page of the form.

Back – arrow button that takes the user to the previous page of the form.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 21 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

Data Hierarchy and Element Types

The data hierarchy employed by SLH is similar to that used by other structural utilities. A brief overview of the
SLH hierarchy is provided below.

Before physical model elements can be created a number of administrative elements must be in place.
Administrative elements divide the model into structured areas and own the geometric elements that make
up the physical representation of the model.

As with all AVEVA E3D Design databases, the uppermost element is the World represented symbolically as /*.
SITE and ZONE elements are also required to own hierarchy elements relating to the structural disciplines.

Typical Stairs, Ladders, and Handrail Hierarchy

Structure (STRU), Framework (FRMW), or Sub-frame (SBFR) elements are all legal owners of SLH elements.
Within the SLH hierarchy further administrative elements exist for Handrail (HANDRA), Stair Flights (STRFLT),
Step Ladders (SLADDR) and Rung Ladders (RLADDR).

The data components owned by these items will vary depending on the mode used to create the elements
and the type of SLH element created.

Mode and element specific hierarchies are provided in relevant chapters.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 22 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
 CHAPTER 3

3 Stair Flights
This chapter covers the creation and modification of Stair Flight (STRFLT) elements. The hierarchy of both
Layout mode and Detail mode stair flights is explained, along with a number of unique features relating to
creation and modification of stair flights.

3.1 Stair Flight Hierarchy Overview

The administrative hierarchy is the same as other SLH elements; however, the component hierarchy varies
depending on the Representation Mode used. The diagrams below illustrate typical component hierarchies
for a Stair Flight.

Hierarchy for Layout Mode

Element Description

STRFLT Stair Flight element

HANDRA Handrail element
RPATH Route Path element
POINTR Route Point element

The hierarchy diagram represents a stair flight created in Layout mode with handrail applied to both stringers.
A STRFLT element owns an RPATH element defining the stair flight centreline route and two HANDRA
elements. In turn, the HANDRA elements own RPATH elements that define the handrail route along each
stringer.

Pre-defined element representations are applied to the RPATH, providing the physical representation of the
stair flight in the model.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 23 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

Hierarchy for Detail Mode

Element Description

BOTEXT Bottom Extension element

STRSTR Stair Stringer element
TREADS Tread Set element
TREAD Tread element
INTLNG Intermediate Landing element
TOPEXT Top Extension element

This hierarchy represents a stair flight created in Detail mode with top and bottom extensions, an intermediate
landing, and handrail on both stringer elements. To support this degree of detail, a broader hierarchy of
elements is required.

Some elements within the hierarchy may own template items. Handrail elements within detailed stair flights
are more complex and are considered in greater detail later in this guide.

3.2 Creating a Stair Flight

The SLH application enables users to create stair flights with a variety of pitch and stringer configurations. The
available configurations are held in the Defaults assigned to each project.

On the SLH tab, in the Create group, clicking the Stair Flight button displays the Create Stair Flight form.

Depending on the Representation Mode selected, the form has four or five pages for the creation process.
Creating stair flights using both representation modes is described in the worked examples later in this
chapter.

Copyright © 2020.
Page 24 of 126
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
AVEVA™ E3D Design (2.1)
TM-1813

The format of the Create Stair Flight form is typical of other creation forms within the SLH application. It makes
use of many of the common functions and features noted in previous sections. However, there are some
features unique to the creation of which are described in the following sections.

3.2.1 Reference Point Options

There are a number of options relate to picking reference points. Reference points allow the user to specify
the edge from which a stair flight will start and the edge, or plane, at which the stair flight will terminate. The
start and end points of the stair flight are noted as the FROM and TO reference points.

The FROM reference point has particular significance as it uses the selected edge to set the direction of the
stair flight. The direction of the stair flight will be perpendicular to the direction of the selected edge.

The FROM Reference Point must initially be set by making a

graphical selection via the Pick Edge (FFL) button. Thereafter,
its position may be adjusted by clicking the Pick Edge (FFL)
button again and picking a new edge or by clicking the Modify
Position… link label.

Clicking the Modify Position… link label displays an Explicit

Positioning form allowing the user to specify an explicit co-
ordinate with respect to a datum.

When selecting the TO Reference Point, the user can select from two methods; connecting to an Edge or
connecting to a Plane.

If the